JP7044264B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of performing an effect.

A gaming machine having a function of customizing an image and a sound of a gaming machine using a mobile terminal has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-231921

However, the effect of attracting customers cannot be expected for a player who finds it troublesome to use a customization function using a mobile terminal or a player who does not have a mobile terminal.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having an improved effect of attracting customers.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is
It is a gaming machine that can perform production,
A production storage means that can store multiple effects,
Prescribed information collecting means for collecting predetermined information including information related to the game, and
Based on the collection predetermined information which is the predetermined information collected by the predetermined information collecting means, an executable effect is specified from the plurality of effects, and an effect that can be executed according to an increase in the collected predetermined information is specified. Executable production identification means to increase the production to be specified as,
An execution effect setting means for selecting and setting an effect to be executed from the effects specified by the enableable effect specifying means, and an execution effect setting means.
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
Based on the operation of the operation means, the effect changing means for setting the effect selectable by the execution effect setting means to be changeable, and the effect changing means.
It is equipped with a game store setting means that enables predetermined settings related to the production based on the operation of the game store .
The effects specified by the current collection schedule information include the effects specified by the collection schedule information before the change to the current collection schedule information.
The effect changing means is
The effect that the execution effect setting means does not include the effect newly specified based on the change to the current collection predetermined information, and is the effect specified by the collection predetermined information before the change to the current collection predetermined information. Set to be changeable so that the effect to be executed is selected from the effect of the predetermined range that includes only the effect.
The settings related to the effect can be set by the operation of the operation means of the player, the first setting that can be set by the game store setting means, and the operation of the operation means of the player. There is a second setting that cannot be set, and the setting by the effect changing means is the second setting .

According to the present invention, the effect of attracting customers can be improved.

It is a perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure which shows the board production apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a figure which shows an example of the bit transposition pattern of a random number. It is a flowchart explaining the checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining the initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining an input process. It is a flowchart explaining the switch reading process. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining the payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining fraud & prize monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining the winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart explaining a command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the common process of a special figure start port switch. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure hold information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the symbol variation control process. Special figure It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. Special figure It is a flowchart explaining the ordinary process transition setting process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining 2 byte distribution processing. It is a flowchart explaining the distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining the fluctuation start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process (special figure 1) during special figure change. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process (special figure 2) during special figure change. It is a flowchart explaining the process during special figure change. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process while displaying a special figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a special figure. It is a flowchart explaining the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the effect mode information check process. It is a flowchart explaining the time shortening fluctuation number update process. Special figure It is a flowchart explaining the normal process transition setting process 2 (at the end of time saving). It is a figure explaining the opening and closing pattern of the upper prize opening. It is a figure explaining the lower prize opening opening opening and closing pattern. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the solenoid information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 1 during the opening of a large winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 2 during the opening of a large winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the process during opening of a big prize opening. It is a flowchart explaining the large prize opening residual ball processing transition setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 3 during the opening of a large winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the processing of the remaining ball of a large winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end process transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end setting process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure normal process transition setting process 3. It is a flowchart explaining the normal figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining the gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the Fuden winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. It is a flowchart explaining the ordinary process transition setting process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process during a change of a normal figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process during a change of a normal figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a normal figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process in the middle of a normal figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process in the middle of a normal figure. It is a flowchart explaining the normal electric operation transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the processing of the remaining spheres of a normal electric power. It is a flowchart explaining the end process per ordinary figure. It is a flowchart explaining the segment LED editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the external information editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the main prize ball signal editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the start port signal editing process. It is a figure which shows the main function of an effect control device. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in an effect control device. It is a figure explaining the process of determination and initialization of unique information. It is a flowchart explaining the hall / player setting mode processing. It is a flowchart explaining the model switching process. It is a figure explaining the setting information of a model. It is a figure explaining the kind and arrangement of a symbol. It is a figure explaining the variation pattern selection table group. It is a figure explaining the fluctuation pattern table group. It is a flowchart explaining the received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining the variable system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the variation effect setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the advance notice lottery process during the first half change. It is a flowchart explaining the advance notice lottery process during the latter half change. It is a flowchart explaining the effect mode management process. It is a figure explaining the model content change condition. It is a figure explaining the table for selecting a notice. It is a figure explaining the detail of the variation pattern selection table. It is a figure explaining the display example about the change of the effect mode. It is a flowchart explaining the backup system command processing. It is a figure explaining the transition of data in a backup system command processing. It is a figure explaining an example of a command. It is a figure explaining the update example of the variation pattern selection table. It is a figure explaining the data transition in one-shot command processing. It is a figure explaining the transition of data in RTC command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the main processing in the effect control apparatus in the 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot system command processing in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the model switching process in the 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining the transition of the model switching setting information in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the effect mode management process in 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining the model content change condition in the 3rd modification. It is a front view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of a rotation display device. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of a rotation display device. It is a figure explaining the operation mode which was seen from the front of the rotation display device. It is a figure explaining the operation mode which was seen from the side of the rotation display device. It is a figure explaining the detection state in the 1st motor switch sensor and the 2nd motor switch sensor in a rotation display device. It is a flowchart explaining the hall / player setting mode processing. It is a flowchart explaining the content release process. It is a figure explaining the display content on a display device. It is a perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining the structure of a batch display device. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the special figure 1 display. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the special figure 2 display. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the special figure 2 display. It is a figure explaining the structure of a special result. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern. It is a figure explaining the opening / closing pattern of the special variable winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the opening / closing pattern of the special variable winning apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining the initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining an input process. It is a flowchart explaining the switch reading process. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining the payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining fraud & prize monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining the winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart explaining the effect command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 abnormality change monitoring process. Special figure 2 is a diagram illustrating changes in the number of abnormal fluctuations. Special FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example in which anomalous fluctuation notification is performed. It is a flowchart explaining the gaming machine state check process. It is a flowchart explaining the payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart explaining the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure start port 1 switch processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure hold information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure start port 2 switch processing. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart explaining game processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart explaining game processing. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening switch monitoring process. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining 2 byte distribution processing. It is a flowchart explaining the distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining the fluctuation start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the high probability fluctuation number update process. Special FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating a process transition setting process during fluctuation. Special FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a process transition setting process during fluctuation. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating processing during fluctuation. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating processing during fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 display process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 display process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart explaining the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 1 during the opening of a large winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 2 during the opening of a large winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the process during opening of a big prize opening. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot operation transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the processing of the remaining ball of a large winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end process transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the process in small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining the process during a small hit. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit residual ball processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the symbol variation control process. It is a flowchart explaining the segment LED editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the board radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the external information editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the start port 1 signal editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the main prize ball signal editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the symbol fixed number signal editing process. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display device. It is a figure explaining the variation mode of a design for production. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display device. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display device. It is a flowchart explaining the production lottery process. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display device. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display device. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display device. It is a figure explaining the display mode in the game number display part in the 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the display mode in the display device in the 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the display mode in the display device in the 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 game processing in 2nd modification. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating special figure 2 game processing in the second modification. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening switch monitoring process in the 2nd modification. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example in which anomalous fluctuation notification is performed in the third modification. It is a figure explaining the change of the special figure 2 abnormal winning number in the 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining the change of the special figure 2 abnormal winning number in the 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining the structure of the collective display device in 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the interruption of the special figure variation display game in the 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the display device and the special figure display device at the time of interruption in the 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the display device and the special figure display device at the time of interruption in the 4th modification. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating processing during fluctuation in Special FIG. 1 in the fourth modification. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating processing during fluctuation in the special figure 2 in the fourth modification. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating special figure 1 game processing in the fourth modification. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a special figure 2 game process in the fourth modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 big hit end processing in 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 big hit end processing in 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 small hit end processing in 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 small hit end processing in 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the pattern of the control method in 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the display mode in the special figure display in the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining another example of the structure of the special figure display in the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining another example of the structure of the special figure display in the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining another example of the structure of the special figure display in the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining another example of the structure of the special figure display in the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining another example of the structure of the special figure display in the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining the transition of the gaming state in the 6th modification. It is a figure explaining the transmission timing of the probability information command in the 6th modification. It is a figure explaining the transmission timing of the customer waiting command in the 6th modification.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is rotatably assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 via a hinge 13. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body) 12.

Further, above the glass frame 15, a lighting device (moving light) 16 having a built-in lamp and a motor and a lamp (LED) 17 for notifying a payout abnormality are provided. Further, on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, a frame decoration device 18 having a built-in lamp or the like to emit light for decoration or production, and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. There is. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided in the lower part of the front frame 12.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (storage plate) for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown), and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 are provided. The outflowing upper plate ball outlet 22, the lower plate (receiver) 23 for storing the game balls discharged when the upper plate 21 is full, the operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launching device, and the like are provided. Further, the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21 is provided with an effect button 25 that serves as an operation means having a built-in operation switch for receiving an operation input from the player. Further, on the lower right side of the lower part of the front frame 12, a key 26 for opening and locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided.

Further, on the front surface of the glass frame 15 above the upper plate 21, there is a ball lending button 27 operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a prepaid card is ejected from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28 to be operated, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the hitting ball launching device moves the gaming ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the gaming area 32 on the front surface of the gaming board 30. Fire. Further, by operating the effect button 25, the player can perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). can.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect component) 40 having a display device 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41 and project forward from the display surface of the display device 41. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the periphery of the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube), for example. In the area (display area) where the image on the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbol), a character that directs the special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the effect of the effect is displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

Further, in the upper part of the center case 40, a board effect device 44 that produces a game by operating is provided. The board effect device 44 includes a triangular columnar rotating member 44a as shown in FIG. 3A and a drive source for operating the rotating member 44a. Rotating shafts 44b extending along the extending direction of the rotating member 44a are provided on the left and right end faces of the rotating member 44a, and the rotating shaft 44b is rotatably supported along the extending direction to support the rotating member. 44a is rotatably arranged with respect to the center case 40. Further, the rotating member 44a can be rotated by rotationally driving the rotating shaft 44b by a drive source, whereby the side surface of the rotating member 44a that can be visually recognized by the player can be changed.

Character information related to the game as shown in FIGS. 3 (b) to 3 (d) is described on each side surface of the rotating member 44a. As will be described later, the gaming machine of the present embodiment is configured so that the model can be changed, and as shown in FIG. 3 (b), the characters "ABC", which is the first model name, are displayed on one side surface. As shown in FIG. 3 (c), the characters "Iroha", which is the second model name, are written on another side surface. Further, as shown in FIG. 3 (d), on another side, the character "CHANGE" suggesting that there is a high possibility of a big hit is described.

Returning to FIG. 2, a normal symbol start gate (normal figure start gate) 34 is provided on the left side and the right side of the center case 40 of the game area 32. Three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40. The game balls that have won in these general winning openings 35 are detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 4).

Further, below the center case 40, a start winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the special figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 4). The start winning opening 36 is provided with a pair of movable members 37b and 37b that can be opened in an inverted "C" shape at the top and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in, and a second starting winning opening (2nd starting winning opening) inside. A normal variable winning device (Public electric) 37 having a starting winning area) is arranged.

The pair of movable members 37b, 37b of the ordinary variable winning device 37 always keeps a closed closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) at intervals of about the diameter of the game ball. However, since the starting winning opening 36 is provided above the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state. Then, when the result of the normal fluctuation display game is in the predetermined stop display mode, the normal fluctuation prize is opened by the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 4) as a driving device to open in the shape of an inverted "C". The device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous for the player) in which the game ball easily flows into the device 37. The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 4). It should be noted that the game ball can be won even in the closed state, and the game ball may be more difficult to win in the closed state than in the open state.

Further, below the normal variable winning device 37, there is a first special variable winning device (first large winning opening, lower size) that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A winning opening) 38 is arranged.

The first special variable winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side, and is the result of a special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the big winning opening is changed from the closed state (closed state disadvantageous to the player) to the open state (favorable state for the player). That is, the first special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a large winning opening opened and closed by an opening / closing door 38c driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 4) as a driving device, and during the special gaming state, By converting the large winning opening from the closed state to the open state, the inflow of the game ball into the large winning opening is facilitated, and a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. Inside the large winning opening (winning area), a lower count switch 38a (see FIG. 4) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two lower count switches 38a are provided, and the gaming ball that has flowed into the large winning opening is detected by any of the lower count switches 38a. By providing a plurality of lower count switches 38a in this way, it is possible to quickly detect the game ball that has flowed into the large winning opening. Further, below the first special variable winning device 38, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that did not win in the winning opening or the like is provided.

Further, in the upper left part of the center case 40, there is a second special variable winning device (second large winning opening, upper large winning) that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. Mouth) 39 is arranged. Like the first special variable winning device 38, the second special variable winning device 39 also has an attacker-type opening / closing door (movable member) 39c that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side. Depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game, the big winning opening is changed from a closed state (a closed state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player). That is, the second special variable winning device 39 includes, for example, a large winning opening opened and closed by an opening / closing door 39c driven by a large winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 4) as a driving device, and during the special gaming state, By converting the large winning opening from the closed state to the open state, the inflow of the game ball into the large winning opening is facilitated, and a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. Inside the large winning opening (winning area), an upper count switch 39a (see FIG. 4) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. In the special gaming state, either the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39 is released, but which one is released is determined by the result mode (special result) of the special figure variation display game. Will be done.

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure start gate 34, which form the special figure fluctuation display game, are reached. A batch display device 50 for displaying a normal map fluctuation display game triggered by a prize and displaying various information is provided.

The batch display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 1 display) 51 and a second special figure for a first special figure fluctuation display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. The second special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 2 display) 52 for the fluctuation display game, the fluctuation display unit (normal figure display) 53 for the normal figure fluctuation display game composed of LED lamps, and the same LED lamp. It is provided with storage display units 54, 55, 56 for notifying the start storage number of each variation display game composed of. Further, the batch display device 50 has a first game state display unit (first game state display) 57 that lights up when a big hit occurs to notify the occurrence of a big hit, and lights up when a time saving state occurs to notify the occurrence of a time saving state. 2nd game state display unit (2nd game state display) 58, 3rd game state display unit (3rd game) that displays that the probability state of the jackpot is in the high probability state when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on. A status display (probability status display unit) 59, and a round display unit 60 that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39) are provided.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is centered, for example, during the execution of the variation display game, that is, while the decorative special figure variation display game is being performed on the display device 41. Flashes the segment to indicate that it is changing. Then, when the result of the game is "missing", for example, the central segment is turned on as the result mode of the loss, and when the result of the game is "hit", the result mode of the hit (special result mode) is not. The game result is displayed by turning on the result mode (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the result mode.

The normal figure display 53 blinks the lamp during the fluctuation to indicate that the fluctuation is in progress, and after a predetermined time, displays the game result as a lighting mode and a lighting color according to the result of the game. Further, the normal figure hold display 56 displays the number of start storages (= number of hold) of the normal figure start gate 34, which is a fluctuation start condition of the normal figure display, by turning off, blinking, and turning on the plurality of LEDs. For example, when the number of holdings is "0", the lamps 1 to 3 are turned off, and when the number of holdings is "1", only the lamp 1 is turned on. When the number of holds is "2", only the lamp 2 is turned on, and when the number of holds is "3", only the lamp 3 is turned on. Then, when the number of holdings is "4", all the lamps 1 to 3 are turned on.

The special figure 1 hold indicator 54 turns off a plurality of LEDs for the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = hold number) among the number of winning balls to the start winning opening 36, which is a variable start condition of the special figure 1 display. , Blinking, lighting to display. The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 sets the number of start storages (= hold number) of the second start winning opening (normal variable winning device 37), which is the fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 display 52, by turning off the plurality of LEDs. Displayed by blinking and lighting. Here, the special figure 1 hold indicator 54 and the special figure 2 hold indicator 55 display the start storage number in the same lighting mode as the normal figure hold indicator 56.

The first game state display unit 57 turns off the lamp in the normal game state, and turns on the lamp when a big hit occurs, for example. The second game state display unit 58, for example, turns off the lamp in the normal game state, and turns on the lamp when the time saving state occurs.

The third game state display unit (probability state display unit) 59 turns off the lamp when the probability state of the big hit is a low probability state (normal probability state) when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, and the game machine 10 is turned off. If the probability state of the big hit is a high probability state when the power is turned on, the lamp is turned on.

For example, the round display unit 60 turns off the lamp when not in the special game state, and turns on the lamp corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result during the special game state. The round display unit may be composed of a 7-segment type display.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a gaming ball (pachinko ball) from a launching device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal drawing start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35. , The starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37 or the special variable winning device 38, 39 is won, or the game flows into the out port 30a provided at the lowermost portion of the gaming area 32 and is discharged from the gaming area 32. Then, when a game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38, 39, the number of winning balls corresponding to the type of the winning winning opening is the payout control device. From the payout unit controlled by 200 (see FIG. 4), it is discharged to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the front frame 12.

On the other hand, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 4) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal figure start gate 34 is provided in the normal figure start gate 34. When the game ball driven into the area 32 passes through the normal map start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a and the normal map variation display game is played. In addition, a state in which the normal figure fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, a state in which the normal figure change display game has already been played and the normal figure change display game has not ended, or a state in which the normal figure change display game is hit and a normal change winning device is used. When the game ball passes through the normal figure start gate 34 when 37 is converted to the open state, if it is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4) of the normal figure start memory number, the normal figure start memory number is added (for example). +1) and one normal figure start memory will be memorized. The stored number of the normal map start prize is displayed on the normal map hold display 56 of the batch display device 50. In addition, the hit determination random value (win random value) for determining the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is stored in the normal map start memory, and this hit determination random value is used as the determination value. The result of the variable display game of the normal map is determined by referring to. When the hit determination random value matches the determination value, the normal map variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

The normal figure fluctuation display game is provided in the batch display device 50 and is displayed by a variable display unit (normal figure display) 53 composed of LEDs, and the lighting mode and lighting color of the LEDs are normal. It forms identification information (normal pattern, ordinary pattern). It should be noted that the normal figure display 53 is configured by a display device, and for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc. are used as ordinary identification information, and after displaying this in a predetermined time variation, it is configured to be stopped and displayed to display the result. You may. If the stop display of the normal fluctuation display game results in the normal map identification result, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in an open state in which the pair of movable members 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 are opened for a predetermined time. As a result, it becomes easier for the game ball to win a prize in the second start winning opening inside the normal variable winning device 37, and the number of times the second special figure variable display game is executed increases.

The winning ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning ball to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a, respectively, which are provided inside. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected as the starting winning ball of the first special figure variation display game, is stored as the first starting memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4), and is normally changed. The game ball that has won a prize in the winning device 37 is detected as the starting winning ball of the second special figure variation display game, and is stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). Further, when the start winning ball is detected, a big hit random value, a big hit symbol random value, and each fluctuation pattern random value are extracted as start memory information, and the extracted random value is in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 4). The special figure storage area (a part of the RAM) is stored as the special figure start storage up to a predetermined number of times (for example, up to 4 times). Then, the stored number of the special figure start storage is displayed on the storage display unit (special figure 1 hold display 54, special figure 2 hold display 55) for notifying the start winning number of the batch display device 50, and is also displayed at the center. It is also displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display on the display device 41 of the case 40.

The game control device 100 has a special figure 1 display 51 (variable display device) or a special figure 2 display 52 (variable display) based on the winning to the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, or their starting memory. The device) plays the first or second special figure variation display game. The first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are performed by displaying a plurality of special symbols (special figures, identification information) in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying a predetermined result mode. Further, a decorative special figure variable display game for variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) is executed on the display device (image display device) 41. Then, as a result of the special figure variation display game, when the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result mode (special result), it becomes a big hit and a special gaming state ( So-called big hit state). In addition, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 corresponding to this is also a special result mode.

In the decorative special symbol variation display game in the display device 41, for example, in the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numbers and the like is displayed in the left variable display area (first special symbol) and the right variable display area (1st special symbol). In each of the second special symbol) and the medium fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is variablely displayed (high-speed fluctuation) at a speed that makes it difficult to identify. Then, the symbols that are changing after a predetermined time are stopped in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area, and stopped in each of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode composed of the displayed identification information. In addition, the display device 41 plays a variable display game with a decorative special symbol corresponding to the number of special figure start memories, and various effects such as the appearance of characters are performed to improve the interest.

The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variation display may be performed independently or not at the same time. The game is displayed. Further, the display device 41 may also use different display devices or different display areas in the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, or use the same display device or display area. However, the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed so that they are not executed independently or at the same time. Further, the game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41. Further, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, if there is a start memory of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, and the special figure variation display game can be executed, the second special figure variation display game is played. It is supposed to be executed (priority).

Further, in a state where the first special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) can be started and the start memory number is 0, the start winning opening 36 (or the normal variable winning device 37) is inserted. When the game ball wins a prize, the start memory is stored with the generation of the start right, the number of start memories is incremented by 1, and the first special figure variation display game (second special figure) is immediately based on the start memory. The variable display game) is started, and at this time, the starting memory number is decremented by 1. On the other hand, a state in which the first special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) cannot be started immediately, for example, the first or second special figure variation display game has already been played, and the special figure variation display game ends. If the game ball wins in the start winning opening 36 (or the normal variable winning device 37) when the game is not in the game state or in the special game state, the starting memory number is 1 if the starting memory number is less than the upper limit. It is added and one start memory is stored. Then, in a state where the starting memory number is 1 or more, the first special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) can be started (the end of the previous special figure variation display game or the special game state). At the end), the start memory number is decremented by 1, and the first special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) is started based on the stored start memory. In the following description, when the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variation display game.

Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the count switch 38a, The 39a is provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil is used. ing. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or the front frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 or the like is a micro switch having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

FIG. 4 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment. The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It includes a CPU unit 110 having a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and uses an operating clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 or the like to generate. A predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to enable operation. Will be done.

The power supply device 400 is a normal power supply having an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from a DC32V voltage. A power failure monitoring signal that has a unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure. It also includes a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal or a reset signal.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, mainly. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the embodiment. By providing it, it is possible to exclude it from the target of replacement and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with an initialization switch 112. When the initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, a process of forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200. Is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area of the CPU 111A and a storage area of various signals and random numbers during game control. It is used as. As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start storage to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), which is a fluctuation pattern after the reach state, and fluctuations before the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state (special gaming state) for the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results is already derived and displayed at a stage where it is not yet derived. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas of the display device. When the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle after display and the result mode is displayed, the left and right variable display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example). The state in which the variable display is stopped due to the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display regions is satisfied (for example, the same). The state in which the identification information is used, except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. Further, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variable display game. That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived (when it is out of order) in the special figure variation display game. Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining a jackpot in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in a special figure variation display game (various types). Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining (including the execution time of the fluctuation display game in reach and non-reach fluctuation display), hit random numbers for determining the hit of the clock fluctuation display game, etc. A clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 is provided. There is.

Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one of the variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A has a game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, a probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state, and a current game. Based on the operating state (normal operating state or time-saving operating state) of the normal variable winning device 37 as a state, the number of start storages, etc., one of the variable pattern tables is selected and acquired from a plurality of variable pattern tables. do. Here, the CPU 111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit 600, and controls for paying out the lending ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, a starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, and a general. Figure: A gate switch 34a in the starting gate 34, a winning opening switch 35a, a lower count switch 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, and an upper count switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39, which are connected to and supplied from these switches. Interface chips (proximity I / F) 121a and 121b are provided, in which a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V is input and converted into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. Since the input range of the proximity I / F 121a and 121b is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is illegally shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as floating and output an abnormality detection signal.

The reason why the proximity I / F121a and the proximity I / F121b are provided is that the number of input terminals of the proximity I / F121a is limited. The cost of the proximity I / F121b is reduced by using a smaller one than the proximity I / F121a according to the number of insufficient input terminals. It should be noted that a proximity I / F121a having the required number of input terminals may be used, and the proximity I / F121b may not be provided.

The outputs of the proximity I / F 121a and 121b are supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121a and 121b, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower count switch 38a and the upper count switch 39a are the second inputs. Input to port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121a and 121b, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signals 1 and 2 output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, in the third input port 124, the detection signal of the magnetic sensor switch 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10, the frame radio wave fraud signal output from the payout control device 200, and the payout busy. Signals are also input. The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting the radio wave, and the payout busy signal indicates whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command. It is a signal. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine so that the detection signal is input to the third input port 124.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121a and 121b, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 to the test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121a and 121b, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. ..

As described above, the proximity I / F 121a and 121b have a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121a and 121b are supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become like.

The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 receives signals and payouts from the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the game machine 10 and the front frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 and the like. A status signal indicating a payout abnormality from the control device 200, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, an overflow switch signal indicating an overflow, and a touch switch signal based on the input of a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24. Is provided, and a first input port 122 is provided to take in and supply the signal to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. The overflow switch signal is a signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored (full) in the lower plate 23.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RST is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130 to turn off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing test device. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged in a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like are transmitted via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121a, 121b, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine controls the game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be achieved. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not go through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test device.

Further, the output unit 130 has a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 1) 38b connected to the data bus 140 to open the first special variable winning device 38, and a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) to open the second special variable winning device 39. 2) A second output port 134 is provided for outputting open / closed data of the solenoid (solenoid) 37c that opens the movable member 37b of the 39b and the ordinary variable winning device 37. Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and information about the game machine 10 can be externally transmitted. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signals of the large winning opening solenoid 38b, the large winning opening solenoid 39b, and the peripheral current solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. It is output from the second driver 138b and the fourth output port 136 that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the driver (drive circuit) 138a and the third output port 135. The external information signal supplied from the third driver 138c and the fifth output port 137 that output the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current draw-in side of the batch display device 50 to the external device such as the management device is output to the external information terminal 71. A fourth driver 138d is provided.

To the first driver 138a, DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a current is passed through the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and a current is drawn from the cathode terminal via the segment wire by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of bilateral communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can send and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the transmission / reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The effect control device 300 is for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. It is equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A holdable FeRAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a time measuring means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect content, instructs the VDP 312 about the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the playback sound, lights the decorative lamp, and the motor. And the drive control of the solenoid, the management of the production time, etc. are executed.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. The wait signal WAIT etc. for the purpose is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal sync signal HSYNC, and a vertical sync signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A sound ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An effect control command signal (effect command) such as a decorative special figure hold number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331. ). Since the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 and a glass frame 15 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect provided on a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 and a game board 30 (including a center case 40) for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, a frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided. A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. It should be noted that a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided on the glass frame 15 (for example, a motor for operating the moving light 16) may be provided.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, and an effect switch 47 (effect switch 47) for detecting the initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44. The function of detecting the on / off state of the motor switch) and inputting the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 are detected and sent to the main control microcomputer 311. A switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300. DC32V, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motor and LED, DC5V for power supply voltage of command I / F331, DC15V for driving motor, LED and speaker It is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, the DC- is used to generate DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, VDP312 (VDPREST signal), sound source LSI314, amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc., are output from the main control microcomputer 311. It is supplied to the signal) and puts them in the reset state. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

Next, the game control performed in these control circuits will be described. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, a random value for hit determination in the normal figure is extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34, and the ROM 111B Compared with the judgment value stored in, the process of judging the hit / miss of the normal figure fluctuation display game is performed. Then, a process is performed in which the identification symbol is variablely displayed for a predetermined time on the normal map display, and then the normal map variable display game to be stopped and displayed is displayed. When the result of this normal fluctuation display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the normal figure display, the normal electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is operated for a predetermined time (for example). , 0.3 seconds) Control to open as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is out of sync, the normal map display is controlled to display the result mode of the out of alignment.

Further, the start winning prize (starting memory) is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, and based on this starting memory, the first special figure variation display game The random value for big hit determination is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and the process of determining the hit / miss of the first special figure variation display game is performed. Further, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, and based on this start memory, the jackpot determination of the second special figure variation display game is performed. The random value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and the process of determining the hit / miss of the second special figure variation display game is performed.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, a process is performed in which the identification symbol is variablely displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and then the special figure variation display game to be stopped and displayed is displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) of the game ball flowing down the game area 32. Make an eggplant.

Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of displaying the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling light emission of various LEDs based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and generates a special game state. Perform the process of making it. In the process of generating the special gaming state, the CPU 111A opens, for example, the opening / closing door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38 by the large winning opening solenoid 38b, or the second special variable winning device 39 is movable by the large winning opening solenoid 39b. The member 39c is opened, and control is performed so that the game ball can flow into the large winning opening. Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the big winning opening, or a predetermined opening time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the big winning opening. One round is to open the big winning opening until the condition is achieved, and the control (cycle game) is performed to continue (repeat) the predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 times, 11 times or 2 times). That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this high probability state, the probability of a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that in the normal probability state. In addition, regardless of which of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game results in a high probability state, the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure Both variable display games are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this time-saving state, the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 are controlled to be in the normal fluctuation operating state, and the normal fluctuation winning device per unit time is controlled as compared with the case where the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the normal operating state. The opening time of 37 is controlled so as to be substantially long.

For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (normal map fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal map fluctuation display game to be a second variable display time shorter than the first variable display time (for example). 10000ms is 1000ms). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game to be a second stop time (for example, 704 ms) shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms). Is. Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is the first opening time (for example, 100 ms) in the normal state. It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer (for example, 1352 ms). Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is larger than the number of times the first opening time (for example, 2 times) is obtained with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number (for example, 4 times). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to set the probability (normal probability) of the hit result of the normal map fluctuation display game to be higher than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operating state.

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the normal power probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set multiple types of time saving states that change different things. Further, it may be set so that the movable member 37b is not opened in the normal operating state (probability of normal drawing is 0). Further, in the case of a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high-probability state and the time-saving state can be generated independently, and both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 6 and 7 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 6, first, a process for disabling interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then an interrupt vector setting process (step S1) for setting the vector address of the jump destination to be executed when an interrupt occurs (step S1). Step S2), the stack pointer setting process (step S3) for setting the stack pointer, which is the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs, is performed. Next, a firing prohibition signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step S4). The firing permission signal is set to the prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S5), the interrupt mode setting process (step S6) for setting the interrupt processing mode is performed, and the power delay timer is set (step). S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to an instruction from the game control device 100 that is the main control means A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can prevent the command from being missed. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the timekeeping of the power delay timer is performed using a storage area (RAM area or register, etc. that is not subject to validity determination) that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the state of the first input port 122 is read before the start of the standby time to ensure that the initialization switch 112 is operated. Can be detected. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the waiting time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 may be operated after the waiting time has elapsed, or the initialization switch 112 may be operated from the power-on to the waiting time. You need to keep doing it. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such annoying operations, and the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power. Can be prevented from being unacceptable.

After performing the process of setting the power delay timer (step S7), the process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed. First, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S8), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. (Step S9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the start of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and whether the timer value is 0 or not. Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks for the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). When the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, when the standby time has expired, access permission is granted to the read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM (step S13). ), Output off-data to all output ports (set to no output) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15) and read first. However, it is determined from the state of the first input port 122 whether the initialization switch is turned on (step S16).

When the initialization switch is off (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (step S17), and if it is normal (step S17). S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data (step S18). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19), and the calculated checksum and the power are turned off. It is determined whether the checksums of the times match (step S20). When the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 of FIG. 7, and processing is performed when the power is normally restored from the power failure.

Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 of FIG. 7 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

In step S21 of FIG. 7, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The area to be initialized here is a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. It is considered to be indefinite. After that, the area in the RWM for storing the gaming state is examined to determine whether or not the gaming state is a high-probability state (step S22). Here, if the probability is not high (step S22; N), steps S23 and S24 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S25. Further, in the case of high probability (step S22; Y), on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), for example, the high probability notification LED (error indicator) provided in the batch display device 50 is turned on. (Lighting) Data is saved in the segment area (step S24). Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control board (step S25), and the process proceeds to step S31.

On the other hand, when jumping from steps S16, S17, S18, and S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permission (step S26), and all the RAM areas including the busy signal status area are cleared to 0. (Step S27), the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the production mode. Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31.

The command at the time of power failure recovery transmitted in step S25 and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in step S30 include a model designation command indicating the type of the gaming machine and a decoration indicating the number of holdings in the special figures 1 and 2. The special figure 1 hold number command, the decorative special figure 2 hold number command, and the probability information command indicating the state of the probability are included. Also, depending on the state when the power is turned off or turned on, the recovery screen command is used when the special figure fluctuation display game is running when the power is turned off, and the customer waiting demo command is used when the customer is waiting when the power is turned off. , If it is initialized at power-on, the power-on command is included. Further, depending on the model, an effect mode information command indicating the state of the effect mode and a time reduction number information command indicating the number of remaining games in the time reduction state are included.

In step S31, a process of activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. It also includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. As shown in FIG. 8, for example, the bit transposition pattern is a different bit arrangement (arrangement after the lower bit transposition) by exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order. ) Is a pattern that determines how to replace when stored. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the values of the predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of turning on the power are extracted, and the corresponding initial value random numbers (random numbers for determining the jackpot symbol (big hit symbol random number 1, jackpot symbol random number 1). 2) After saving in a predetermined area of RWM as an initial value (start value) of a random number (hit random number) that determines a hit in a normal figure (step S33), an interrupt is permitted (step S34). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it can be difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the initial value random number update process (step S35) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the hit random number are configured to be generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number and the winning random number have the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing, which is the processing unit of the program. It is a "slow counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing). Further, in the big hit symbol random number and the hit symbol random number, a so-called "initial value change method" is adopted in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number makes a round. It should be noted that each random number may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number and the hit random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step S35, the number of times to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S36), and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S35) (step S34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to avoid the interrupt processing being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

In the initial value random number update process in step S35, in addition to the main process, there is also a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process. In order to avoid executing the value random number update process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process. If the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process, which causes the main process. It has the advantage of being simplified.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step S39) is complete. The process of outputting off-data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S42). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S44), a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S45). ), And then wait for the power of the gaming machine to be turned off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to the instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control device) that delays the start of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is provided. , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the fact that the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of being operated from the outside, and the initialization operation unit are operated. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C is provided, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation process]
FIG. 9 shows the checksum calculation process (steps S19, S43) in the above-mentioned main process. In this checksum calculation process, first, the start address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address (step S51), the number of repetitions is set (step S52), and "0" is set as the calculated value (step S53). .. The number of bytes of the RAM used is set in the number of repetitions.

After that, the value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is used as a new calculated value (step S54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step S55), the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step S56), and the checksum is checked. It is determined whether or not the calculation of is completed (step S57). If the calculation is not completed (step S57: N), the process returns to step S54 and the above process is repeated. When the calculation is completed (step S57: Y), the checksum calculation process is completed.

[Initial value random number update process]
FIG. 10 shows the initial value random number update process (step S35) in the above-mentioned main process. In this initial value random number update process, first, the hit initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S61), the jackpot symbol initial value random number 1 is updated by +1 (step S62), and the jackpot symbol initial value random number 2 is updated by +1 (step). S63), the initial value random number update process is terminated. Here, the "win initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the normal figure fluctuation game. Further, the "big hit symbol initial value random number 1" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the jackpot stop symbol of the special figure 1, and the "big hit symbol initial value random number 2" determines the jackpot stop symbol of the special figure 2. It is a random number that is the initial value of a random number. In this way, the randomness of the random number can be increased by continuously incrementing the initial value random number as long as time allows in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, the timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, first, a register save process (step S101) for transferring the value held in a predetermined register to the RWM is performed. In the Z80 series microcomputer used as the gaming microcomputer in this embodiment, the processing can be replaced by saving the value held in the front register to the back register. Next, input processing from various sensors and switches, signal acquisition, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S102) is performed. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S103) for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, 39b, normal electric solenoid 37c) is performed. When the firing prohibition signal is output in step S4 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state.

Next, the payout command transmission process (step S104), the random number update process 1 (step S105), and the random number update process 2 (step S106) for outputting the commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 are performed. After that, monitoring whether or not there is a normal signal input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a in the normal figure, the winning port switch 35a, the lower count switch 38a, and the upper count switch 39a, and so on. The winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S107) for monitoring an error (whether the front frame or the glass frame is opened, etc.) is performed. In addition, a special map game process (step S108) for performing processing related to the special map variation display game and a normal map game process (step S109) for performing processing related to the normal map variation display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step S110), which is provided in the game machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure fluctuation game display and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents, a magnetic sensor switch 61. A magnet / radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S111) is performed, which is a process of checking the detection signal from the LED and determining whether or not there is an abnormality, and a process of checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 and determining whether or not there is an abnormality. Then, an external information editing process (step S112) is performed in which signals to be output to various external devices are set in the output buffer. Subsequently, after performing a process of restoring the register data saved in step S101 (step S113), a process of permitting an interrupt (step S114) is performed, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

[Input processing]
Next, the details of the input process (step S102) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 12, in the input process, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch captured in the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step S121). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step S122).

Subsequently, the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S123), unused bit data is prepared (step S124), and then the bit data to be inverted is prepared. (Step S125). After that, the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step S126), the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step S127), and the switch reading process (step S128) is performed. .. Here, "preparation" in the present embodiment means setting a value in a register, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory.

Next, unused bit data is prepared (step S129), and bit data to be inverted is prepared (step S130). After that, the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S131), the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step S132), and the switch reading process (step S133) is performed. , End the input process.

[Switch reading process]
Next, the details of the switch reading process (steps S128, S133) in the above-mentioned input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal captured in the target input port is read (step S141). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step S142), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S143), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area is reached. Save (store) in (step S144). After that, it waits for the delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading to elapse (step S145).

When the delay time (0.1 ms) has elapsed, the state of the signal captured in the target input port is read a second time (step S146). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step S147), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S148), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area is reached. Save (store) in (step S149). After that, a definite bit pattern is created in which the bits having the same state are 1 and the bits having different states are 0 in the first and second readings (step S150), and the logical product of the definite bit pattern and the port input state 2 is taken, and this time. It is a fixed bit (step S151).

Next, an undetermined bit pattern is created in which the bits having the same state as 0 and the bits having different states as 1 in the first and second reads (step S152) are created (step S152), and the logic between the undetermined bit pattern and the confirmed state at the time of the previous interrupt. The product is taken and used as the last holding bit (step S153). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state in which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed. Then, the fixed bit of this time and the holding bit of the previous time are combined and saved as the fixed state this time (step S154), the exclusive OR is taken between the fixed state of the previous time and the fixed state of this time, and the save is saved as the rising edge (step S155). The switch reading process ends.

When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch is read once for each interrupt process, and the signal is changed by comparing with the result of the previous read. There is a method to judge whether or not it has been done, but if it is done so, if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, there is a possibility that the correct judgment cannot be made. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned problems by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (step S103) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the output process, first, off-data is output (reset) to the port 135 (see FIG. 4) that outputs the data of the segment of the batch display device (LED) 50 (step S161). Next, the data to be output to the solenoid output port 134 that outputs the data of the general electric solenoid 37c and the large winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b are combined and output (step S162).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit line of the batch display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S163), and the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (step). S164), the acquired data is output to the digit output port 136 (step S165). After that, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S166), and the loaded data is output to the port 135 for segment output (step S167).

Subsequently, the data to be output to the external information terminal 71 is loaded, synthesized, and output to the port 137 for external information output (step S168). Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S169). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S170).

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step S171). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( Step S172). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S173), and the output process is terminated.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S104) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 15, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and the winning number counter area 1 and the winning number counter area 2 are provided. The prize number counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out the prize ball, and the prize has not yet been sent. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a prize ball command counter that can store information regarding the prize ball command.

The prize number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main prize ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number) generated by winning a prize in the prize opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). The winning data corresponding to the prize balls that are used and have not been processed to generate the main prize ball signal is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main prize ball signal counter that can store information about the main prize ball signal. In addition to this main prize ball signal, the payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200 reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). By collating these two signals, it is possible to monitor fraudulent payouts.

Each of these prize number counter areas is set according to the number of prize balls set for each prize opening (for example, 2 prize balls, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 13 prize balls, 14 prize balls). ) Is provided with a winning number counter area, and the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area is added by 1 based on the winning to the winning opening. That is, it is possible to store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the winning area. The winning number counter area 1 is allocated to a wider area than the winning number counter area 2, so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, whereas the payout command may suspend the transmission depending on the state of the payout control device 200 which is the destination, and more untransmitted. This is because data may be accumulated.

In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the prize number counter area 2 (step S181), among the plurality of prize number counter areas provided for each prize ball number, "0" is set in the prize number counter area to be checked. Determine if there is a non-count count. Then, when there is no count number (step S181: N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is determined whether the check of the count number of all the winning number counter areas is completed. (Step S183). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S190. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S183; N), the process returns to step S181 and the above process is repeated.

Further, when it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number in the target prize number counter area is subtracted (-1) (step S184), and the target prize number counter. The number of prize balls corresponding to the area is acquired (step S185). Then, the value of the prize ball remaining number area and the acquired prize ball number are added and saved in the prize ball remaining number area as a new prize ball remaining number (step S186). As the value of the prize ball remaining number area before this processing, a fraction less than a predetermined number that is a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

After that, it is determined whether the value of the remaining prize ball region is 10 or more, which is a predetermined number that is a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal (step S187), and if it is not 10 or more (step S187; N), the step S190 is performed. Transition. When it is 10 or more (step S187; Y), 10 which is a predetermined number as a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is subtracted from the value in the prize ball remaining number region (step S188), and the main prize ball signal is obtained. The value in the output count area is updated by +1 (step S189), and the process returns to step S187. As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in connection with the winning of the game ball to a predetermined winning area to the outside of the game machine. .. By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of game balls such as during a big hit is concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game ball, and the accuracy generated during the big hit It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted.

In step S190, if the payout command transmission timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S190), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become 0 (step S191). If the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (step S191; N), the payout command transmission process ends. When the payout command transmission timer is 0 (step S191; Y), it is determined whether the payout busy signal status is in the idle state (step S192).

The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control, and if the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is turned on. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be accepted. That is, the payout busy signal forms a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control. The payout busy signal status is information that sets whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control based on the state of the payout busy signal, and is an idle state or payout that can immediately start payout control. Either a busy state in which control cannot be started immediately or an indefinite state in which the state is indefinite is set.

If the payout busy signal status is not in the idle state (step S192; N), the payout command transmission process ends. When it is not in an idle state, it includes a busy state and an indefinite state. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not send the payout command, it is possible to perform unnecessary processing by not performing the subsequent processing related to the transmission of the payout command. It is designed to prevent and reduce the burden of control.

The indefinite state is set by clearing the busy signal status area, for example, by processing when the power is turned on. This indefinite state is set to an idle state or a busy state based on the state of the payout busy signal being maintained for a predetermined period of time indicating that the payout control can be started immediately or cannot be started. It will be solved with. That is, when a power failure occurs and the device recovers from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, a prize ball command is immediately issued to the payout control device 200. The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 in response to the continuous output of the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 without transmission. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and surely grasps that the payout process can be performed immediately before transmitting the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It is possible to prevent it from being damaged.

When the payout busy signal status is in the idle state (step S192; Y), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S193). In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the prize number counter area 1 (step S193), among the plurality of prize number counter areas provided for each prize ball number, "0" is set in the prize number counter area to be checked. Determine if there is a non-count count.

Then, when there is no count number (step S193: N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step S194), and it is determined whether the check of the count number of all the winning number counter areas is completed. (Step S195). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S195; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S195; N), the process returns to step S193 and the above process is repeated.

If it is determined in step S193 that there is a count number (step S193; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (step S196), and the target winning number counter is used. Acquire the payout command corresponding to the area (step S197). Then, the payout command is stored in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S198), the initial value is set in the payout command transmission timer (step S199), and the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and for example, 200 ms is set as an initial value.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one prize in the prize area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls based on this payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start the payout control can start the payout control. If so, it serves as a prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means.

Since the game control device 100 controls to transmit the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200 in this way, the prize is awarded only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winning that has not been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 in the event of a power failure and is backed up by the payout control device 200. Accurate payout control can be achieved without having the function to do so.

In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine of JP-A-2000-321759), when a power cutoff state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data to its own storage means and immediately before the power cutoff. The payout control state based on the data of is maintained. However, the conventional gaming machine requires a function for backing up, which has a problem of increasing the cost. According to the present invention, it is possible to realize accurate payout control even if the payout control device 200 does not have a function for backing up.

In addition, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay, and the prize ball is paid out by an external device such as a hall computer. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be accurately grasped. Further, since the prize ball command counter that can store the information about the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter that can store the information about the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball with different transmission timings are provided. The signal information can be managed separately, and the information can be managed reliably.

Based on the above, the game is controlled comprehensively, and the winning areas provided in the game area 32 (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, general winning opening 35, first special variable winning device 38, second). A game control means (game control device 100) that transmits a prize ball command based on the prize of the game ball to the special variable prize device 39), and a game ball payout based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. A payout control means (payout control device 200) for controlling is provided, and the game control means is a state signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control. ) Is used to control the transmission of the prize ball command to the payout control means, and when a power failure occurs and the player recovers from the power failure, the payout control means outputs a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started. Even if this is the case, the prize ball command is not immediately transmitted to the payout control means, and a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is continuously output from the payout control means over a predetermined period. The prize ball command is sent to the payout control means.

Further, a plurality of winning areas (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, general winning opening 35, first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39) having different numbers of winning balls are provided in the game area 32. The game control means (game control device 100) includes a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) that can specify whether or not a prize ball command for instructing payout control of a game ball has not been transmitted for each number of prize balls. When the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started and each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200). The status signal specifies whether or not the payout control means can start payout control before specifying whether or not each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command. It will be.

In addition, the game is controlled comprehensively, and the predetermined winning areas (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, general winning opening 35, first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39) are entered. A game control means (game control device 100) that transmits a prize ball command based on a prize of a game ball, and a payout control means (payout control means) that controls payout of a game ball based on a prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. The game control means includes a control device 200), and the game control means indicates that the payout control means can start the payout control by a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control. Information on the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) that transmits the prize ball command to the payout control means and the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the predetermined winning area. The external information output means (game control device 100) for outputting the including prize ball signal (main prize ball signal) to the outside of the game machine is provided, and the external information output means is a state signal output from the payout control means. It means that the prize ball signal is output regardless of whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control.

Further, even if the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) indicates that the status signal can start the payout control when a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command is issued in response to the state in which the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started continues for a predetermined period. It means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

Further, the game control means (game control device 100) has a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) that can store information about the prize ball command and a prize that can store information about the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100) is provided, and the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) is provided with a predetermined winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, general winning opening 35, first One prize ball when a prize ball command is generated in units of one prize in the special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39) and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. The command is configured to be transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) can store the winning information in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area. Therefore, the number of prize ball commands that have not been transmitted can be reduced by updating when the game ball is won in the predetermined winning area and updating in correspondence with the transmission of the prize ball command to the payout control means. The external information output means accumulates the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with the winning of the game ball in the predetermined winning area, and outputs the prize ball signal every time the accumulated value reaches the predetermined number. The prize ball signal counter is configured to be output to the outside, and can store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the predetermined winning area, and is updated when the game ball is won in the predetermined winning area. At the same time, by updating in correspondence with the cumulative processing of the number of prize balls by the external information output means, it is possible to store the number of prize balls that have not been cumulatively processed yet.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 16 shows the random number update process 1 (step S105) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11). The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the hit random number, the jackpot symbol random number 1, and the jackpot symbol random number 2, which are the targets of the initial value random number update process. In this random number update process 1, first, it is determined whether the hit random number in the normal figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S221).

When the hit random number of the normal figure is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S221; N), it is determined whether the big hit symbol random number 1 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S224). When the hit random number of the normal figure is waiting for the initial value setting (step S221; Y), the hit random number initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S222), and the next hit random number of the loaded normal figure is loaded. The initial value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number region) (step S223). After that, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol random number 1 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S224).

When the jackpot symbol random number 1 is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S224; N), it is determined whether the jackpot symbol random number 2 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S227). When the jackpot symbol random number 1 is waiting for the initial value setting (step S224; Y), the jackpot symbol initial value random number 1 is loaded as the next initial value (step S225), and the next initial initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number 1 is loaded. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number region) (step S226). After that, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol random number 2 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S227).

When the jackpot symbol random number 2 is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S227; N), the random number update process 1 is terminated. When the jackpot symbol random number 2 is waiting for the initial value setting (step S227; Y), the jackpot symbol initial value random number 2 is loaded as the next initial value (step S228), and the next initial initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number 2 is loaded. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number region) (step S229), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 17 shows the random number update process 2 (step S106) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11). The random number update process 2 is a process for updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variable pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variable pattern random numbers 1) as variable pattern random numbers, and the random number update process 2 updates both of them. Then, every time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. Moreover, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (random number for determining the reach variation mode) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is configured to be.

In the random number update process 2, first, the random number update scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be the target of the current update process is updated (step S231). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S232). Then, the upper limit determination value of the random number is acquired from the referenced table based on the calculated address (step S234). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

Subsequently, for example, a random value such as a refresh register (hereinafter referred to as R register) used for refreshing the DRAM provided in the Z80 series microcomputer used as the gaming microcomputer in this embodiment. Loads the value of the register in which is set (step S234). Randomness can be added to random numbers by using the value of the R register. Next, the mask value for masking the value of the R register is acquired, and the value of the R register is masked (step S235). The mask value has a different number of bits depending on the random number to be updated, for example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the R register and the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 are used. Is set in the lower 4 bits of the R register when updating. This is because the upper limit differs depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when updating the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the R register are updated, and when updating the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower 1 byte of the R register is updated. Although 4 bits are illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited to this.

Next, it is determined whether the random number region (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236). When the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; Y), the value remaining by masking the upper 1 byte as the addition value with the mask value of the R register (hereinafter, this is used). The mask update value is set by adding "1" to the masked value), the lower 1 byte is set to "0" (step S237), and the process proceeds to step S239. When the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to "0" and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value as the addition value (step). S238), the process proceeds to step S239. The reason for adding "1" to the masked value is to avoid that the masked value may become "0", and if "0" is added later, it does not change from the value before addition. be.

Then, it is determined whether the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S239), and when it is a 2-byte random number (step S239; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (step S240). , Step S242. When the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S239; N), "0" is set as the upper 1 byte of the random number value, and the value of the random number area to be updated (1 byte) is set as the lower 1 byte of the random number value. ) Is set (step S241), and the process proceeds to step S242.

In step S242, a value obtained by adding the added value determined in step S237 or S238 to the random number value is used as a new random number value, and it is determined whether the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step S233 (step). S243). When the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; N), the new random number value is saved in a random number area lower than the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S245). When the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; Y), the value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random number value is used as the new random number value again (step S244), and this value is set to 1. It is saved in a random number area lower than a byte random number or a 2-byte random number (step S245).

Next, it is determined whether the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step S246), and if it is not a 2-byte random number (step S246; N), the random number update process 2 is terminated. Further, in the case of a 2-byte random number (step S246; Y), a new random number value (the value when a new random number value is calculated again) is saved in a random number area higher than the 2-byte random number (step S247). ), The random number update process 2 is terminated.

In this way, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. Therefore, the CPU 111A determines the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning opening 36 and the start area of the normal variation winning device 37. Random number update means for updating random numbers.

[Winning opening switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 18 shows a winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S107) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11). In this winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the lower counting switches 38a in the lower winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step S301), and the winning opening is won. Even though the mouth is not open, the fraudulent & winning monitoring process (step S302) for monitoring whether or not there is an illegal winning in the large winning opening and detecting a normal winning is executed.

In the fraud monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input in the target switch, a lower address of fraud monitoring information, a lower address of the fraudulent winning count area, a fraudulent winning error notification command, and a fraudulent winning number Information on the upper limit value (number of fraud occurrence judgments), winning opening monitoring table, and notification timer update information (permission / update) is defined. Further, information on the number of repetitions of monitoring (number of switches), the monitoring switch bit, the address of the winning number counter area 1 and the address of the winning number counter area 2 is defined in the winning opening monitoring table. These fraud monitoring tables and winning slot monitoring tables are prepared according to each of the switches to be monitored.

After that, the fraud monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other lower count switch 38a in the lower grand prize opening (first special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step S303), and the fraudulent winning is monitored and the winning is normal. The fraudulent & winning monitoring process (step S304) for detecting is executed. Then, a fraud monitoring table corresponding to the upper count switch 39a in the upper grand prize opening (second special variable winning device 39) is prepared (step S305), and the fraudulent winning is monitored and a normal winning is detected. The fraud & winning monitoring process (step S306) is executed.

Next, a fraud monitoring table for the winning port switch (starting port 2 switch 37a) in the Fuden is prepared (step S307), and fraudulent & winning monitoring processing (step S307) for monitoring for fraudulent winning and detecting normal winning is performed (step S307). Step S308) is executed. Then, the winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (here, the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) that does not require fraud monitoring processing is prepared (step S309), and the winning number is updated. The counter update process (step S310) is performed.

Next, the status scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of switches for monitoring the status and which switch or signal is to be monitored this time is updated (step S311). This status scan counter is updated in the range 0-3. After that, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S312). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S313) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

By referring to the value of the status scan counter in the game machine status monitoring table 1, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status can be monitored based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of a switch connector disconnection or the like. When the value of the status scan counter is set to 1, monitoring of the status based on the shoot-out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the status scan counter is 2, the status monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 3, the status monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set.

Next, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S314). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S315) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

By referring to the value of the state scan counter to the game machine state monitoring table 2, if the value of the state scan counter is 0, the state monitoring based on the signal output from the glass frame opening detection switch is set, and the state scan is performed. When the value of the counter is 1, the monitoring of the state based on the signal output from the front frame opening detection switch is set. Further, when the value of the state scan counter is 2, the monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave invalid signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, the monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is set.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the status scan counter is 0 (step S316), and if the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (step S317; N), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no status monitoring target in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. When the value of the error scan counter is 0 (step S317; Y), the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S317), and the gaming machine status check for determining the status such as whether an error has occurred is determined. The process (step S318) is performed.

By referring to the value of the status scan counter in the game machine status monitoring table 3, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status can be monitored based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to the occurrence of the switch connector disconnection or the like. Set. It should be noted that the game machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counters are 1 to 3.

After that, the payout busy signal check process (step S319) for setting the busy signal status based on the payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start the payout control is performed, and the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is completed. do. Since the processes of steps S317 to S319 are executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is 0, the processes are executed once for every four timer interrupts. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processes of steps S317 to S319 are performed every 16 ms.

[Illegal & winning monitoring process]
FIG. 19 shows the fraudulent & winning monitoring processing (steps S302, S304, S306, S308) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / status monitoring processing. This fraud & winning monitoring process is performed on each of the two lower count switches 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, the upper count switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39, and the start port 2 switch 37a of the normal variable winning device 37. This is the process to be performed. For the large prize openings (special variable prize devices 38 and 39) and Fuden (normal variable prize device 37), it is easy to open the opening / closing member to insert the game ball and pay out the prize ball, so the prize is won. In addition to detecting the above, it also monitors fraud.

In this fraud & winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning port switch to be error-monitored is checked (step S321), and it is determined whether or not the fraud monitoring period is in progress (step S322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened when the winning opening switch to be error-monitored is the lower count switch 38a, and the winning opening switch to be error-monitored is When the upper count switch 39a is used, it is a period other than the special gaming state in which the second special variable winning device 39 is opened. Further, when the winning port switch to be error-monitored is the starting port 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 is executed based on the hit of the normal drawing.

Then, in the case of the fraud monitoring period (step S322; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the target winning opening switch (step S323). When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S332). Further, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; Y), the target number of illegal winnings is updated by +1 (step S324), and the number of illegal winnings after addition is the number of unauthorized occurrence determinations to be monitored (for example,). It is determined whether the number exceeds 5) (step S325).

The reason why the number of judgments is set to 5 is that, for example, when the large winning opening in the open state is converted to the closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the large winning opening, and the game ball has passed the valid period of the count switch. This is to prevent it from being judged as illegal when a prize is won or when there is noise in the signal, and it is not easily judged as an error even though it is not illegal.

Then, when the number of determined items is not exceeded (step S325; N), the winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S330). When the number of determined items is exceeded (step S325; Y), the number of illegal winnings is limited to the number of illegal winnings (step S326), and the initial value (for example, 60,000 ms) is saved in the target illegal winning notification timer area (step). S327). Next, the target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step S328), the fraudulent winning occurrence flag is prepared as the fraud flag (step S329), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S340). ).

On the other hand, when it is not the fraud monitoring period (step S322; N), the winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S330), and the winning number counter update process (step S331) for setting the winning ball is performed. .. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S332), and it is determined whether or not the notification timer update permission is permitted (step S333). Then, when the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step S333; N), the fraudulent & winning monitoring process is terminated. When the update of the notification timer is permitted (step S333; Y), if the target notification timer is not 0, the notification timer is updated by -1 (step S334). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to 0.

The update of the notification timer is permitted when the winning slot switch to be error-monitored is one lower count switch 38a, and is not permitted when the winning slot switch to be error-monitored is the other lower count switch 38a. As a result, regarding the fraudulent notification of the first special variable winning device 38, the notification timer is updated twice as often, and it is prevented that the time is up in half of the specified time (for example, 60,000 ms). .. When the winning port switch to be error-monitored is the upper count switch 39a or the starting port 2 switch 37a, the update of the notification timer is always permitted.

After that, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S335), and if the value is not 0 (step S335; N), that is, if the time is not up, the fraudulent & winning monitoring process is terminated. If the value is 0 (step S335; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been timed up, the target illegal release command is prepared (step S336), and the illegal prize release flag is set as the illegal flag. Prepare (step S337). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338).

When the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & prize monitoring process, the target number of illegal prizes is cleared (step S338; Y). Step S339), the prepared fraudulent flag is compared with the value of the target fraudulent flag area (step S340). If it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338; N), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the fraud & winning monitoring process before the previous time, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. Compare with the value of the invalid flag area (step S340).

Then, when the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area match (step S340; Y), the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared invalid flag and the value of the target invalid flag area do not match (step S340; N), the prepared invalid flag is saved in the target invalid flag area (step S341), and the command setting process is performed (step S341). Step S342), the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. By the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an illegal winning error release command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is released, and the start and end of the error notification are set. Will be done.

[Winning number counter update process]
FIG. 20 shows the winning number counter update processing (steps S310, S331) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / status monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing. In this winning number counter update process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning opening monitoring table (step S351), and whether or not there is an input (correctly, a change in input) to the target winning opening switch is checked. Determination (step S352).

When there is no input (step S352: N), it is determined whether the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S361). Further, when there is an input (step S352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step S353), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S354), and it is determined whether or not the overflow occurs (step S354). Step S355). When no overflow has occurred (step S355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step S356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). ). Further, when an overflow occurs (step S355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357).

After loading the value of the target winning number counter area 2 (step S357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S358), and it is determined whether or not the overflow occurs (step S359). When no overflow has occurred (step S359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S360), and it is determined whether the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S361). .. Further, when an overflow occurs (step S359; Y), it is determined whether the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S361).

When the monitoring of all the switches is not completed (step S361; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not the target winning opening switch has an input (step S352). When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S361; Y), the winning number counter update process is terminated. By the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning in the winning area, and the winning information is stored.

[Command setting process]
FIG. 21 shows a command setting process (step S342) in the above-mentioned fraud & winning monitoring process. Note that this command setting process is a process common to the command setting process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process. In this command setting process, first, the command data (MODE (upper byte)) is written to the serial transmission buffer (step S361), the serial transmission buffer status is read (step S362), and it is determined whether the command is being transmitted. (Step S363).

When the command is being transmitted (step S363; Y), the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is written to the serial transmission buffer (step S366). If the command is not being transmitted (step S363; N), the transmission circuit may be initialized (step S364), and the command data (MODE (upper byte)) may be rewritten to the serial transmission buffer (step S363; N). After step S365), the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is written to the serial transmission buffer (step S366).

Then, the serial transmission buffer status is read (step S367), and it is determined whether the command is being transmitted (step S368). If the command is being transmitted (step S368; Y), the command setting process ends. If the command is not being transmitted (step S368; N), the transmission circuit may be initialized (step S369), and the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) may be rewritten to the serial transmission buffer because an abnormality in the circuit may be considered. (Step S370), the command setting process is terminated.

As described above, by transmitting the command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, the burden on the game control device 100 can be reduced and the analysis of the command can be made difficult. In addition, the command transmission timing can be accelerated and the number of data lines can be reduced. Further, the effect control device 300 does not need to capture commands in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 22 shows the payout busy signal check process (step S319) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step S371). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start the payout control.

When the payout busy signal is on (step S371; Y), the busy state flag is set as the determination status (step S372), and the previous busy signal data is loaded (step S374). If the payout busy signal is not on (step S371; N), the idle state flag is set as the determination status (step S373), and the previous busy signal data is loaded (step S374).

After that, it is determined whether the current signal is different from the previous signal, that is, whether there is a change of on / off (step S375), and if they are not different (step S375; N), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1. (Step S378). If they are different (step S375; Y), the state of the current signal is saved as the previous busy signal data (step S376), the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (step S377), and the busy signal monitoring timer is set. Update by +1 (step S378).

Next, it is determined whether the time measured by the busy signal monitoring timer has reached the signal confirmation time (for example, 32 ms) (step S379), and if the signal confirmation time has not been reached (step S379; N), the payout busy signal is obtained. End the check process. When the signal confirmation time is reached (step S379; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept short of the confirmation time (step S380), and whether the value in the busy signal status area matches the determination status. Is determined (step S381).

Then, if it matches the determination status (step S381; Y), the payout busy signal check process is terminated. If it does not match the determination status (step S381; N), the determination status is saved in the busy signal status area (step S382), and the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

By this process, the busy signal status is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal status is not changed immediately, but the busy signal status is changed when the changed state continues for the signal confirmation time. It is less likely to be affected by such factors.

Further, since the busy signal status is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal status is not set and becomes an indefinite state until any signal state continues for the signal confirmation time. As a result, when a power failure occurs and the device recovers from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued to the payout control device 200 even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200. A prize ball command is issued to the payout control device 200 in response to a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200, which is not transmitted to the payout control device 200. Will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and surely grasps that the payout process can be performed immediately before transmitting the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It is possible to prevent it from being damaged.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game processing (step S108) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. In the special figure game process, the inputs of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

As shown in FIG. 23, in the special figure game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball is won in the start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted and special features based on the winning. Figure Fluctuation display Predetermine the game result based on the winning at the stage before the start of the game. The game result pre-judgment is performed. The details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) will be described later.

Next, the large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this large winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the lower count switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the upper count switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39 is monitored. Perform the processing.

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game processing timer is 0 (step A4). When the value of the special figure game processing timer is 0 (step A4; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the special figure game processing number is referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the special figure game processing number. The figure game sequence branch table is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, the return address after the branch processing is completed is saved in the stack area (step A7), and the game branch processing (step A8) is performed according to the game processing number.

In step A8, when the game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game is monitored, and the fluctuation start setting and effect setting of the special figure fluctuation display game, and the processing during the special figure fluctuation are performed. A special figure normal process (step A9) for setting information necessary for performing is performed. In step A8, when the game processing number is "1", the special figure changing process (step) for setting the stop display time of the special figure, setting the information necessary for performing the special figure display processing, and the like. Perform A10).

In step A8, when the game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and the big winning opening opening pattern of each big hit. The special figure display processing (step A11) for setting the fanfare time according to the above, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is performed.

If the game processing number is "3" in step A8, the fanfare / fanfare that sets the opening time of the big winning opening, updates the number of opening times, sets the information necessary for processing while the big winning opening is open, etc. Processing during the interval (step A12) is performed. In step A8, when the game processing number is "4", the interval command is set if the jackpot round is not the final round, while the ending command is set if the jackpot round is the final round, or the remaining ball processing for the big winning opening. Perform the large winning opening opening processing (step A13) for setting the information necessary for performing the above.

In step A8, when the game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is the final round, the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls in the jackpot to be discharged and the jackpot end processing are performed. The large winning opening residual ball processing (step A14) for setting the information necessary for the game is performed. In step A8, when the game processing number is "6", the jackpot end processing (step A15) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure normal processing (step A9) is performed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (step A16), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A17) related to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed. Then, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (step A18), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A19) related to the special figure 2 display 52 is performed. On the other hand, in step A4, when the value of the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (step A4; N), that is, when the time is not up, the processing is shifted to step A16 and the subsequent processing is performed.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 24, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, a table for setting hold information by the first start port (start winning opening 36) is prepared (step A111), and then the special start port switch common process is performed. (Step A112) is performed. The details of the special figure start port switch common process in step A112 will be described later together with the special figure start port switch common process in step A116.

Next, it is determined whether or not the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is operating, that is, whether or not the ordinary variable winning device 37 is activated and is in an open state in which the game ball can be won. If it is determined in step A113) that the normal electric accessory is in operation (step A113; Y), the process is shifted to step A115, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A113 that the normal electric accessory is not in operation (step A113; N), it is determined whether or not the electric power fraud is occurring (step A114).

In the determination of whether or not a fraudulent occurrence is occurring, it is determined that fraudulent occurrence is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent prizes. Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

When it is determined in step A114 that the fraudulent electric power is not occurring (step A114; N), after preparing a table for setting the information of the hold by the second starting port (ordinary variable winning device 37) (step A115), the special feature. Figure The start port switch common process (step A116) is performed to end the start port switch monitoring process. Further, if it is determined in step A114 that fraudulent electric power is being generated (step A114; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated any more.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special start port switch common process (steps A112 and A116) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each of the inputs of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a.

As shown in FIG. 25, in the special start port switch common process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input in the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step). A201). Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A201; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. On the other hand, when there is an input in the start port switch to be monitored (step A201; Y), it is determined whether or not there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A202).

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A202; N), that is, if the random number is not extracted, the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A202; Y), after saving the start port winning flag of the start port switch to be monitored (step A203), the hard random number latch register to be monitored has the latch data. The extracted jackpot random numbers are loaded and prepared (step A204).

Subsequently, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, the start port signal which is the number of times the information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored is output to the external management device of the game machine 10. The number of outputs is loaded (step A205), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A206), and it is determined whether the number of outputs overflows (step A207). When the number of outputs does not overflow (step A207; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output count area of the RWM (step A208), and the process proceeds to step A209. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A207; Y), the process proceeds to step A209.

Next, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, it is determined whether the number of special figure reservations (starting storage) of the update target corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value (step A209). When the number of special figure holdings is less than the upper limit (step A209; Y), the number of special figure holdings (special figure 1 holding number or special figure 2 holding number) to be updated is updated by +1 (step A212) and monitored. The start port switch and the decorative special figure holding number command corresponding to the special drawing holding number command are prepared (step A213), and the command setting process (step A214) is performed.

Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the special figure hold number corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is calculated (step A215), and the big hit random number is saved in the big hit random number storage area of the RWM (step A216). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step A217), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A218). Further, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step A219). Then, the special figure hold information determination process (step A220) is performed to end the special figure start port switch common process.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning opening 36 and the starting winning area of the normal variable winning device 37, and becomes the right to execute the variable display game. It serves as a starting prize storage means for storing a predetermined number as a starting memory up to a predetermined number. Further, the start winning winning storage means (game control device 100) stores various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36) up to a predetermined number. And various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A209 that the number of reserved special figures is not less than the upper limit (step A209; N), a decorative special figure reserved number command (holding overflow command) is prepared (step A210), and a command setting process (step). A211) is performed to end the special figure start port switch common process.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A220) in the above-mentioned start port switch common process will be described. The special figure hold information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining result-related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 26, first, it is determined whether or not the condition for executing the look-ahead effect is satisfied (step A231), and if it is not satisfied (step A231; N), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated. .. If the condition is satisfied (step A231; Y), the following process related to the look-ahead effect is performed.

Here, the case where the condition for executing the look-ahead effect is satisfied is the case where the input of the start port switch according to step A201 of the special figure start port switch common process is the input of the start port 2 switch 37a. Further, when the input of the start port switch according to step A201 of the special figure start port switch common process is the input of the start port 1 switch 36a, the opening extension function of the normal variable winning device 37 is not operating, that is, the time is shortened. It is a case where it is not in a state, and it is a case where it is not in a big hit (special game state).

In the process related to the look-ahead effect performed when the condition for executing the look-ahead effect is satisfied (step A231; Y), first, whether or not the jackpot random value is a big hit depending on whether or not the jackpot random value matches the jackpot determination value. The jackpot determination process (step A232) for determining the above is performed. Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step A233; Y), the big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (step A234), the big hit symbol random number is checked, and the corresponding big hit stop symbol is set. The pattern is acquired (step A235), and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the look-ahead stop symbol pattern area (step A237). On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step A233; N), the out-of-order stop symbol pattern is set (step A236), and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the look-ahead stop symbol pattern area (step A237).

After that, the look-ahead symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A238), and the command setting process is performed (step A239). Next, the special figure information setting process (step A240) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed, and the latter half fluctuation pattern setting information table corresponding to the target start port switch is prepared (step). A241), the variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step A242).

Then, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A243), and the command setting process is performed (step A243). Step A244), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated. The special figure information setting process in step A240 and the variation pattern setting process in step A242 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special map normal processing.

Through the above processing, a look-ahead symbol command containing the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target and a look-ahead fluctuation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether or not it is a big hit and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is controlled to be produced before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to notify the device 300, and in particular, by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result-related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variation display game. It becomes possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start prize storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). (Judgment, etc.) Makes a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only at the start prize when the start memory occurs, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is played. good.

[Large winning opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, in the large winning opening switch monitoring process, first, whether the large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38 or second special variable winning device 39) is open, that is, in a special gaming state. Is determined (step A251). If the large winning opening is not open (step A251; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. When the large winning opening is open (step A251; Y), 0 is set in the winning counter for counting the number of winnings to the large winning opening added in the current large winning opening switch monitoring process. (Step A252), it is determined whether the lower large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is open, that is, whether the first special variable winning device 38 is in a special gaming state (step A253).

When the lower prize opening is open (step A253; Y), it is determined whether the large winning opening remaining ball processing performed at the end of one round is in progress (step A254). If the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step A254; Y), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If the remaining ball of the big winning opening is not being processed (step A254; N), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the lower winning opening switch 1 (one of the lower count switches 38a) (step A255).

When there is no input in the lower prize opening switch 1 (step A255; N), it is determined whether there is an input in the lower prize opening switch 2 (the other lower count switch 38a) (step A259). If there is an input to the lower prize opening switch 1 (step A255; Y), the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A256), and the lower prize winning opening count command is prepared (step A257). Then, the command setting process (step A258) is performed, and it is determined whether or not there is an input in the lower grand prize opening switch 2 (the other lower count switch 38a) (step A259).

When there is no input to the lower prize opening switch 2 (step A259; N), it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A268). If there is an input to the lower prize opening switch 2 (step A259; Y), the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A260), and the lower prize winning opening count command is prepared (step A261). Then, the command setting process (step A262) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A268).

On the other hand, when the lower grand prize opening is not open (step A253; N), that is, the upper grand prize opening (second special variable winning device 39) is open (a special game in which the second special variable winning device 39 is opened). If it is in the state), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the upper prize opening switch (upper count switch 39a) (step A263). If there is no input to the upper prize opening switch (step A263; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when there is an input to the upper prize opening switch (step A263; Y), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step A264).

If the remaining ball of the big winning opening is not being processed (step A264; N), the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A265), and the upper winning opening counting command is prepared (step A266). If the remaining ball of the big winning opening is being processed (step A264; Y), the upper winning opening counting command is prepared (step A266). After that, the command setting process (step A267) is performed to determine whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A268). In the case of the upper prize opening, the upper prize opening count command is transmitted even during the processing of the remaining balls of the upper prize opening in order to produce the effect by winning.

In the determination of whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A268), if the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A268; Y), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
If the value of the winning counter is not 0 (step A268; N), the value of the winning counter is added to the number of winning openings (step A269), and the number of winning openings is the upper limit (winning in one round). It is determined whether or not the number of game balls is equal to or greater than the number of possible game balls (step A270).

If the number of large winning opening counts is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A270; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. When the number of large winning openings is equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A270; Y), the number of large winning openings is kept at the upper limit (step A271), and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step). A272). Then, the pointer is loaded from the jackpot control pointer upper limit value area (step A273), the loaded pointer is saved in the jackpot control pointer area (step A274), and the jackpot switch monitoring process is terminated. As a result, the big prize opening will be closed and one round will end.

[Design fluctuation control process]
Next, the details of the symbol variation control process (steps A17, A19) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. The symbol fluctuation control process is a process of controlling fluctuations of special symbols such as the first special symbol and the second special symbol and setting display data of the special symbol. As shown in FIG. 28, in the symbol fluctuation control process, first, among the first special figure and the second special figure, the special figure fluctuation control flag related to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is being changed. Check if it is (step A281).

Then, when the special figure changing flag is changing (step A282; Y), the symbol display table (for change) corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is acquired (step). A283), among the first special figure and the second special figure, the blinking control timer related to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is updated by -1 (step A284), and the value of the timer is 0. That is, it is determined whether the time is up (step A285).

When the value of the blinking control timer is not 0 (step A285; N), display data corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number area is acquired (step A288). When the value of the blinking control timer is 0 (step A285; Y), the initial value of the blinking control timer is saved in the blinking control timer area to be controlled (step A286), and the first special figure and the second special figure are taken. Of these, the variable symbol number related to the controlled target special figure (for example, the first special figure) is updated by +1 (step A287), and display data corresponding to the value in the target variable symbol number area is acquired (step A288). ). After that, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A291), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the special figure changing flag is not changing (step A282; N), the symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is acquired (step A289). .. Then, the display data corresponding to the value of the target stop symbol number area is acquired (step A290), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A291), and the symbol variation control process is terminated. As a result, among the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure corresponding to the symbol number is displayed on the special figure display (for example, the special figure 1 display 51) to be controlled. Will be.

[Special figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (step A9) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start storage number) is 0 (step A301). When it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number) is 0 (step A306). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step A306; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (step A311), and when the customer waiting demo has not been started (step A311;). N) saves the customer waiting demo flag area in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A312).

Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A313), a command setting process (step A314) is performed, a special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure normal process is completed. On the other hand, if the customer waiting demo has already started in step A311 (step A311; Y), the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed to end the special figure normal processing.

As shown in FIG. 30, in the special figure normal process transition setting process 1, "0" related to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (step A321), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A321). Step A322), the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A323). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A324), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A325). Figure Ends the normal process migration setting process 1.

Returning to FIG. 29, in step A301, when the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (step A301; N), a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number after -1 update is prepared (step A301; N). Step A302) and command setting processing (step A303) are performed. Next, the special figure 2 change start process (step A304) is performed, the special figure change process transition setting process (step A305) of the special figure 2 is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated. Further, in step A306, when the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (step A306; N), a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number after -1 update is prepared (step A307). , Command setting processing (step A308) is performed. Next, the special figure 1 change start process (step A309) is performed, the special figure change process transition setting process (step A310) of the special figure 1 is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated. At the time of performing the process of preparing the decorative special figure holding number command (steps A307 and A302), the holding number based on the start of the special figure variation display game is not subtracted, and the current special figure 1 holding number or A special figure 1 hold number obtained by subtracting -1 from the special figure 2 hold number or a hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is prepared. The process of actually updating the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number by -1 is the change start information setting process (FIG. 39) in the special figure 1 change start process (step A309) or the special figure 2 change start process (step A304). See) step A441.

In this way, by checking the special figure 2 hold number before the check of the special figure 1 hold number, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304) is executed when the special figure 2 hold number is not 0. Will be done. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed in preference to the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has a second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the variation display game based on the second start memory is displayed as a variation based on the first start memory. It is a priority control means that is executed with priority over the game.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A309) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game. As shown in FIG. 31, first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A331), and the first special figure fluctuation is performed. The jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A332) for setting the missed information and the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the display game is a jackpot is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. The information setting process (step A334) is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is set, is prepared. (Step A335). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step A336) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the first special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the first special figure variation display game is performed. (Step A337) is performed to end the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 32 shows the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A332) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this jackpot flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (step A341). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the RWM (step A342). It should be noted that the reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). After that, a jackpot determination process (step A343) for determining whether or not the acquired jackpot random number value is a jackpot according to whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value is performed.

When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A343) is a jackpot (step A344; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A341 (step A345). ), The jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A343) is not a jackpot (step A344; N), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated while saving the information about the jackpot flag 1.

[Big hit judgment process]
FIG. 33 shows the jackpot determination process (step A343) in the above-mentioned jackpot flag 1 setting process. In this jackpot determination process, first, the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A351), and it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A352). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A352; Y), that is, if it is out of alignment, an outlier is set as the determination result (step A357), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. Further, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A352; N), it is determined whether the state is in a high probability state (step A353).

Then, in the case of the high probability state (step A353; Y), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set (step A354), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A356). ). Further, in the case of not in the high probability state (step A353; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (step A355), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A356). ..

If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A356; Y), that is, if it is a deviation, a deviation is set as the determination result (step A357), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. If the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A356; N), that is, if it is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the determination result (step A358), and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 34 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A361), and if it is a big hit (step A361; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1). Load the jackpot symbol random number from (for) (step A362). Next, the special figure 1 jackpot symbol table is set (step A363), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A364). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the jackpot stop symbol information table is set (step A365), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A366). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display device (here, the special figure 1 display device 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the probability fluctuation determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the probability fluctuation determination flag area (step A367). The probability fluctuation determination flag is for setting the probability state after the end of the special gaming state.

Further, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A368), and the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired to open the large winning opening. Save in the information area (step A369). This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A372).

On the other hand, when it is not a big hit (step A361; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A370), and the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step). A371), prepare a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A372). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step A373), and the command setting process (step A374) is performed. This decorative special figure command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A375), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step A376). FIG. 1 The stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting process (step A334) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. As shown in FIG. 35, in the special figure information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure time reduction is in progress (time reduction state) (step A381). When the special figure time reduction is not in progress (step A381; N), the fluctuation pattern selection group information table at the normal time is set (step A382). Further, when the special figure time reduction is in progress (step A381; Y), the variation pattern selection group information table for the time reduction time is set (step A383).

Then, the number of reserved special figures corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is loaded (step A384), the variable pattern selection group information corresponding to the number of reserved special symbols is acquired and saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step A385). .. As a result, in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area, the type of the special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) at which the fluctuation is started, the hold number information which is the information on the start storage number for the type of the special figure, and the time saving are shortened. The variable distribution information 1 obtained from the game state information including the information on whether or not the state is saved is saved. This variable distribution information 1 is later used to select a variable group. The fluctuation group includes a plurality of fluctuation patterns, and when determining the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation group is first selected, and then one fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation groups. ing.

Next, the distribution base pointer table is set (step A386), and the distribution base pointer corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A387). Further, the effect mode number is added to the acquired pointer (step A388), the added value is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step A389), and the special figure information setting process is completed. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 obtained from the stop symbol pattern information and the effect mode information is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. This variable distribution information 2 is later used to select a variable group. As the effect mode, one effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes according to the probability state, the presence / absence of the time saving state, the progress status of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the variation pattern setting process (step A336) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process will be described. The fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the reach state to the end of the special map fluctuation display game. It consists of a pattern, and the latter half fluctuation pattern is set first, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

As shown in FIG. 36, in the variation pattern setting process, first, the variation group selection address table is set (step A391), and the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step A392). ). Then, it is determined whether the effect mode number is less than 2 (either 0 or 1) (step A393). When the effect mode number is not less than 2 (step A393; N), it is determined whether the stop symbol pattern is a detached stop symbol pattern (step A394), and when the stop symbol pattern is not an detached stop symbol pattern (step A394; N). ) Is prepared by loading the variation pattern random number 1 from the target variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step A397).

On the other hand, when the effect mode number is less than 2 (step A393; Y) or when the stop symbol pattern is a detached stop symbol pattern (step A394; Y), the variable distribution information 1 is obtained from the table prepared in step A392. Acquire the address of the table corresponding to (step A395). Next, the acquired address is prepared as the address of the latter half variable group (step A396), and the variable pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the target variable pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step A397).

When the effect mode number is less than 2, or when the stop symbol pattern is out of alignment and the stop symbol pattern is used, the address is acquired by taking into account the variable distribution information 1 obtained from the hold number information which is the information regarding the start storage number. By doing so, the selection mode of the fluctuation pattern is made different depending on the number of starting memories.

After that, 2-byte distribution processing (step A398) is performed, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of distribution is acquired and prepared (step A399), and the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (holding number 1) is performed. (For) to load and prepare the variation pattern random number 2 (step A400). Then, the distribution process (step A401) is performed, the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and the latter half variable number area is saved (step A402). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step A403), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and 2 (including the determined second half fluctuation number) (step A404). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step A405), and the random number is loaded and prepared from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step A406). ). After that, the distribution process (step A407) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step A408), and the variation pattern setting process is completed. By this process, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of the game, from among a plurality of variations.

[2-byte distribution processing]
FIG. 37 shows a 2-byte distribution process (step A398) in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern setting process. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether the first data of the latter half variation group table (selection table) prepared in the variation pattern setting process is a code without distribution (that is, "0") (step A411). ). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern group, but the latter half that defines only the latter half fluctuation pattern group in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the variable group table (for example, some variable group tables when the result is out of order), there is no need for distribution, so the distribution value "0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning. ..

Then, when the data at the head of the latter half variable group table is a code without distribution (step A412; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A417), and the 2-byte distribution process is completed. do. On the other hand, when the data at the head of the latter half variable group table is not a code without distribution (step A412; N), one distribution value first specified in the latter half variable group table is acquired (step A413).

Subsequently, a new random number value was calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A413 from the random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) loaded in step A397 (step A414), and the calculation was performed. It is determined whether the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A415). When the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step A415; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A416), the process is shifted to step A413, and the subsequent processes are performed. conduct. That is, in step A413, after acquiring the distribution value specified next in the variable group selection table, the random value determined in step A415 is used as a new random value and the distribution value is subtracted, and further new randomness is obtained. Calculate the numerical value (step A414). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A415).

The above processing is executed in step A415 until it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A415; Y). As a result, any one of the latter half variable selection tables is selected from at least one latter half variable selection table defined in the latter half variable group table. Then, if it is determined in step A415 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A415; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A417), and the 2-byte distribution process is performed. To finish.

[Distribution processing]
FIG. 38 shows the distribution process (steps A401 and A407) in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern setting process. In the distribution process, the latter half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is selected from the latter half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2, or the first half variation selection table (first half variation selection table) is selected based on the variation pattern random number 3. This is a process for selecting the first half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game from the first half fluctuation pattern group).

In this distribution process, first, it is checked whether or not the first data of the prepared second half variable selection table (selection table) and first half variable selection table (selection table) is a code without distribution (that is, "0"). (Step A421). Here, the second half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table store a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half fluctuation pattern or the first half fluctuation pattern, as in the second half fluctuation group table, but distribution is necessary. In the case of a selection table without a distribution value, the distribution value "0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning.

When the data at the head of the second half variable selection table or the first half variable selection table is a code without distribution (step A422; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result (step A427), and the data is distributed. End the process. On the other hand, when the data at the head of the latter half variable selection table or the first half variable selection table is not a code without distribution (step A422; N), one distribution value first specified in the latter half variable selection table or the first half variable selection table is used. (Step A423).

Subsequently, after subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A423 from the random number values loaded in steps A400 and A406 (values of fluctuation pattern random number 2 and fluctuation pattern random number 3), a new random number value is calculated (). Step A424), it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A425). Then, when the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step A425; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A426), the process shifts to step A423, and thereafter. Perform processing.

That is, in step A423, after acquiring the distribution value specified next in the second half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table, the distribution value is subtracted by using the random value determined in step A425 as a new random value. , Further, a new random number value is calculated (step A424). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A425). The above processing is executed in step A425 until it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A425; Y). As a result, any one of the latter half fluctuation number and the first half fluctuation number is selected from at least one second half fluctuation pattern and the first half fluctuation pattern defined in the second half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table. Then, if it is determined in step A425 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A425; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A427), and the distribution process is completed. do.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the variation start information setting process (step A337) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process will be described. As shown in FIG. 39, in the variation start information setting process, first, the random number storage areas of the target variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are cleared (step A431). Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step A432), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step A433). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (step A434), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (step A435).

Then, the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value are added (step A436), and the added value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A437). After that, a variable command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variable number is prepared (step A438), a variable command (ACTION) corresponding to the latter half variable number is prepared (step A439), and a command setting process is performed (step A440). .. Next, the number of special symbols held corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag is updated by -1 (step A441), the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag is set (step A442), and the random number storage area is shifted. (Step A443), and the empty area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step A444).

After that, as a process for extending the stop time for displaying the result of the special figure variation display game, first, the stop extension information area is cleared (step A445). When the stop symbol pattern is a detached stop symbol pattern (step A446; Y), the effect mode number is 2 (step A447; Y), and the remaining rotation speed (game number) in the effect mode is 1. (Step A448; Y) determines whether or not the special figure high probability (high probability state) is in progress (step A449).

When the special figure is not in high probability (step A449; N), the stop extension information 1 is saved in the stop extension information area (step A450), and the stop information command corresponding to the stop extension information is prepared (step A452). The command setting process (step A453) is performed, and the variation start information setting process is terminated. As a result, the stop time is set to the special figure extension display time 1 (first extended stop time) which is longer than the normal special figure display time (normal stop time). Further, when the special figure is in high probability (step A449; Y), the stop extension information 2 is saved in the stop extension information area (step A451), and a stop information command corresponding to the stop extension information is prepared (step). A452), the command setting process (step A453) is performed, and the fluctuation start information setting process is terminated. As a result, the stop time is set to the special figure extension display time 2 (second extension stop time) which is longer than the normal special figure display time.

On the other hand, when the stop symbol pattern is not a detached stop symbol pattern (step A446; N), when the effect mode number is not 2 (step A447; N), or when the remaining rotation speed (game number) in the effect mode 2 is not 1. (Step A448; N) ends the fluctuation start information setting process. In this case, the extension of the stop time is not set and the normal stop time is set. In this way, the stop time of the special figure fluctuation display game is set at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, whether or not it is a specific rotation speed, and the state of the effect mode. It is supposed to be played. As a result, for example, it is possible to set a continuous effect with a fluctuation time and a stop time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination means for determining various random value values stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of the identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorate special figure variable display Set detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holding number), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game. A variation command including information on the pattern and a stop information command including information on extension of the stop time are mentioned, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing by the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A304) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game, and is the same process as the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 31 for the second start memory. It is done as.

As shown in FIG. 40, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A461), and the second special figure fluctuation is performed. The jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A462) for setting the missed information and the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the display game is a jackpot is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A463) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game is set by performing information setting processing (step A464, see FIG. 35). Prepare the table (step A465). After that, the variation pattern setting process (see step A466 and FIG. 36) for setting the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the second special figure variation display game is performed. (See step A467, FIG. 39) is performed to end the special figure 2 fluctuation start process.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 41 shows the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A462) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. This process is the same as the process in the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 32, and is performed for the second start storage. In this jackpot flag 2 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (step A471). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM (step A472). It should be noted that the reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). After that, a jackpot determination process (step A473, see FIG. 33) for determining whether or not the acquired jackpot random number value is a jackpot according to whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value is performed.

When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A473) is a jackpot (step A474; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A471 (step A475). ), The jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A473) is not a jackpot (step A474; N), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated while saving the information about the jackpot flag 2.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 42 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A463) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. This process is the same as the process in the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 34 for the second start storage. In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A481), and if it is a big hit (step A481; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1). Load the jackpot symbol random number from (for) (step A482). Next, the special figure 2 jackpot symbol table is set (step A483), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A484). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the jackpot stop symbol information table is set (step A485), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A486). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special diagram 2 display 52) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the probability fluctuation determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the probability fluctuation determination flag area (step A487). The probability fluctuation determination flag is for setting the probability state after the end of the special gaming state.

Further, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A488), and the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired to open the large winning opening. Save in the information area (step A489). This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A492).

On the other hand, when it is not a big hit (step A481; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A490), and the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step). A491), prepare a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A492). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decorative special map command is saved in the decorative special map command area (step A493), and the command setting process (step A494) is performed. This decorative special figure command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A495), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step A496). FIG. 2 The stop symbol setting process is terminated.

That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36), and the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning opening). It serves as a variable display game execution means for executing a second variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of a game ball in the device 37). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control means for controlling the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Process transition setting process during special figure change (Special figure 1)]
FIG. 43 shows a special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) (step A310) in the special figure normal process (see FIG. 29). In this special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1), first, "1" is set as the process number (step A501), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A502).

Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A503), and the signal relating to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A504). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A505), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area (step A505). For example, 200 ms) is set (step A506), and the process transition setting process during special figure change (special figure 1) is terminated.

[Process transition setting process during special figure change (Special figure 2)]
FIG. 44 shows a special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) (step A305) in the special figure normal process (see FIG. 29). In this special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2), first, "1" is set as the process number (step A511), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A512).

Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A513), and the signal relating to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A514). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A515), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area (step A515). For example, 200 ms) is set (step A516), and the process transition setting process during special figure change (special figure 2) is terminated.

[Processing during special figure change]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A10) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 45, in the special figure changing process, first, it is determined whether or not there is stop extension information (stop extension information 1 or 2) (step A601). When there is no stop extension information (step A601; N), the normal special figure display time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A602), and the special figure display processing transition setting process (step A606) is performed. Is performed to end the processing during display of the special figure.

If there is stop extension information (step A601; Y), it is determined whether the stop extension information is 1 (step A603). In the case of stop extension information 1 (step A603; Y), the special figure extension display time 1 (for example, 3500 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A604), and the special figure display process transition setting process (step). A606) is performed to end the process during display of the special figure. On the other hand, when the stop extension information is not 1 (step A603; N), that is, when the stop extension information is 2, the special figure extension display time 2 (for example, 14300 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A605). Processing during special map display The transition setting process (step A606) is performed to end the process during special map display. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Processing during special figure display Transition setting processing]
FIG. 46 shows the special figure display process transition setting process (step A606) in the above-mentioned special figure changing process. In this special figure display process transition setting process, first, the process number "2" related to the special figure display process is set (step A611), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A612).

Next, the signal related to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (steps A613 and A614), and the symbol related to the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game for output to the external information terminal is confirmed. The control timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the frequency signal control timer area (step A615). After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A616). ), As information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step). A617), the process transition setting process during special figure change is terminated.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (step A11) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 47, in the special figure display processing, first, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A621), and the big hit flag 2 of the RWM is loaded. The process of clearing the area (step A622) is performed. Then, when it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A623) and it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (step A623; Y), the jackpot flag 1 area of the RWM is cleared (step A628), and the second special feature. The test signal relating to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the figure variation display game is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A629), and the round number upper limit value table is set (step A630).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A623 that the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A623; N), the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded. (Step A624), the RWM jackpot flag 1 area is cleared (step A625). Subsequently, if it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A626) and it is determined to be a jackpot (step A626; Y), the jackpot of the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 jackpot) is determined. The test signal regarding the start is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A627), and the process of setting the round number upper limit value table (step A630) is performed.

After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit value table (step A630), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value area of the RWM (step A631). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A632).

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decorative special figure command area of the RWM and prepared (step A633), and the command setting process (step A634) is performed. After that, a probability information command relating to information in which the probability of a hit result in the normal map fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is set to the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A635), and the command setting process (step A635) is performed. Step A636) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A637), and the command setting process (step A638) is prepared. )I do.

Next, the signal corresponding to the large winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A639). After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 6000 ms or 48 ms) corresponding to the jackpot opening information is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A640). Then, the large winning opening illegal winning number area of the large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38 or second special variable winning device 39) corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is cleared (step A641), and the large winning opening is opened. The flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the grand prize opening that corresponds to the information (step A642).

Next, the special figure game mode flag is loaded (step A643), and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A644). As a result, information on the effect mode when a special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state is determined based on the information stored later. After that, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A645) is performed, and the special figure display processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step A626 of FIG. 47, when the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (step A626; N), the effect mode information check process (step A646) relating to the setting of the effect mode is performed, and the special figure variation display is set to the time saving state. The time reduction variation number update process (step A647) for managing the number of times the game is executed is performed. Then, the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (see step A648 and FIG. 30) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated.

[Fanfare / Interval processing Transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A645) in the above-mentioned special figure display processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 48, in the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1, first, the processing number “3” related to the fanfare / interval processing is set (step A651), and the processing is performed in the special figure game processing number area. Save the number (step A652).

Next, the signal relating to the start of the jackpot (special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step A653), and the signal relating to the end of the high probability state and the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step A654). .. After that, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step A655), the number in the low probability is saved in the game state display number area (step A656), and the normal game mode. Save the flag with low probability of Fuzu & no support for Fuden in the flag area (step A657).

Then, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A658), and the high probability notification flag area is cleared in order to turn off the game state display LED (third game state display unit 59) related to the display of the high probability state (step A658). Step A659), save the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step A660). Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A661), and the special figure variation display that can be executed in a time-saving state is displayed. Clear the time reduction fluctuation frequency area for managing the number of games (step A662). As a result, the high probability state and the time saving state are terminated, and the normal probability state and the normal operation state are set.

After that, the number of the effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode number area (step A663), and the effect remaining rotation speed area is cleared (step A664). Then, the non-updated code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A665), the command of the effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode command area (step A666), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting process 1 is terminated. .. As a result, the information on the effect mode is temporarily cleared when the special gaming state occurs.

[Production mode information check processing]
Next, the details of the effect mode information check process (step A646) in the above-mentioned special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 49, in the effect mode information check process, first, it is determined whether the next mode transition information is a non-update code (step A671). When the next mode transition information is a code without update (step A671; Y), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of times the special figure variation display game is executed, and for example, the effect mode that continues until the next big hit is selected in a high probability state. ..

If the next mode transition information is not a non-update code (step A671; N), the remaining rotation speed of the effect, which is the number of times the special figure variation display game can be executed until the effect mode is changed, is updated by -1 (step A672). , It is determined whether or not the remaining rotation speed of the effect is 0 (step A673). When the remaining rotation speed of the effect becomes 0 (step A673; Y), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step A674), and the next mode shifts. Acquire the address of the table corresponding to the information (step A675).

Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A676), and the effect remaining rotation speed of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step). A677), the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transitioned is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A678). After that, a command corresponding to the new effect mode number is prepared (step A679), the command is saved in the effect mode command area (step A680), the command setting process (step A681) is performed, and the effect mode information check process is performed. finish.

On the other hand, when the remaining production speed is not 0 (step A673; N), that is, when the current production mode continues in the next special figure variation display game, the remaining production speed is the specified rotation speed (for example, 8 times). It is determined whether or not there is (step A682). If the remaining rotation speed of the effect is not the specified rotation speed (step A682; N), the effect mode information check process ends. When the remaining rotation speed of the effect is the specified rotation speed (step A682; Y), the effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A683), the command setting process (step A684) is performed, and the effect mode information check process is performed. finish. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the switching from before the specified rotation speed of the effect mode switching. By managing the effect mode with the game control device 100 in this way, it is possible to control, for example, to generate a specific reach only in a specific effect mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Time reduction fluctuation frequency update process]
Next, the details of the time reduction variation number update process (step A647) in the above-mentioned special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 50, in the time reduction fluctuation frequency update process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure has a high probability (high probability state) (step A691). When the special figure is in high probability (step A691; Y), the time reduction variation number update process is terminated. Further, when the special figure is not in the high probability (step A691; N), it is determined whether the special figure time reduction (time reduction state) is in progress (step A692).

If the special time reduction is not in progress (step A692; N), the time reduction variation number update process is terminated. Further, when the special figure time reduction is in progress (step A692; Y), the time reduction variation number for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in the time reduction state is updated by -1 (step A693), and the time reduction variation number is updated. Is determined to be 0 (step A694). If the time reduction variation number is not 0 (step A694; N), that is, if the time reduction state continues even in the next special figure variation display game, the time reduction variation number update process is terminated. Further, when the number of time reduction fluctuations is 0 (step A694; Y), that is, when the time reduction state ends in the special figure variation display game this time, a probability information command (time reduction end) is prepared (step A695). The command setting process (step A696) is performed. After that, the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (at the end of the time reduction) is performed (step A697), and the time reduction variation number update process is completed.

[Special figure Normal processing Transition setting processing 2 (at the end of time reduction)]
FIG. 51 shows the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (at the end of the time reduction) (step A697) in the above-mentioned time reduction variation number update process. In this special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (at the end of the time reduction), first, the signal related to the end of the time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (step A701), and the signal related to the end of the time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step A702).

Next, the low-probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step A703), and the low-probability & non-supported flag is saved in the normal-figure game mode flag area (step A704). Further, the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A705), and the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A706). Ends the normal process transition setting process 2 (at the end of the time saving).

Here, the types of special results and the opening / closing pattern of the large winning opening (special variable winning device) in the gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described. Four types of special results are set: 2R probability variation, 11R probability variation, 11R normal variation, and 16R probability variation. In 2R probability variation, 11R probability variation, and 16R probability variation, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is 2,11,16, respectively, and the probability state is set to the high probability state until the next special result is derived after the end of the special gaming state. It is a special result that is considered to be in a short time state. 11R Normally, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is 11 rounds, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is set to the normal probability state, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times) of the special figure variation display game. It is a special result that the time is shortened until the execution of.

Further, the gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with a lower large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) and an upper large winning opening (second special variable winning device 39), and a plurality of opening / closing patterns are prepared for each. .. Then, one opening / closing pattern is selected from these plurality of opening / closing patterns according to the type of special result. In the following opening / closing pattern, the value shown as the opening time of the large winning opening indicates the maximum opening time, and when a predetermined number of game balls flow into the large winning opening before the lapse of the maximum opening time in one round. Closes the big prize opening without waiting for the maximum opening time to elapse, and the round ends.

FIG. 52 shows the opening / closing pattern of the upper prize opening (second special variable winning device 39). The upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 1 shown in FIG. 52 (a) is selected when the special result is a 2R probability variation and the time is not shortened when the special result is derived. In the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern 1, 52 ms opening time is set in the first round (1R), and 52 ms opening time is set in the next round (2R) after an interval time of 1448 ms is inserted. Then, after the lapse of the ending time of 22400 ms, the special gaming state ends.

The upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 2 shown in FIG. 52 (b) is selected when the special result is a 2R probability variation and the time is shortened when the special result is derived. The upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 2 has the same opening / closing mode as the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern, but the ending time is 1400 ms. The upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 3 shown in FIG. 52 (c) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probable variations. Further, in the large winning opening opening / closing pattern 3, 16 rounds in which the opening time of 52 ms is set are performed with an interval time of 1448 ms, and the special gaming state ends after the lapse of the ending time of 1400 ms.

The upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 4 shown in FIG. 52 (d) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probable variations. In the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 4, in the first round (1R), the opening of 52 ms is first performed 16 times with a closing time of 1448 ms, as in the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 3. Up to this point, the opening / closing mode is the same as that of the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 3, and the effect on the display device 41 or the like is the same, making it difficult for the player to recognize which opening / closing pattern. After that, at the closing time of 6300 ms, a promotion image is displayed on the display device 41 to notify that it is the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 4, and 26168 ms is opened to end the first round. After the end of the first round, the round in which the opening time of 27,000 ms is set is repeated 15 times with an interval time of 2000 ms in between, and after the ending time of 6000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

The upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 5 shown in FIG. 52 (e) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probable variations. In the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern 5, in the first round (1R), the opening of 52 ms is first performed, and then the opening of 26948 ms is performed with a closing time of 5948 ms, and the first round is completed. After the end of the first round, the round in which the opening time of 27,000 ms is set is repeated 15 times with an interval time of 2000 ms in between, and after the ending time of 6000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

FIG. 53 shows the opening / closing pattern of the lower large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38). The lower prize opening opening / closing pattern 1 shown in FIG. 53 (a) is selected when the special result is 11R probability variation or 11R normal. In this lower prize opening opening / closing pattern 1, in the first round (1R), the opening is performed for 200 ms first, then the opening is performed for 28,000 ms with a closing time of 5800 ms, and the first round is completed. After the end of the first round, the round in which the opening time of 27,000 ms is set is repeated 10 times with an interval time of 2000 ms in between, and after the ending time of 6000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

The lower prize opening opening / closing pattern 2 shown in FIG. 53 (b) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probable variations. In this lower prize opening opening / closing pattern 2, the opening / closing mode is the same as that of the lower prize opening opening / closing patterns 1 and 3 until the end of the 11th round, and the effect on the display device 41 or the like is the same. It is difficult to recognize whether it is an opening / closing pattern. After the end of the 11 rounds, the round in which the open time of 200 ms is set with an interval time of 1500 ms is repeated 5 times, and after the ending time of 1400 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

The lower prize opening opening / closing pattern 3 shown in FIG. 53 (c) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probable variations. In this lower prize opening opening / closing pattern 3, the opening / closing mode is the same as that of the lower prize opening opening / closing patterns 1 and 2 until the end of the 11th round, and the effect on the display device 41 or the like is the same. It is difficult to recognize whether it is an opening / closing pattern. Then, after the end of the 11th round, the promotion image is displayed on the display device 41 at the interval time of 13000 ms to notify that it is the lower prize opening opening / closing pattern 3. After that, the round in which the opening time of 27,000 ms is set is repeated 5 times with an interval time of 2000 ms in between, and after the ending time of 6000 ms has elapsed, the special gaming state ends.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (step A12) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 54, in the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step A751), and the large winning opening opening information is the upper special winning opening (second special variable winning device 39). It is determined whether the opening / closing patterns are 1 to 3 (step A752).

When the large winning opening opening / closing information is the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern 1 to 3 (step A752; Y), the control pointers (S (start value), E (end) corresponding to the upper winning opening opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 are used. (Value))) is set (step A759), and the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG. By setting the start value and the end value of this control pointer, it is possible to open or close the big winning opening in one round and set the time based on the big winning opening control table. In addition, in the case of the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 1 to 3, since the execution time of one round is short, a series of images are displayed from the start to the end of the special game state instead of each round. Do not send the round command corresponding to the number. Further, when the large winning opening opening information is not the upper winning opening opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 (step A752; N), a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A753), and the command setting process is performed. (Step A754) is performed.

After that, it is determined whether the round to be started is the first round (1R) (step A755), and if it is the first round (step A755; Y), the big winning opening opening information is the lower big winning opening (first special). Variable winning device 38) It is determined whether the pattern is an opening / closing pattern (step A756). When the large winning opening opening / closing information is the lower winning opening opening / closing pattern (step A756; Y), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the first round (1R) of the lower winning opening opening / closing pattern are set (step). A760), the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG. Further, when the large winning opening opening information is not the lower winning opening opening / closing pattern (step A756; N), it is determined whether the large winning opening opening information is the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern 4 (step A757).

When the large winning opening opening / closing information is the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern 4 (step A757; Y), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the first round (1R) of the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern 4 are set. (Step A758), the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG. Further, when the large winning opening opening / closing information is not the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern 4 (step A757; N), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the first round (1R) of the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern 5 are set. Then, the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG. 55.

On the other hand, when the started round is not the first round (1R) (step A755; N), it is determined whether the started round is 2 to 11 rounds (step A762), and the started round is 2 to 11 In the case of a round (step A762; Y), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening information is the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern (step A763). Then, when the large winning opening opening / closing information is not the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern (step A763; N), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the 2nd to 11th rounds of the lower winning opening opening / closing pattern are set (step). A764), the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG. Further, when the large winning opening opening / closing information is the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern (step A763; Y), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the second and subsequent rounds of the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern are set (step). A765), the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG.

If the starting round is not 2 to 11 rounds (step A762; N), it is determined whether the large winning opening opening information is the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern (step A766). Then, when the large winning opening opening / closing information is the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern (step A766; Y), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the second and subsequent rounds of the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern are set (step). A765), the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG. Further, when the large winning opening opening information is not the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern (step A766; N), it is determined whether the large winning opening opening information is the lower winning opening opening / closing pattern 2 (step A767).

When the large winning opening opening / closing information is the lower winning opening opening / closing pattern 2 (step A767; Y), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the 12th round or later of the lower winning opening opening / closing pattern 2 are set (step). A768), the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG. Further, when the large winning opening opening / closing information is not the lower winning opening opening / closing pattern 2 (step A767; N), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the 12th round or later of the lower winning opening opening / closing pattern 3 are set (S, E). Step A769), the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG.

In step A770 of FIG. 55, the set start value (S) of the control pointer is saved in the jackpot medium control pointer area (step A770), and the set end value (E) of the control pointer is set in the jackpot medium control pointer upper limit value region. Save (step A771). Then, the solenoid information setting process (step A772) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening information is the lower special winning opening opening / closing pattern (step A773).

When the large winning opening opening information is the lower special winning opening opening / closing pattern (step A773; Y), the large winning opening opening process transition setting process 1 is performed (step A774), and the fanfare / interval processing is terminated. If the large winning opening opening information is not the lower special winning opening opening / closing pattern (step A773; N), the large winning opening opening process transition setting process 2 is performed (step A775), and the fanfare / interval processing is terminated. By the above processing, any of the opening / closing patterns shown in FIGS. 52 and 53 is set.

[Solenoid information setting process]
FIG. 56 shows the solenoid information setting process (step A772) in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval process. In this solenoid information setting process, first, the big winning opening control address table is set (step A781), and the address of the big winning opening control table corresponding to the jackpot medium control pointer is acquired (step A782). After that, the output data is acquired and saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A783), the opening / closing time value is acquired and the special figure game processing timer area is saved (step A784), and the solenoid information setting processing is completed. do. By this process, the opening and closing of the big winning opening and the time are set.

[Processing during opening of large winning opening Transition setting processing 1]
FIG. 57 shows the process transition setting process 1 (step A774) during the process during opening of the large winning opening in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval process. In the process transition setting process 1 during which the large winning opening is open, first, the processing number is set to "4" related to the processing during opening of the large winning opening (step A791), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A792). After that, the signal relating to the opening start of the lower prize opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step A793), and the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings to the grand prize opening is cleared (step A794). .. Then, the lower special winning opening control flag is saved in the large winning opening discrimination flag area (step A795), and the large winning opening opening process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Processing during opening of large winning opening Transition setting processing 2]
FIG. 58 shows the process transition setting process 2 (step A775) during the opening of the large winning opening in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval process. In this large winning opening open processing transition setting process 2, first, the processing number is set to "4" related to the large winning opening open processing (step A801), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A802). After that, the signal relating to the opening start of the upper winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step A803), and the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings to the winning opening is cleared (step A804). .. Then, the upper prize opening control flag is saved in the large winning opening discrimination flag area (step A805), and the processing transition setting process 2 during the opening of the large winning opening is terminated.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening]
Next, the details of the process during opening of the large winning opening (step A13) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 59, in the processing during the opening of the big winning opening, first, the control pointer during the big hit is updated by +1 (step A811), and it is determined whether the value of the control pointer has reached the value in the control pointer upper limit value region (step A811). Step A812).

When the value of the control pointer has not reached the value in the control pointer upper limit value region (step A812; N), the solenoid information setting process (step A819, see FIG. 56) is performed. As a result, the opening / closing mode of the large winning opening according to the updated control pointer is set. Then, the process transition setting process 3 for opening the large winning opening is performed (step A820), and the processing during opening of the large winning opening is completed. As shown in FIG. 61, in the process transition setting process 3 during the opening of the large winning opening, the processing number is set to “4” related to the processing during the opening of the large winning opening (step A841), and the processing number is set in the special figure game processing number area. Save (step A842), and end the process transition setting process 3 during the opening of the big winning opening.

Returning to FIG. 59, when the value of the control pointer reaches the value in the control pointer upper limit value region (step A812; Y), the large winning opening opening information is the upper winning opening short opening pattern (upper winning opening opening pattern 1). ~ 3) is determined (step A813). When the large winning opening opening information is the upper winning opening short opening pattern (step A813; Y), the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A818) is performed, and the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is completed. In this case, a series of images are displayed from the start to the end of the special game state, and the interval command and the ending command are not transmitted.

Further, when the large winning opening opening information is not the upper winning opening short opening pattern (step A813; N), the current number of rounds in the running special gaming state and the round number upper limit value in the RWM round number upper limit value region are used. To determine if the current round is the final round (step A814). If it is not the final round (step A814; N), an interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared (step A815), a command setting process (step A817) is performed, and a large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A817) is performed. Step A818) is performed to end the processing during the opening of the large winning opening. Further, in the case of the final round (step A814; Y), an ending command related to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special gaming state is prepared (step A816), and a command setting process (step A817) is performed. Then, the process for setting the transition to the remaining ball processing of the large winning opening (step A818) is performed, and the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is completed.

[Large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 60 shows the large winning opening residual ball processing transition setting processing (step A818) in the above-mentioned large winning opening opening processing. In this large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing, first, the processing number is set to "5" related to the large winning opening remaining ball processing (step A831), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A831). Step A832). After that, the large winning opening remaining ball processing time (for example, 1380 ms), which is the time required for the remaining ball processing, is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A833). Then, in order to close the opening / closing door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38 or the movable member 39c of the second special variable winning device 39, the off-data for turning off the large winning opening solenoid 38b or 39b is input to the large winning opening solenoid. Saved in the output data area (step A834), and the process of setting the transition to the remaining ball processing of the large winning opening is completed.

[Treatment of remaining balls in the large winning opening]
Next, the details of the large winning opening residual ball processing (step A14) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 62, in the large winning opening remaining ball processing, first, the current number of rounds in the running special gaming state is compared with the round number upper limit value in the RWM round number upper limit value region, and the current round is calculated. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A851).

If the current round in the special game state is not the final round (step A851; N), the interval time corresponding to the number of rounds this time and the information on opening the large winning opening is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A852). ), Fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2 (step A853) is performed, and the large winning opening remaining ball processing is completed. The interval time is set to the time corresponding to the number of rounds this time and the information on opening the large winning opening (for example, 68 ms if the opening / closing pattern of the upper winning opening is 1 to 3). The interval period between rounds is the period from the end of the round to the elapse of the large winning opening remaining ball processing time (for example, 1380 ms) and the elapse of the large winning opening remaining ball processing time to the elapse of the interval time. For example, if the upper prize opening opening / closing patterns 1 to 3, it will be 1448 ms.

On the other hand, when the current round in the special game state is the final round (step A851; Y), the game mode flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag evacuation area for storing the effect mode when the special result is derived. (Step A854). Then, the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag and the big winning opening opening information is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A855), and the big hit end processing transition setting processing (step A856) is performed to perform the big winning opening remaining ball. End the process.

In the ending period from the end of the final round to the end of the special gaming state, the large winning opening remaining ball processing time (for example, 1380 ms) elapses from the end of the final round, and the ending time elapses from the large winning opening remaining ball processing time. Is considered to be the period until the elapse of. For example, the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern selected when the special result is a 2R probability variation and is not in the time saving state when the special result is derived, that is, when the effect mode is selected other than the time saving state when the special result is derived. If it is 1, the ending time is 21020 ms. Therefore, the length of the ending period is 22400 ms including 1380 ms which is spent as the processing time of the remaining ball of the large winning opening before this ending time, and the ending effect is executed by the display device 41 or the like in this ending period. In addition, the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern selected when the special result is a 2R probability variation and is in the time saving state when the special result is derived, that is, when the effect mode is selected in the time saving state when the special result is derived. If it is 2, the ending time is 20 ms. Therefore, the length of the ending period is 1400 ms, including 1380 ms which is spent as the remaining ball processing time of the big winning opening before this ending time.

[Fanfare / Interval processing Transition setting processing 2]
FIG. 63 shows the fanfare / interval processing transition setting process 2 (step A853) in the above-mentioned large winning opening residual ball processing. In this fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2, first, the processing number “3” related to the fanfare / interval processing is set (step A861), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step). A862).

Next, the signal relating to the end of opening of the lower large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A863), and the upper large winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) is opened. The end signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step A864). Then, the large winning opening discrimination flag area is cleared (step A865), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2 is terminated.

[Big hit end processing Transition setting processing]
FIG. 64 shows the jackpot end processing transition setting processing (step A856) in the above-mentioned large winning opening remaining ball processing. In this jackpot end processing transition setting process, first, "6" is set as the process number related to the jackpot end process (step A871), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A872). After that, the signal relating to the end of opening of the lower large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A873), and the opening of the upper large winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) is completed. The signal related to the above is saved in the test signal output data area (step A874).

Next, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening is cleared (step A875), and the information in the round number area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step A876). ), Clear the information in the round number upper limit area for storing the upper limit of the number of rounds in the special gaming state (step A877). Then, the information in the round number upper limit value information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the number of rounds is cleared (step A878), and the flag for storing the opening information determination for the large winning opening is stored in the large winning opening opening information area. The information is cleared (step A879), and the information in the jackpot middle control pointer area for setting the opening / closing mode of the big winning opening is cleared (step A880). After that, the jackpot middle control pointer upper limit value area for storing the end value of the jackpot middle control pointer is cleared (step A881), the big winning opening discrimination flag area is cleared (step A882), and the jackpot end processing transition setting process is completed. do.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end processing (step A15) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 65, in this jackpot end process, first, the probability fluctuation determination flag set based on the type of the special result that triggered the execution of the special game state is set with a high probability after the end of the special game state. It is determined whether the data is high-probability data set when the state is reached (step A901).

If the data is not high probability data (step A901; N), the jackpot end setting process 1 is performed (step A902), and if the data is high probability data (step A901; Y), the jackpot end setting process 2 is performed (step A903). ), The probability information command corresponding to the special figure game mode flag is prepared (step A904), and the command setting process (step A905) is performed.

Next, as a process of saving the information necessary for managing the effect mode in the game control device 100, first, the effect mode information setting table corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A906). Then, with reference to the set effect mode information setting table, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the special gaming state is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A907). Further, the remaining effect rotation speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A908), and the mode shifts to the next mode of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state. The information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A909).

After that, a command corresponding to the new effect mode number is prepared (step A910), the command is saved in the effect mode command area (step A911), and the command setting process (step A912) is performed. Then, the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 is performed (step A913), and the jackpot end process is terminated.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
FIG. 66 shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A902) in the above-mentioned jackpot end process. In the jackpot end setting process 1, first, the signal related to the start of the time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (step A921), and the signal related to the start of the time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A922).

Next, the Fuzu high probability & Fuden support flag is saved in the Fuzu game mode flag area (step A923), and the Tokuzu low probability & time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A924). After that, the probability information command (time reduction) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A925), the time reduction fluctuation number initial value (for example, 70) is saved in the time reduction fluctuation number area (step A926), and the jackpot ends. The setting process 1 is terminated.

By the above processing, after the end of the special gaming state, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the normal probability state and the time saving state. Further, by setting the time saving fluctuation number initial value (for example, 70) in the time saving fluctuation number region, the time saving state is terminated by executing the special figure variation display game a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times).

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 67 shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A903) in the above-mentioned jackpot end process. In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, the signal related to the high probability start is saved in the external information output data area (step A931), and the signal related to the high probability start is saved in the test signal output data area (step A932).

Next, the Fuzu high probability & Fuden support flag is saved in the Fuzu game mode flag area (step A933), and the special figure high probability & time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A934). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A935), the time reduction fluctuation frequency area is cleared (step A936), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is terminated. By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes a high probability state, and the time is shortened until the next special result mode is derived.

That is, after the end of the special game state, the game control device 100 can generate a specific game state (time saving state) in which the period for opening the normal variable winning device 37 is extended for a predetermined period. It serves as a state generation control means.

[Special figure normal processing transition setting processing 3]
FIG. 68 shows the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A913) in the above-mentioned jackpot end process. In this special figure normal process transition setting process 3, first, "0" is set as the process number related to the special figure normal process (step A941), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A942). ..

After that, the signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step A943), and the signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step A944). Subsequently, the information in the probability fluctuation determination flag area is cleared (step A945), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot is cleared (step A946), and the number in the game state display number area is reduced. Is saved (step A947). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A948), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A949). Figure Ends the normal process transition setting process 3.

[Public game processing]
Next, the details of the normal figure game processing (step S109) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. In the normal map game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process related to the normal map variation display game is controlled, and the normal map display is set.

As shown in FIG. 69, in the Fuzu game process, first, the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and the Fuden winning switch for monitoring the input from the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. Perform the monitoring process (step B2). Next, if the normal figure game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step B3). The minimum value of the normal figure game processing timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal figure game processing timer becomes 0 (step B4).

When the value of the normal figure game processing timer is 0 (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has been up or has already been timed up, the normal figure referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the normal figure game processing number. The process of setting the game sequence branch table in the register (step B5) is performed, and the process of acquiring the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the game processing number of the normal figure (step B6) is performed using the table. Then, after performing the process of saving the return address after the branch process to the stack area (step B7), the game branch process (step B8) is performed according to the game process number.

If the game processing number is "0" in step B8, the fluctuation start of the normal map fluctuation display game is monitored, and the fluctuation start setting and effect setting of the normal map fluctuation display game, and the processing during the normal map fluctuation are performed. Performs normal processing (step B9) for setting information necessary for performing. Further, in step B8, when the game processing number is "1", the normal map changing process (step B10) for setting information necessary for performing the normal map display processing is performed.

Further, in step B8, when the game processing number is "2", if the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is a hit, the normal power opening time can be set according to whether or not the time is shortened. Performs the normal map display processing (step B11) for setting information necessary for performing the normal map hitting process. Further, in step B8, when the game processing number is "3", the normal drawing processing is continued, or the information necessary for performing the normal electric remaining ball processing is set. Step B12) is performed.

Further, in step B8, when the game processing number is "4", the game processing (step B13) for setting the information necessary for performing the game end processing is performed. Further, in step B8, when the game processing number is "5", the normal drawing end processing (step B14) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing normal processing (step B9) is performed.

After that, after preparing the normal symbol fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display (step B15), the symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display (step B16). ) To end the normal map game processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the normal figure game processing timer is not 0 (step B4; N), that is, the time is not up, the process is shifted to step B15 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the gate switch monitoring process in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 70, in the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input in the gate switch 34a (step B101). Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), the number of reserved normal figures is acquired and it is determined whether or not the number of reserved normal figures is less than the upper limit (step B102).

When the number of reserved normal figures is less than the upper limit (step B102; Y), the number of reserved normal figures is updated by +1 (step B103), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of reserved normal figures is calculated. (Step B104). Then, the hit random number is extracted and saved in the hit random number storage area of the RWM (step B105), and the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

Further, when it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or when it is determined in step B102 that the number of reserved figures is not less than the upper limit value (step B102; N). Ends the gate switch monitoring process.

[Public prize switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the Fuden winning switch monitoring process in the above-mentioned Fuzu game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 71, in the normal fluctuation winning switch monitoring process, first, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is executing the opening operation a predetermined number of times while the normal fluctuation display game is in the hit state. It is determined whether or not there is (step B121). Then, in the case of hitting the normal drawing (step B121; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the start port 2 switch 37a (step B122), and there is an input in the start port 2 switch 37a (step B122; Y). If it is determined, the count number of the general electric counter is updated by +1 (step B123).

Next, when it is determined whether the count number of the updated normal electric counter has reached the upper limit value (for example, 9) (step B124) and it is determined that the count number has reached the upper limit value (step B124; Y). , Load the pointer (value at the end of the hit) from the upper limit area of the control pointer during hitting the normal figure (step B125). Then, the loaded pointer is saved in the control pointer area during normal drawing (step B126), the normal drawing game processing timer is cleared (step B127), and the normal power winning switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, if there is a winning prize of the upper limit or more during the hitting state of the normal figure, the value of the hitting end is saved in the processing control pointer area during the normal drawing at that time, and the hitting state of the normal figure is in the middle. Try to finish.

Further, when it is determined in step B121 that the drawing is not hit (step B121; N), when it is determined in step B122 that there is no input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B122; N) or step B124. If it is determined that the count number has not reached the upper limit value (step B124; N), the general electric winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually processing]
Next, the details of the normal drawing normal processing (step B9) in the above-mentioned normal drawing game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 72, in the normal drawing normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal figure holding number is 0 (step B131), and when the normal figure holding number is 0 (step B131; Y), it is normal. Figure Normal process Transition setting process 1 (step B152) is performed, and the normal figure normal process is terminated. If the number of reserved figures is not 0 (step B131; N), the winning random number is loaded from the random number storage area (for the number of reserved numbers 1) per RWM, and the random number is loaded in the random number display game (step B132). It is determined whether the probability of a hit result is a high probability of a normal figure higher than usual, that is, whether the time is shortened (step B133).

When it is not in the high probability of the normal figure (step B133; N), it is determined whether the value of the hit random number matches the low probability determination value which is the determination value in the low probability of the normal figure (step B134). When the value of the hit random number does not match the low probability judgment value (step B134; N), the deviation information is saved in the hit flag area (step B135), and the deviation stop symbol number is set in the normal figure stop symbol (step). B136), the random number storage area per normal figure (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step B141). On the other hand, when the value of the hit random number matches the low probability determination value (step B134; Y), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B139), and the hit stop symbol number is set in the normal figure stop symbol. (Step B140), the random number storage area (for 1 hold number) per normal figure is cleared to 0 (step B149).

Further, in step B133, when the normal probability is high (step B133; Y), the high probability lower limit determination in which the value of the hit random number is the lower limit value in the plurality of consecutive determination values used in the normal high probability. If it is determined whether the value is less than the value (step B137) and the value of the hit random number is not less than the high probability lower limit determination value (step B137; N), a plurality of consecutive determinations that the value of the hit random number is used when the probability is high. It is determined whether or not it is larger than the high probability upper limit determination value which is the upper limit value in the value (step B138).

If the value of the hit random number is not larger than the high probability upper limit judgment value (step B138; N), that is, if it is a hit, the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B139), and the hit stop symbol hits the normal figure stop symbol. A number is set (step B140), and the random number storage area (for 1 hold number) per normal figure is cleared to 0 (step B141). Further, in step B137, when the value of the hit random number is less than the high probability lower limit determination value (step B137; Y), or in step B138, the value of the hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step B138; Y). ), That is, in the case of deviation, the deviation information is saved in the hit flag area (step B135), the deviation stop symbol number is set in the normal figure stop symbol (step B136), and the random number storage area per normal figure (holding number 1). (For) is cleared to 0 (step B141). That is, the determination value that is determined to be a hit in the normal map by matching the values of the hit random numbers is one value in the low probability of the normal map, and is a plurality of consecutive values in the high probability of the normal map.

After clearing the random number storage area (for 1 hold number) to 0 (step B141), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B142). Then, a decorative pattern fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the stop symbol is prepared (step B143), and a command setting process (step B144) is performed. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the normal map variation display game on the display device 41 or the like.

After that, the random number storage area per normal figure is shifted (step B145), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B146), and the number of reserved normal figures is updated by -1 (step B147). That is, as the oldest normal figure holding number 1 game is executed, the order of the normal figure holding numbers 2 to 4 held after the normal figure holding number 1 is moved up one by one. I do. By this processing, the value for the number of holdings of the normal figure 2 to the number of holdings of the normal figure 4 in the random number storage area per normal figure is moved from the number of holdings of the normal figure 1 in the random number storage area for the normal figure to the number of holdings of the normal figure 3. Will be done. Then, the value for the number of reserved numbers 4 in the random number storage area per normal figure is cleared, and the number of reserved numbers is decremented by 1.

Next, it is determined whether or not the normal electric support is in progress (during the reduced working hours) (step B148), and if the normal electric support is not in progress (step B148; N), the fluctuation time when there is no normal electric support (for example, 10 seconds). ) Is set (step B149). Further, when the normal power support is in progress (step B148; Y), the normal time (for example, 1 second) during the normal power support is set (step B150). Then, the process transition setting process (step B151) during the change of the normal map is performed, and the normal process of the normal map is terminated.

[Usually process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 73 shows the normal drawing normal processing transition setting process 1 (step B152) in the above-mentioned normal drawing normal processing. In this normal figure normal process transition setting process 1, first, "0" is set as the process number for shifting to the normal figure normal process (step B161), and the process number is saved in the normal figure game process number area (step). B162). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraudulent monitoring period flag area (step B163), and the normal process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Processing during fluctuation of general map Transition setting processing]
FIG. 74 shows the process transition setting process (step B151) during the process of changing the map in the above-mentioned normal process of the map. In this normal map changing process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the process number for shifting to the normal figure changing process (step B171), and the process number is saved in the normal map game process number area (step B171). Step B172). After that, the signal related to the start of the normal map fluctuation display game is saved in the test signal output data area (step B173), and the changing flag indicating that the normal figure fluctuation display game is changing is saved in the normal map fluctuation control flag area. (Step B174). Then, the blinking control timer initial value (for example, 200 ms), which is the initial value of the timer of the blinking cycle of the ordinary figure display, is saved in the ordinary figure blinking control timer area (step B175), and the process transition setting process during the ordinary figure change is performed. finish.

[Processing during fluctuation of general map]
Next, the details of the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map (step B10) in the above-mentioned normal map game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 75 (a), in the normal map changing process, the normal map display process transition setting process (step B180) is performed. As shown in FIG. 75 (b), in the process transition setting process during display of the normal map, first, the process number is set to "2" as the setting process for shifting to the process during display of the normal map (step B181), and the process number is displayed. Is saved in the normal map game processing number area (step B182). After that, the normal map display time (for example, 0.6 seconds), which is the display time of the result of the normal map fluctuation display game on the normal map display device, is set (step B183), and the normal map display time is processed by the normal map game process. Save to the timer area (step B184). Further, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the normal map is saved in the test signal output data area (step B185), and the stop flag indicating that the normal map fluctuation display game is stopped is saved in the normal map fluctuation control flag area (step B185). Step B186), the process of displaying the normal map The transition setting process is terminated.

[Processing during display of general map]
Next, the details of the normal map display processing (step B11) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 76, in the normal map display processing, first, the hit flag (hit information or miss information) set in the normal map normal process is loaded (step B201), and the hit flag area of the RWM is cleared. (Step B202), and it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B203).

When the hit flag is not the hit information (step B203; N), the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B212) for shifting to the normal figure normal process is performed, and the normal figure display process is terminated. This normal process transition setting process 1 is the process shown in FIG. 73. On the other hand, when the hit flag is hit information (step B203; Y), it is determined whether the normal electric support is in progress (in the time saving state) (step B204).

Then, when the normal power is not supported (step B204; N), the normal power release time (for example, 100 ms) when the normal power is not supported is saved in the normal power game processing timer area (step B205). Furthermore, the hit start pointer value (control pointer value) when there is no normal power support is saved in the control pointer area during normal power (step B206), and the hit end pointer value (control pointer value) when there is no normal power support is normally used. Saving in the upper limit value area of the control pointer during drawing (step B207). As a result, the opening mode of the normal variable winning device 37 in the normal operating state is set, and for example, it can be opened twice. After that, the process for setting the transition to the process for hitting the normal map (step B211) is performed to end the process for displaying the normal map.

On the other hand, when the normal power support is in progress (step B204; Y), the normal power release time (for example, 1352 ms) at the time of the normal power support is saved in the normal power game processing timer area (step B208). Further, the hit start pointer value (control pointer value) at the time of normal power support is saved in the control pointer area during normal power (step B209), and the hit end pointer value (control pointer value) at the time of normal power support is per normal figure. It is saved in the middle control pointer upper limit value area (step B210). As a result, the opening mode of the normal variable winning device 37 in the time saving state is set, and for example, it can be opened four times. After that, the process for setting the transition to the process for hitting the normal map (step B211) is performed to end the process for displaying the normal map.

[Middle processing per normal figure Transition setting processing]
FIG. 77 shows the process for setting the transition to the process for hitting the map (step B211) in the process for displaying the map. In this normal figure hitting process transition setting process, first, "3" is set as the processing number for shifting to the normal figure hitting process (step B221), and the processing number is saved in the normal figure game processing number area. (Step B222). After that, the signal related to the hit of the normal map fluctuation display game and the signal related to the start of the normal electric operation are saved in the test signal output data area (step B223), and the normal electric is output to output the signal for driving (on) the general electric solenoid. The on-data is saved in the solenoid output data area (step B224).

Further, the information in the normal variable winning device 37 for storing the number of winnings in the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B225), and the number of winnings for the normal variable winning device 37 during the normal variable winning device 37 is stored. Clear the information in the winning number area (step B226). Then, the flag defining the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variable winning device 37 is saved in the normal electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B227), and the process transition setting process during normal drawing is terminated.

[Processing during normal drawing]
Next, the details of the normal map hitting process (step B12) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 78, in the normal drawing hitting process, first, the normal drawing hitting control pointer is loaded and prepared (step B301), and the value of the loaded normal drawing hitting control pointer is controlled during the normal drawing. It is determined whether or not the value in the pointer upper limit value region (value at the end of hitting) has been reached (step B302).

Then, when the value of the control pointer per normal figure does not reach the value in the upper limit value region of the control pointer per normal figure (step B302; N), the control pointer per normal figure is updated by +1 (step B303). The normal electric operation transition setting process (step B304) is performed to end the normal process. Further, when the value of the control pointer hitting the normal figure reaches the value in the upper limit value area of the control pointer hitting the normal figure (value at the end of hitting) (step B302; Y), the processing control pointer hitting the normal figure in step B303. Without performing the process of updating the area (+1), the process of setting the transition to the normal electric operation (step B304) is performed to end the process of hitting the normal figure.

[Public operation transition setting process]
FIG. 79 shows the normal electric operation transition setting process (step B304) in the above-mentioned normal process per drawing. The normal electric operation transition setting process is a process of driving and controlling the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variable winning device 37, and the process is branched according to the value of the control pointer. In this normal electric operation transition setting process, first, a branch process according to the value of the control pointer is performed (step B311).

If the value of the control pointer is any of 0, 3, 5, and 7, the process proceeds to step B312 to control the blockage of the normal variable winning device 37, so that the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is used. The wait time after blockage (for example, 2800 ms or 1000 ms) is saved in the normal-figure game processing timer area (step B312), and off-data is set in the normal electric solenoid output data area in order to turn off the normal electric solenoid 37c (step B312). Step B313), the solenoid operation transition setting process is terminated.

If the value of the control pointer is any of 1, 4, 6, and 8, the process proceeds to step B314 to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, so that the normal variable winning device corresponding to the control pointer is controlled. The normal power release time (for example, 100 ms, 5200 ms, or 1352 ms), which is the open time of 37, is saved in the normal power game processing timer area (step B314), and the normal power solenoid output is turned on to turn on the normal power solenoid 37c. On-data is set in the data area (step B315), and the solenoid operation transition setting process is completed.

If the value of the control pointer is any of 2 and 9, the process proceeds to step B316, the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 is terminated, and the normal electric remaining ball processing (step B13) is performed. , "4" is set as the processing number (step B316). Then, this processing number is saved in the normal map game processing number area (step B317), and the normal electric remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the normal map game processing timer area (step B318). After that, the off-data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn off the normal power solenoid 37c (step B319), and the normal power operation transition setting process is completed.

[Treatment of remaining spheres]
Next, the details of the Fuden residual ball processing (step B13) in the above-mentioned Fuzu game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 80 (a), in the normal electric remaining ball processing, the normal end process transition setting process (step B400) is performed. As shown in FIG. 80 (b), in the normal figure hit end process transition setting process, first, the process number “5” related to the normal figure hit end process is set (step B401), and the process number is used as the normal figure game process. Save in the number area (step B402).

After that, the ending time of the normal figure is saved in the game processing timer area of the normal figure (step B403), the signal regarding the end of operation of the normal variable winning device 37 is saved in the test signal output data area (step B404), and the normal variable winning device is used. Clear the normal electric count number area for counting the number of winnings in 37 (step B405). Then, the per-figure control pointer area is cleared (step B406), the per-figure control pointer upper limit value area is cleared (step B407), and the per-figure end process transition setting process is terminated.

[End processing per drawing]
Next, the details of the per-figure end processing (step B14) in the above-mentioned futur-figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 81 (a), in the normal figure per end process, the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step B500) is performed. As shown in FIG. 81 (b), in the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2, first, the process number “0” related to the normal figure normal process is set (step B501), and the process number is used as the normal figure game process. Save in the number area (step B502).

After that, the signal related to the end of the hit of the normal fluctuation game is saved in the test signal output data area (step B503), and the flag (flag during the fraud monitoring period) that defines the fraud monitoring period of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is set for fraudulent monitoring. It is saved in the period flag area (step B504), and the normal process transition setting process 2 is terminated.

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, the details of the segment LED editing process (step S110) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold display 54, the special figure 2 hold display 55, the normal figure hold display 56, the first game state display unit 57, and the second game state display provided in the batch display device 50 are displayed. Settings related to driving of the segment LEDs constituting the unit 58, the third game state display unit 59, and the round display unit 60 are performed.

As shown in FIG. 82, in the segment LED editing process, first, a normal figure hold number table in which the display mode on the normal figure hold display is defined is set (step S501), and display data corresponding to the normal figure hold number is set. Is acquired and saved in the segment area of the normal figure hold display (step S502). Next, a special figure 1 hold number table in which the display mode on the special figure 1 hold display is defined is set (step S503), display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired, and the special figure 1 hold display is obtained. Save in the segment area of the vessel (step S504).

After that, a special figure 2 hold number table in which the display mode on the special figure 2 hold display is defined is set (step S505), display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is acquired, and the special figure 2 hold display is obtained. Save in the segment area of (step S506). Further, a round display LED display table in which the display mode of the round display unit is defined is set (step S507), display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer is acquired, and the display data is saved in the segment area of the round display unit (step S507). Step S508).

Next, a game state display table in which display modes in the first game state display unit 57 and the second game state display unit 58 are defined is set (step S509), and display data corresponding to the game state display number is acquired. It is saved in the segment area of each game status display unit (step S510). After that, it is determined whether or not the high-probability notification flag related to the notification that the jackpot probability state is in the high-probability state at the time of power failure recovery is on (step S511). Then, when the high probability notification flag is on (step S511; Y), that is, when the high probability state is being notified, the segment LED editing process is terminated. When the high probability notification flag is not on (step S511; N), the off data of the high probability notification LED is saved in the segment area of the third game state display unit (step S512), and the segment LED editing process is completed. do.

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
Next, the details of the magnet fraud monitoring process performed in the magnet / radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S111) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61, and the start and end of the fraud notification are set.

As shown in FIG. 83, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3), the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) Is on, that is, it is determined whether an abnormal magnetism is detected (step S601). When the magnet sensor is on (step S601; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer that measures the detection period of abnormal magnetism is updated by +1 to check whether the timer has timed up. Determination (step S603).

When the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (step S603; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period of time, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S604), and the initial value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set. Save in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step S605). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step S606), a magnet fraud generation flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S607), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value in the magnet fraud flag region. (Step S613). That is, when the magnetic sensor switch 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period (for example, eight interrupts), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, when the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) is not on (step S601; N), that is, when abnormal magnetism is not detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S608), and the magnet fraud notification time is reached. If the magnet fraud notification timer that specifies is not 0, -1 is updated (step S609). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step S610). Even when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed up (step S603; N), the process proceeds to step S609.

Then, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (step S610; N), that is, when the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step S610; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up, the fraud notification period has expired, or the fraud notification has been sent from the beginning. If not, prepare a command to end the magnet fraud notification (step S611). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S612), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value in the magnet fraud flag region (step S613).

When the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value in the magnet fraud flag region (step S613; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process ends. If the values do not match (step S613; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step S614), command setting processing is performed (step S615), and the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. ..

[Radio wave fraud monitoring process]
Next, the details of the radio wave fraud monitoring process performed in the magnet / radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S111) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62, and the start and end of the fraudulent notification are set.

As shown in FIG. 84, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, the radio wave is transmitted from the state of the detection signal output from the radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121a. It is determined whether the sensor 62 is on, that is, a state in which an abnormal radio wave is detected (step S701). When the radio wave sensor is on (step S701; Y), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the initial value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step S702).

Then, a command for radio wave fraud notification is prepared (step S703), a radio wave fraud generation flag is prepared as a radio wave fraud flag (step S704), and it is determined whether the prepared radio wave fraud flag matches the value in the radio wave fraud flag area. (Step S709). That is, in the case of radio wave fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

On the other hand, when the radio wave sensor is not on (step S701; N), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is not detected, if the radio wave fraud notification timer that regulates the radio wave fraud notification time is not 0, the radio wave fraud notification timer is updated by -1 (step). S705). The minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (step S706).

If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not 0 (step S706; N), that is, if the time is not up, the radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (step S706; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up, the fraudulent notification period has expired, or the fraudulent notification has been sent from the beginning. If not, prepare a command to end the radio wave fraud notification (step S707), prepare a radio wave fraud release flag as a radio wave fraud flag (step S708), and set the prepared radio wave fraud flag to the value in the radio wave fraud flag area. (Step S709).

Then, when the prepared radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the radio wave fraud flag region (step S709; Y), the radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the values do not match (step S709; N), the prepared radio wave fraud flag is saved in the radio wave fraud flag area (step S710), command setting processing is performed (step S711), and the radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. ..

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (step S112) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the external information editing process, the information collection terminal and the game are based on the monitoring results of the payout command transmission process (step S104), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S107), and the magnet / radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S111). Performs processing such as creating information to be output to an external device such as a field internal management device or a test firing test device and setting it in the output buffer.

As shown in FIG. 85, in the external information editing process, first, the main prize ball signal editing process (step S801) for setting the information regarding the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and the starting port signal for editing the winning signal of the starting port is performed. The editing process (step S802) is performed. Next, if the symbol confirmation count control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game is not 0, -1 is updated (step S803). The minimum value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the symbol confirmation number control timer is 0 (step S804).

When the value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is 0 (step S804; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the off data of the symbol confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S804; Y). Step S805). Further, when the value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is not 0 (step S804; N), that is, when the time is not up, the on-data of the symbol confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S806). After that, the process of setting information according to the error status and security status is performed.

In the process of setting information according to the error status and security status, first, a security signal that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like. If the control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S807). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step S808).

If the value of the security signal control timer is not 0 (step S808; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S818), and the game machine error status signal is displayed. The on-data of the above is saved in the test signal output data area (step S819), and the external information editing process is terminated. That is, it is output as external information that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized.

If the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step S808; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, a glass frame opening error is occurring (step S809; Y), and the front frame. An opening error is occurring (step S810; Y), a lower prize opening fraud is occurring (step S811; Y), an upper prize opening fraud is occurring (step S812; Y), and a general electric phone fraud is occurring (step S813; Y). ), When the magnet fraud is occurring (step S814; Y) or the radio wave fraud is occurring (step S815; Y), the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S818), and the game machine error state. The on-data of the signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S819), and the external information editing process is terminated. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

On the other hand, when the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step S808; Y) and no error has occurred (steps S809 to S815; N), the off data of the security signal is external information. The data is saved in the output data area (step S816), the off-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S817), and the external information editing process is terminated.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, the details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step S801) in the above-mentioned external information editing process will be described. The main prize ball signal editing process outputs the main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number) generated by winning a prize in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case) to an external device. It is a process.

As shown in FIG. 86, in the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S821). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step S822). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step S822; Y), it is determined whether the number of times of main prize ball signal output is 0 (step S823).

When the number of times of output of the main prize ball signal is not 0 (step S823; N), the number of times of output of the main prize ball signal is updated by -1 (step S824), and the main prize ball signal is output to the main prize ball signal output control timer area. The initial value of the control timer is saved (step S825). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is the sum of the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the main prize ball signal. It is time (for example, 192 ms). After that, the on-data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S827), and the main prize ball signal editing process is completed. When the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is 0 (step S823; Y), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step). S828), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step S822; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section (step S826). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms) or more. When the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section (step S826; Y), the process shifts to step S827. When the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on section (step S826; N), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S828), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

[Start port signal editing process]
Next, the details of the start port signal editing process (step S802) in the above-mentioned external information editing process will be described. The start port signal editing process is a process that is commonly performed for each of the inputs of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a.

As shown in FIG. 87, in the start port signal editing process, first, if the start port signal output control timer is not 0, the start port signal output control timer is updated by -1 (step S831). The minimum value of the start port signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the start port signal output control timer is 0 (step S832). When the value of the start port signal output control timer is 0 (step S832; Y), it is determined whether the number of start port signal outputs is 0 (step S833).

When the number of start port signal outputs is not 0 (step S833; N), the number of start port signal outputs is updated by -1 (step S834), and the start port signal output control timer initial value is set in the start port signal output control timer area. Is saved (step S835). The initial value of the start port signal output control timer is the time (for example, 64 ms) obtained by adding the time (for example, 128 ms) of the start port signal in the on state (for example, high level) and the time (for example, 64 ms) in the off state (for example, low level). For example, 192 ms). After that, the on-data for turning on the start port signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S837), and the start port signal editing process is terminated. When the number of start port signal outputs is 0 (step S833; Y), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S838). , Ends the start port signal editing process.

On the other hand, when the value of the start port signal output control timer is not 0 (step S832; N), it is determined whether the start port signal output control timer is in the output on section (step S836). The fact that the start port signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the start port signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms) or more. When the start port signal output control timer is in the output on section (step S836; Y), the process shifts to step S837. When the start port signal output control timer is not in the output on section (step S836; N), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S836; N). Step S838), the start port signal editing process is terminated.

Next, the control by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 88 shows the main functions of the effect control device 300. The game control device 100 includes a command transmission connector 141 forming a first connector for transmitting various information to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 receives various information transmitted from the game control device 100. It is provided with a command receiving connector 328 forming a second connection connector provided for this purpose. By connecting the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 via this connector, it is possible to transmit various information from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 controls the game based on this information.

The RTC 338 includes a calendar function unit 338a that manages the date and day of the week, and a clock function unit 338b that manages the current time, and can output these information to the CPU 311. Based on the information from the RTC 338, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as changing the effect mode of the decorative special figure variation display game. Further, based on the information from the RTC338, the process of changing the model is also performed by changing the content information that defines the production mode.

A control program and control data are stored in the PROM 321 which is a non-volatile ROM. As a storage unit for storing control data, the PROM 321 has a control information storage unit 321a that stores information for controlling a decorative special figure variation display game, an effect, and the like, and a variation mode and a notice of the decorative special figure variation display game. It is provided with a distribution information initial value storage unit 321b that stores initial values of information for selecting an effect, and a history information initial value storage unit 321c that stores initial values of information related to conditions for changing an effect mode.

In the control information storage unit 321a, the variation pattern control information for controlling the decorative special figure variation display game, the advance notice effect control information for controlling the advance notice and the effect, and the information for setting data in the FeRAM 323 are defaults. The setting value table is stored. Further, in the distribution information initial value storage unit 321b, the variation pattern distribution information (variation pattern selection table) for selecting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game, based on the command from the game control device 100. The initial value of (such as) and the initial value of the advance notice effect distribution information (notice group table, advance notice detail table, etc.) for selecting the advance notice and the effect are stored.

Further, in the history information initial value storage unit 321c, the initial value of the hall setting information which is information that can be set for each game store, the unique information (ID data) of the control program, the model information which is the information indicating the model, and the big hit. The type information corresponding to the specifications such as the probability value and the initial value of the effect mode opening related information which is the information for setting the executable effect are stored.

The FeRAM 323 is a non-volatile RAM that can retain the stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. The FeRAM 323 has a control information storage unit 323a capable of storing information for controlling a decorative special figure variation display game, an effect, etc. as a storage unit for storing control data related to the effect control of the game, and a decorative special figure. It is provided with a distribution information storage unit 323b that can store information for selecting a variation mode, a notice, and an effect of a variation display game, and a history information storage unit 323c that can store information related to model settings.

The CPU 311 controls the game based on the control program and control data stored in the PROM 321 and the control data stored in the FeRAM 323. That is, the CPU 311 provides an arithmetic processing means for controlling the game effect control according to the control program and control data stored in the non-volatile ROM (PROM 321) and the control data stored in the non-volatile RAM (FeRAM 323). Eggplant.

The information read from the PROM 321 can be stored in the FeRAM 323, and the information read from the PROM 321 is stored in the corresponding storage unit of the FeRAM 323. The variation pattern control information read from the control information storage unit 321a is stored in the variation pattern control information storage unit 323a1, and the advance notice effect control information read from the control information storage unit 321a is stored in the advance notice effect control information storage unit 323a2. Will be done.

Further, the initial value of the variation pattern distribution information read from the distribution information initial value storage unit 321b is stored in the variation pattern distribution information storage unit 323b1, and the notice read from the distribution information initial value storage unit 321b. The initial value of the effect distribution information is stored in the advance notice effect distribution information storage unit 323b2. Further, the initial value of the hole setting information read from the history information initial value storage unit 321c is stored in the hall setting information storage unit 323c1, and the unique information and model information read from the history information initial value storage unit 321c are stored. The initial value of the effect mode release-related information stored in the model information storage unit 323c2 and read from the history information initial value storage unit 321c is stored in the effect mode release-related information storage unit 323c3.

Further, the effect control device 300 can store the control data output from the factory data setting device 150 in the FeRAM 323 by connecting the factory data setting device 150. This makes it possible to control the game based on the control data taken in from the factory data setting device 150 instead of the control data stored in the PROM 321. When the control data is fetched from the factory data setting device 150, the storage based on the control data from the PROM 321 may be overwritten, or the storage may be stored separately without overwriting.

The factory data setting device 150 includes a distribution information setting unit 151 that outputs information such as fluctuation pattern distribution information and advance notice effect distribution information for selecting a notice and effect, a hall setting information, model information, and effect. It includes a history information setting unit 152 that outputs information such as mode opening related information. The factory data setting device 150 includes a command transmission connector 153 that forms a third connection connector having the same shape as the command transmission connector 141 included in the game control device 100, and the command transmission connector 153 is used as an effect control device. By connecting to the command receiving connector 328 of 300, data can be transmitted to the effect control device 300.

In this way, by making the command transmission connector 153 of the factory data setting device 150 the same shape as the command transmission connector 141 of the game control device 100, the data of the FeRAM 323 can be stored even when the effect control device 300 is enclosed in the case. It can be updated, and settings can be easily added or changed even before shipping or for reuse. That is, it is impossible to provide the effect control device 300 with a dedicated connector for connecting the factory data setting device 150 because an empty connector is created, and the case is in the terminal (pad) state when the connection portion is in the terminal (pad) state. Although it cannot be adjusted after being sealed, such a problem can be solved by making it possible to connect to the factory data setting device 150 by using a connector for connecting to the game control device 100.

The control programs and control data that can be used in common even if the specifications and models are different are stored in PROM321, and the control programs and control data (variation patterns, notice selection tables, etc.) that differ depending on the specifications and models are shipped. The time data setting device 150 may be used to store the data in the FeRAM 323. By doing so, it becomes easy to adjust the control program and control data and reuse the effect control device 300. Further, all the data may be stored in the FeRAM 323 without using the PROM 321. Further, although FeRAM 323 is used as a RAM capable of holding data even during a power failure, the stored contents may be held by supplying power from the backup power source of the gaming machine to the volatile RAM.

Next, the control executed by the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 will be described. The control process by the main control microcomputer 311 mainly includes a main process shown in FIG. 27 and a timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
In the main process, as shown in FIG. 89, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of this program, interrupts are first disabled (step C1), CPU initial settings are performed (step C2), VDP 312 initial settings are performed (step C3), and interrupts are permitted (step C4). .. Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7).

After that, the ID data (unique information) in the control ROM (PROM321) and the backup ID data (unique information) stored in the FeRAM 323 are compared (step C8), and it is determined whether they match (step C9). .. If they match (step C9; Y), the process proceeds to step C13. If they do not match (step C9; N), as the initialization process of FeRAM323, all the contents of the backup RAM (FeRAM323) are cleared (step C10), and the initial value is set in the backup RAM (step C11). .. Then, the ID data in the control ROM is written in the backup RAM (step C12), and the process proceeds to step C13.

As a result, when the control data stored in the FeRAM 323 is the control data stored in a control program different from the control program stored in the PROM 321, the control data is initialized and the control data is stored and held in the FeRAM. It is possible to prevent malfunction due to. For example, when the data of the PROM 321 is updated during the development of the gaming machine, or when the PROM 321 is replaced by the reuse system, it is inconsistent if the old control program data stored in the FeRAM 323 is read as it is. However, it is possible to prevent the malfunction by collating the unique information and performing initialization when the unique information does not match.

After that, the hall setting value data stored in the FeRAM 323, which is the data set by the game store such as the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal and the setting in the power saving state, is stored in the RAM 322 as the player setting data (step C13). ). When the FeRAM 323 is not initialized, the hall setting value data set by the game store and stored in the FeRAM 323 is stored in the RAM 322. Further, when the FeRAM 323 is initialized, the initial value of the hole setting value data stored in the PROM 321 is written in the FeRAM 323, so that the initial value of the hole setting value data is stored in the RAM 322. The brightness and volume of the LED can be changed by the player according to his / her preference, and the player setting data is updated with the change.

FIG. 90 shows an outline of the processing of steps C8 to C12. In step C8, the CPU 311 reads (1) the ID from the PROM 321 forming the control ROM, (2) reads the ID from the FeRAM 323 forming the backup RAM, and (3) compares the two. In this example, the ID read from PROM 321 is 1234h, the ID read from FeRAM 323 is 0000h, and it is determined that they do not match (step C9; N). As a result, the processes of steps C10 to C12 are performed, and (4) the initial values of the ID and control data stored in the PROM 321 are written to the FeRAM 323. The initial value written here includes control information, distribution information initial value, and history information initial value.

It should be noted that such an initialization process is mainly performed at the time of the first power-on when the PROM 321 or FeRAM 323 is replaced in the reuse work of the gaming machine in the factory, or at the time of the first power-on of the new effect control device 300. .. Then, after this initialization, the data is written by the factory data setting device 150, and the gaming machine is shipped.

That is, each time the power is turned on, the CPU 311 serves as a determination means for determining whether the unique information stored in the non-volatile ROM (PROM 321) and the unique information stored in the non-volatile RAM (FeRAM 323) match. Further, the CPU 311 provides an initialization means for initializing the control data and unique information stored in the non-volatile RAM (FeRAM 323) by setting the control data and unique information stored in the non-volatile ROM (PROM 321). Nasu. The unique information (ID) may be unique as long as it is different for each control program, and in addition to the numerical values set arbitrarily, for example, the program version number, the checksum value of the program, the program update date and time, etc. may be used. can.

From the above, the control program and control data related to the production control of the game, the non-volatile ROM (PROM321) that stores unique information different for each control program, and the stored contents can be retained even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. Therefore, the game is played according to the non-volatile RAM (FeRAM323) capable of storing the control data related to the effect control of the game, the control program and the control data stored in the non-volatile ROM, and the control data stored in the non-volatile RAM. The arithmetic processing means includes an arithmetic processing means (CPU311) for performing control related to the effect control of the above, and the arithmetic processing means has unique information stored in the non-volatile ROM and unique information stored in the non-volatile RAM each time the power is turned on. Initialization is performed by setting the control data and unique information stored in the non-volatile ROM to the control data and unique information stored in the non-volatile RAM and the determination means (CPU 311) for determining whether the information matches. When it is determined by the determination means that the unique information stored in the non-volatile ROM and the unique information stored in the non-volatile RAM match, the initialization means is used for initialization. The control data and unique information stored in the non-volatile RAM are retained without performing, and the determination means determines that the unique information stored in the non-volatile ROM and the unique information stored in the non-volatile RAM do not match. In that case, the initialization is performed by the initialization means.

Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that stores control data in game control in a RAM and performs game control based on the control data stored in the RAM (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-925). In a conventional gaming machine, it is conceivable to back up the RAM, but if the control program is changed, there is a risk that the control data stored in the RAM and the control program will not correspond and will malfunction. be. However, according to the above configuration, when the control data stored in the non-volatile RAM is the control data stored in a control program different from the control program stored in the non-volatile ROM, the control data is stored. Since it is initialized, it is possible to prevent malfunction due to the control data stored in the non-volatile RAM.

Returning to FIG. 89, the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C13 is performed, and then the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C14). Next, the effect button input process (step C15) for creating input information from the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 is read in the timer interrupt process, and in this effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25, the effect content is changed.

Then, the hall / player setting mode processing for accepting operations such as setting the changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal and changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal by the player is performed (step C16). Next, a model switching process (step C17) for switching models based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition is performed, and an effect mode management process (step C18) for managing the types of effects that can be executed is performed. After that, a random number update process (step C19) for updating the random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed, and a reception command check process (step) for analyzing and responding to the command from the game control device 100 is performed. Perform C20).

Next, the effect display editing process (step C21) is performed, and the preparation end of the drawing command is set (step C22). In the effect display editing process, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and finally the drawing data is set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C23). In the present embodiment, since the system cycle (1 frame 1/30 second) is created, it is determined that the frame switching timing is reached when the V blank interrupt (1/60 second) is inserted twice. The frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. (Switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C23 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C23; N), the process of step C23 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C23 that it is the frame switching timing (step C23; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C24).

After that, a sound control process (step C25) that controls the output of the sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), a decoration control process that controls the LEDs of the panel decoration device 46, and the frame decoration device 18 (step C26). ), The movable body control process (step C27) for controlling the motor and the solenoid of the board effect device 44 is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C14).

[Hall / player setting mode processing]
FIG. 91 shows the hall / player setting mode process (step C16) in the above-mentioned main process. In this hall / player setting mode process, first, it is determined whether or not the hall setting mode, which is a state in which information is set on the game store side, is in effect (step C31). When the hole setting mode is in progress, the hole setting mode flag is set, and it is possible to determine whether the hole setting mode is in effect depending on the presence or absence of this flag. If the hall setting mode is in progress (step C31; Y), the process proceeds to step C36. When not in the hole setting mode (step C31; N), it is determined whether the player is in the player setting mode in which the player sets the information (step C32).

When the player setting mode is in progress, the player setting mode flag is set, and it is possible to determine whether or not the player setting mode is in use depending on the presence or absence of this flag. If the player setting mode is in progress (step C32; Y), the process proceeds to step C49. Further, when the player is not in the player setting mode (step C32; N), it is determined whether the start condition of the hole setting mode is satisfied (step C33). The start condition of the hall setting mode here is, for example, that the effect button 25 is pressed twice while waiting for a customer and the front frame 12 is open. When the start condition of the hole setting mode is satisfied (step C33; Y), the screen drawing start of the hole setting mode is set (step C34), and the flag in the hole setting mode is set (step C35).

After that, a hall volume adjustment process (step C36) for setting the volume changeable range based on the operation input and a hall LED brightness adjustment process (step C37) for setting the LED brightness changeable range based on the operation input are performed. In these processes, both the upper limit value and the lower limit value may be set, or only one of them may be set. The player can adjust the volume and the brightness of the LED within the range set here. Further, the liquid crystal brightness adjustment process (step C38) in which the liquid crystal brightness is set based on the operation input, and the power saving setting process (step C38) in which the power saving state to be shifted when the game is not performed for a predetermined time is set based on the operation input. C39) is performed. In this power saving setting process (step C39), the setting of whether or not to enable the power saving setting when the game is not performed for a predetermined time, and the volume, LED brightness, and liquid crystal brightness at the time of the power saving setting are set for each hole. It can be set to. In addition to the above settings, it may be possible to set whether or not to operate the movable accessory during power saving. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirmation operation input for confirming the information set in these processes (step C40).

If there is no setting confirmation operation input (step C40; N), the hall / player setting mode process is terminated. Further, when there is a setting confirmation operation input (step C40; Y), it is determined whether the setting confirmation operation input is the factory default setting (step C41). The confirmation operation input includes a confirmation operation input for confirming the information set in the processes from steps C36 to C39 and a confirmation operation input for returning to the factory default setting, and it is determined which is performed.

If it is not the confirmation operation input in the factory setting (step C41; N), that is, if it is the confirmation operation input for confirming the information set in the processing from steps C36 to C39, the processing from step C36 to C39. The determined hole setting data is written to the backup RAM with the information set in step 1 as the determined information (step C43). Further, in the case of the confirmation operation input in the factory default setting (step C41; Y), the factory default setting process (step C42) is performed, the information set in the processes from steps C36 to C39 is discarded, and the factory is used. The initial value at the time of shipment is used as the determined information, and the determined hole setting data is written to the backup RAM (step C43). As a result, the initial setting values (volume, LED brightness, liquid crystal brightness setting values) stored in the PROM 321 are stored in the FeRAM 323.

In the process (step C43) of writing the determined hole setting data to the backup RAM (FeRAM 323), information is written to the hole setting information storage unit 324c1 of the history information storage unit 323c. After that, the end of screen drawing in the hole setting mode is set (step C43), the flag in the hole setting mode is cleared (step C44), and the hole / player setting mode processing is ended.

On the other hand, when the start condition of the hole setting mode is not satisfied (step C33; N), it is determined whether the start condition of the player setting mode is satisfied (step C46). The start condition of the hall setting mode here is, for example, that the effect button 25 is pressed once while the customer waiting state in which the special figure variation display game and the normal map variation display game are not executed. If the start condition of the player setting mode is not satisfied (step C46; N), the hall / player setting mode process is terminated. When the start condition of the player setting mode is satisfied (step C46; Y), the screen drawing start of the player setting mode is set (step C47), and the player setting mode flag is set (step C48).

Then, the change set in the player volume adjustment process (step C49) and the hall LED adjustment process (step C37) for changing the volume based on the operation input within the changeable range set in the hall volume adjustment process (step C36). The player LED brightness adjustment process (step C50) for changing the LED brightness based on the operation input is performed within the possible range. After that, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirmation operation input (step C51), and if there is no setting confirmation operation input (step C51: N), the hall / player setting mode process is terminated.

If there is a setting confirmation operation input (step C51: Y), the information set in steps C36 and C37 is stored in the RAM 322 as player setting data, and then the end of screen drawing in the player setting mode is set. (Step C52), the player setting mode flag is cleared (step C53), and the hole / player setting mode processing is terminated. As a result, the brightness and volume of the LED set by the player are changed.

The drawing update setting accompanying the operation input after entering the hall setting mode or the player setting mode is performed by the effect button input process (step C15). Further, although the player setting data is stored in the RAM 322, it may be stored in the FeRAM 323. Further, the time is acquired from the RTC 338 when the power is turned off and stored in the FeRAM 322, the power cutoff time is calculated from the time acquired from the RTC 338 when the power is turned on, and the player setting data stored in the FeRAM 323 according to the power cutoff time. It may be decided whether or not to store the hole set value data. For example, if the power cutoff time is within a predetermined time, the hall setting value data is not stored in the player setting data and is maintained as it is, and the power is cut off to recover from a short-time power failure or error. Can prevent the player setting data from being reset.

[Model switching process]
FIG. 92 shows the model switching process (step C17) in the above-mentioned main process. In this model switching process, first, it is determined whether or not the model has been switched based on the presence or absence of the model switching flag (step C71). If the model has been switched (step C71; Y), the model switching process is terminated. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the model can be switched only once, so that the model switching process is not performed when the model has already been switched.

If the model has not been switched (step C71; N), it is determined whether the date and time have been confirmed based on the presence or absence of the switching date and time confirmed flag (step C72). If the date and time have been confirmed (step C72; Y), the model switching process is terminated. If the date and time have not been confirmed (step C72; N), the switching date and time confirmed flag is set (step C73). The switching date / time confirmed flag is a process (step C7) in which the initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized in the main process so that the switching date / time is confirmed only once after the power of the gaming machine is turned on. It is cleared by saving the initial value.

After that, it is determined whether or not there is a model switching date and time setting that specifies the model switching date and time (step C74), and if there is no model switching date and time setting (step C74; N), the model switching process is terminated. The model switching date and time setting is stored in FeRAM323, but the value in the state where this model switching date and time setting is not stored is mistakenly read out as the model switching date and time setting, and the model is switched. I try to prevent it. When the model switching date and time is set (step C74; Y), the date and time information is read from the RTC (step C75), and it is determined whether the read date and time has passed the model switching date and time (step C76).

If the read date and time has not passed the model switching date and time (step C76; N), the model switching process is terminated. If the read date and time has passed the model switching date and time (step C76; Y), make various settings for switching the model content (step C77), set the model switched flag (step C78), and switch the model. End the process. The model switching date and time may be, for example, a date and time on a calendar, or may be a date and time from the introduction date of the gaming machine to the gaming store.

FIG. 93 shows the setting information of the model. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the production mode of the game corresponding to each of the first model and the second model is stored in advance in the FeRAM 323 that stores the information read from the PROM 321 and the PROM 321. Then, the set value of the model switching setting information of each effect mode is set according to the set value of the content information that defines the effect mode, and which effect mode is used is set.

Before switching the model, the setting value of the content information is set to 1, which is the value corresponding to the first model, and along with this, the setting value for the production mode such as the background information and the design information is also changed to the first model. It is set to 1 which is a corresponding value, and is set to play a game using the effect mode corresponding to the first model among the effect modes stored in the PROM 321 and FeRAM 323. Then, by performing the process of performing various settings for switching the model contents (step C77), the setting value of the content information is changed to 2, which is the value corresponding to the second model, and the setting value for the production mode is accompanied by this. Is also set to 2, which is a value corresponding to the second model, and is set to play the game using the effect mode corresponding to the second model among the effect modes stored in the PROM 321 and FeRAM 323. It should be noted that at least the set value of the content information is stored in the FeRAM 323 and is maintained even if the power is cut off.

In this way, by making it possible for one gaming machine to have different models with the passage of time, it is possible to suppress the effect of attracting customers from diminishing with the passage of time and to generate new means of attracting customers. .. The number of models that can be switched may be any number as long as it is two or more. Further, by switching the model by referring to different information while using one control program, it is possible to reduce duplicate data.

That is, the effect control device 300 (PROM 321 or FeRAM 323) serves as an effect mode storage means for storing a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, effect modes of different models) as the effect mode of the game. Further, the effect control device 300 (CPU311) serves as a content information setting means capable of setting any of the plurality of content information defining the effect mode of the game, and the content information set by the content information setting means. Depending on the situation, it serves as an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode that can be selected from a plurality of types of effect modes.

Further, the effect control device 300 (PROM 321 or FeRAM 323) serves as an effect mode change storage means capable of storing information (model switching date and time setting) indicating the date and time when the content information is changed, and the effect control device 300 (CPU311) is used. It is determined that the content information change determination means for determining whether or not to change the content information is performed based on the information indicated by the timing means and the effect storage mode change determination means, and that the content information is changed by the content information change determination means. In this case, it serves as a content information changing means for changing the set content information to different content information.

For example, among the model switching setting information, when the set value is 1 corresponding to the first model for the symbol information which is the information related to the identification information used in the decorative special figure variation display game, it is shown in FIG. 94 (a). When the symbol and the arrangement are used and the set value is 2 corresponding to the second model, the symbol and the arrangement shown in FIG. 94 (b) are used. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an identification information setting means for setting a plurality of identification information according to the content information set by the content information setting means.

In the control program of the effect control device 300, the default identification information, which is the symbol displayed on the display device 41 when the power is turned on, has the symbol number 9 in the left variation display area, the symbol number 10 in the middle variation display area, and the right variation display. It is controlled so that the symbol of symbol number 11 is displayed in the area. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an information display means for displaying predetermined identification information as default identification information on the display device 41 when the power is turned on, from among the plurality of identification information set by the identification information setting means.

In the symbol arrangement shown in FIG. 94, the symbols are arranged so that the information of the model name corresponding to the content information is displayed by the display when the power is turned on, and the symbol of the first model shown in FIG. 94 (a) is arranged. In the array, the symbols are arranged so that the model name "ABC" is displayed, and in the symbol array of the second model shown in FIG. 94 (b), the symbols are displayed so as to be displayed as the model name "Iroha". It is arranged. This makes it possible to check the set content information (model) by checking the default identification information displayed when the power is turned on.

Further, among the model switching setting information, the setting value of the variation pattern selection table group for selecting the variation pattern of the decorative special figure variation display game according to the command from the game control device 100 is 1 corresponding to the first model. If there is, the variation pattern selection table group shown in FIGS. 95 (a) to 95 (d) is used, and if the set value is 2, which corresponds to the second model, from FIGS. 95 (e) to (h). The variation pattern selection table group shown is used.

The game control device 100 sets a variation pattern including the variation time of the special figure variation display game, and transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern to the effect control device 300. The setting of this fluctuation pattern is performed regardless of the model setting in the effect control device 300. As shown in FIGS. 96A to 96D, the game control device 100 includes a variation pattern table group divided by the result of the special figure variation display game and the start storage number (holding number) at the start of the game. Therefore, it is possible to set the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time specified in the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the start memory for executing the special figure fluctuation display game.

For example, in the special figure variation display game in which the result is out of order and the number of start storages at the start of the game is 1 or 2, the variation pattern as shown in FIG. 96A can be selected and is selected. The fluctuation pattern command and fluctuation time are set according to the fluctuation pattern. Assuming that no reach is selected as the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time is set to 12 seconds, and the command of MODE is C0H and the command of ACTION is 01H is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as the fluctuation pattern command.

Further, in the special figure variation display game in which the result is out of order and the number of start storages at the start of the game is 3, the variation pattern as shown in FIG. 96B can be selected, and the selected variation pattern can be selected. The fluctuation pattern command and fluctuation time are set according to the above. Assuming that no reach is selected as the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time is set to 8 seconds, and the command of MODE is C0H and the command of ACTION is 01H is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as the fluctuation pattern command.

The effect control device 300 grasps the fluctuation time from the start memory number (holding number) at the start of the game as a result of the fluctuation pattern command and the special figure fluctuation display game, and according to the set value of the model switching setting information, the decorative special figure. The variation pattern of the variation display game is set using the variation pattern selection table group shown in FIGS. 95 (a) to 95 (d) or the variation pattern selection table group shown in FIGS. 95 (e) to 95 (h). That is, the effect control device 300 (CPU311) serves as an effect mode selection means for selecting an effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern set by the variation pattern setting means from a plurality of effect modes set by the effect mode setting means.

As with the variation pattern table group of the game control device 100 shown in FIG. 96, each variation pattern selection table group shown in FIG. 95 is the result of the special figure variation display game and the start storage number (holding number) at the start of the game. It is divided by. Further, for each variation pattern command transmitted from the game control device 100, at least one variation pattern of the decorative special figure variation display game is defined. Therefore, regardless of which variation pattern selection table group is used, it is possible to set the variation pattern of the decorative special figure variation display game for the variation pattern of all the special figure variation display games that can be set by the game control device 100. Become. As a result, even when the content information is changed to change the selectable effect mode, it is not necessary to change the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game in the game control device 100.

The variation pattern selection table group shown in FIGS. 95 (a) to 95 (d) and the variation pattern selection table group shown in FIGS. 95 (e) to 95 (h) have different types of variation patterns set for the same variation pattern command. By making it different, it is made to be a different model. For example, for a special figure variation display game in which the result is out of order and the number of start memories at the start of the game is 1 or 2, when MODE receives a command of C5H and ACTION receives a command of 03H as variation pattern commands, the first If the model of is set, SP reach A is selected from FIG. 96 (a), and if a second model is set, SP reach 1 is selected from FIG. 96 (e). SP reach A and SP reach 1 have the same fluctuation time of 20 seconds, but the contents are different.

Further, for a special figure variation display game in which the result is out of order and the number of start storages at the start of the game is 1 or 2, when the MODE receives a command of C0H and the ACTION command of 01H as a variation pattern command, it is decorated. As the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game, either no reach or N reach (short) can be selected. It suffices if at least one decorative special figure variation display game variation pattern can be set for one variation pattern command, but a plurality of variation patterns may be associated and selected in this way. Further, the number of variation patterns of the decorative special figure variation display game associated with one variation pattern command may be different depending on the variation pattern selection table group.

Based on the above, the game is executed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined conditions, and when the result of the game is the predetermined result, the production mode of the game is defined in the game machine capable of executing the special game advantageous to the player. Content information setting means (effect control device 300) that can set any of the plurality of content information to be performed, and effect mode storage means (effect control device 300) that stores a plurality of types of effect modes as the effect mode of the game. The effect mode setting means (effect control device 300) for setting an effect mode that can be selected from a plurality of types of effect modes according to the content information set by the content information setting means, and information indicating the current date and time. (Effect control device 300), an effect mode change storage means (effect control device 300) that can store information indicating the date and time when the content information is changed, and a time measuring means and an effect mode change storage means. Is set when it is determined by the content information change determination means (effect control device 300) that determines whether or not to change the content information and the content information change determination means based on the information indicated by. It is provided with a content information changing means (effect control device 300) for changing the existing content information to different content information.

Here, as the production mode of the game, the execution mode (variation pattern) of the decorative game executed corresponding to the game, the display of the character or the like in the game, the operation mode of the accessory, the sound emission mode of the voice, the LED, etc. , Background, waiting image for customers, etc. are included.

It has been proposed that a conventional gaming machine can generate an effect based on the introduction date to a gaming store by using a real-time clock (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-231921). However, when the addition of the production is used as a means of attracting customers, there is a problem that the effect of attracting customers diminishes after the production is added. However, according to the above configuration, since the model itself is changed, it is possible to suppress the effect of attracting customers from diminishing with the passage of time and to generate a new means of attracting customers.

Further, the effect mode setting means (game control device 100) for setting the variation pattern, which is the execution mode of the game, and the effect mode setting means (game control device 100) corresponding to the variation pattern set by the variation pattern setting means. The effect mode selecting means (effect control device 300) for selecting from a plurality of effect modes set by the effect control device 300) is provided, and the effect mode setting means can be set according to the content information. As a result, the effect mode is set so that at least one effect mode can be selected for each of all the variable patterns that can be set by the variation pattern setting means. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the setting of the fluctuation pattern even when the content information is changed to change the selectable effect mode.

Further, the display device 41 for displaying the game is provided, and the game is a variable display game in which a plurality of identification information is variablely displayed and then the identification information according to the result is stopped and displayed. Default identification of predetermined identification information from among the identification information setting means (effect control device 300) that sets a plurality of identification information according to the set content information and the plurality of identification information set by the identification information setting means. Information display means (effect control device 300) to be displayed on the display device 41 when the power is turned on as information, and the information display means uses identification information corresponding to the content information set in the content information setting means as default identification information. It will be displayed. Therefore, the set content information can be confirmed by confirming the default identification information displayed when the power is turned on.

[Receive command check process]
FIG. 97 shows the received command check process (step C20) in the above-mentioned main process. In this received command check process, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of command receptions (step C101), and the command is received. It is determined whether or not the number is not 0 (step C102). Then, when it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C102; N), the received command check process is terminated. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C102; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of command receptions (step C103).

Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C104), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C105), and whether or not the command copy for the number of received commands is completed. (Step C106). As described above, in the present embodiment, the command is not analyzed directly in the received command buffer, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. It is configured as. As a result, the command (data) can be moved to create a space in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in units of one round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C106 that the copy of the command for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C106; N), the process returns to the process of step C104. When it is determined that the copy of the command corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C106; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C107), and the received command analysis process (step C108) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C109), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of the command corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C100). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the command corresponding to the number of received commands is not completed (step C100; N), the process returns to the process of step C107. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C100; Y), the received command check process is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, the commands received in one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 98 shows the received command analysis process (step C108) in the above-mentioned received command check process. In this reception command analysis process, first, it is determined whether continuous data is being received (step C111). The continuous data is data transmitted from the factory data setting device 150. When continuous data is being received (step C111; Y), the backup command process (step C127) is performed, and the received command analysis process is terminated. As a result, the reception of the data transmitted from the factory data setting device 150 has priority over the processing based on the command, so that the data can be reliably received.

When continuous data is not being received (step C111; N), the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte is ACT (ACTION) (step C112), and it is determined whether or not the MODE is in the normal range. (Step C113). When it is determined that the MODE is in the normal range (step C113; Y), it is determined whether or not the ACT is in the normal range (step C114). Then, when it is determined that the ACT is in the normal range (step C114; Y), it is determined whether or not the ACT for MODE is the correct combination (step C115).

Further, in step C113, when it is determined that MODE is not in the normal range (step C113; N), in step C114, when it is determined that ACT is not in the normal range (step C114; N), or in step C115, with respect to MOED. If it is determined that the ACT is not the correct combination (step C115; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

If it is determined in step C115 that the ACT for MODE is the correct combination (step C115; Y), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C116). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C116; Y), the variable command process (step C117) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C116 that MODE is not in the range of the variable command (step C116; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the jackpot command (step C118). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C118; Y), the jackpot command process (step C119) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C118 that MODE is not in the range of the jackpot command (step C118; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the symbol command (step C120). Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the symbol-based command (step C120; Y), the symbol-based command process (step C121) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C120 that MODE is not in the range of symbol commands (step C120; N), MODE determines whether it is in the range of single-shot commands such as hold count commands and error commands. (Step C122). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the single-shot command (step C122; Y), the single-shot command process (step C123) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C122 that MODE is not in the range of the one-shot command (step C122; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the look-ahead command (step C124). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the look-ahead command (step C124; Y), the look-ahead command process (step C125) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C124 that MODE is not in the range of the look-ahead command (step C124; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the backup command (step C126). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the backup system command (step C126; Y), the backup system command process (step C127) is performed to end the received command analysis process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step C126 that MODE is not within the range of the backup command (step C126; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

[Variable command processing]
FIG. 99 shows a variable command process (step C117) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process. In this variable command process, first, it is determined whether or not the type of the special figure variable display game is undetermined (step C131). By this determination, it is possible to check whether or not the stop symbol command can be received before the fluctuation pattern command is received. Since the stop symbol command contains information about the type of the special figure variation display game (whether it is special figure 1 or special figure 2), if the stop symbol command can be received normally, the special figure variation display game It is determined that the type of is not undetermined.

If it is determined in step C131 that the type of the special figure variation display game is undetermined (step C131; Y), the variation command processing is terminated. Further, when it is determined that the type of the special figure variation display game is not undetermined (step C131; N), the variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process (step C132) is performed. In this variation pattern correspondence symbol determination process, it is determined whether or not the type (type) of the stop symbol command matches (matches) with the variation pattern command. As a result, if the types of the fluctuation pattern command and the stop symbol command do not match, for example, as a combination of the fluctuation pattern command of the hit fluctuation and the stop symbol command of the outlier symbol, the fluctuation does not occur (specifically). Do not play the decorative special figure variation display game).

As a result of the determination in step C132, if the types of the variable pattern command and the stop symbol command do not match (step C133; Y), the variable system command processing is terminated. Further, when the types of the variation pattern command and the stop symbol command match (step C133; N), the variation effect setting process (step C134) is performed, and the total number of executions of the special figure variation display game is counted. The fluctuation count counter is updated by +1 (step C135), and the fluctuation command processing is terminated.

[Variable effect setting process]
FIG. 100 shows a variation effect setting process (step C134) in the above-mentioned variation system command process. In this variation effect setting process, first, the variation pattern classification process (step C141) is performed, the advance notice information area is completely cleared (step C142), and the first half variable advance notice lottery process (step C143) is performed. Next, as a result of the classification in step C141, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command is roughly classified into the variation pattern of the reachless variation (step C144).

If it is determined in step C144 that the variation pattern is roughly classified into the variation pattern of the non-reach variation (step C144; Y), the process proceeds to step C146. Further, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation without reach is not roughly classified (step C144; N), that is, when the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern command is the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation with reach, the notice lottery process during the latter half of the fluctuation is performed. (Step C145) is performed, and the process proceeds to the process of step C146.

Then, the decoration stop symbol setting process (step C146) is performed, the variation start setting process (step C148) is performed, and the advance notice is given in the first half variable advance notice lottery process (step C143) and the second half variable advance notice lottery process (step C145). It is determined whether or not there is a setting (step C148). If there is no notice setting (step C148; N), the variable effect setting process ends. When the notice is set (step C148; Y), the set number of notices is added to the total number of notice appearance counters (step C149), and the variable effect setting process is terminated.

In the process of adding the set number of notices to the total number of notice appearance counters (step C149), each of the notices set in the first half changing notice lottery process (step C143) and the second half changing notice lottery process (step C145). Is added to the total notice appearance count counter as one notice. This makes it possible to count the number of times the notice has been executed.

[Notice lottery processing during the first half change]
FIG. 101 shows a notice lottery process (step C143) during the first half of the variation effect setting process described above. In this first half change notice lottery process, first, the first half notice group table 1 corresponding to the type of change pattern, the effect mode, etc. is set (step C161), and a lottery for selecting the notice group of the change start notice effect is performed. The advance notice group lottery process (step C162) is performed. Specifically, in the case of this embodiment, "no notice", "PB (push button) notice", "change start notice", "background change notice", "PB notice + change start notice", "PB notice +" A notice group is selected from "Background change notice" and "Change start notice + Background change notice".

When "no notice" is selected as a result of the lottery in step C162 (step C163; Y), information about "no notice" is stored as normal effect information of the notice effect at the start of fluctuation, and the process of step C166 is performed. Move to. On the other hand, when a result other than "no notice" is selected as a result of the lottery in step C162 (step C163; N), a random number in a range corresponding to the effect mode release related information and the lottery content is prepared (step C164). .. As will be described later, the effect mode release related information is set according to the progress of the game, and the types of effects that can appear (selectable) by setting the range of random numbers according to this are set. I try to change it.

Then, a notice detail lottery process (step C165) for selecting a notice pattern to appear at the start of fluctuation from the normal notice patterns included in the notice group selected in the lottery of step C162 is performed, and step C166 is performed. Move to the processing of. For example, when "background change notice" is selected in the lottery of step C162, a notice pattern to appear from a plurality of types of background change notices is selected, and information on the selected notice pattern changes. It is stored as normal production information of.

After that, the first half notice group table 2 corresponding to the type of fluctuation pattern, the effect mode, etc. is set (step C166), and the notice group lottery process (step C167) for selecting the notice group for the pre-reach notice effect is performed. conduct. Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, the notice group is selected from "step-up notice", "conversation notice", and "no notice".

When "no notice" is selected as a result of the lottery in step C167 (step C168; Y), the information about "no notice" is stored as the normal effect information of the pre-reach notice effect, and the first half change notice lottery. End the process. On the other hand, when a result other than "no notice" is selected as a result of the lottery in step C167 (step C168; N), a random number in a range corresponding to the effect mode release related information and the lottery content is prepared (step C169). ..

Then, from the normal notice patterns included in the notice group selected in the lottery of step C167, the notice detail lottery process (step C170) for selecting the notice pattern to appear before the reach is performed, and the first half is performed. Ends the variable notice lottery process. For example, when "step-up notice" is selected in the lottery of step C166, a notice pattern to appear from a plurality of types of step-up notices having different stages and contents is selected, and the selected notice pattern is related. The information is stored as normal production information of the pre-reach notice production.

[Lottery process for advance notice during the second half change]
FIG. 102 shows a notice lottery process (step C145) during the latter half of the variation effect setting process described above. In this second half change notice lottery process, first, a second half notice group table corresponding to the type of change pattern, the effect mode, etc. is set (step C181), and a lottery is performed to select the notice group for the reach notice effect. The group lottery process (step C182) is performed. Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, the notice group is selected from "group notice", "title notice", and "no notice".

When "no notice" is selected as a result of the lottery in step C182 (step C183; Y), the information about "no notice" is stored as the normal effect information of the notice effect during the reach, and the notice lottery during the latter half change. End the process. Further, when a result other than "no notice" is selected as a result of the lottery in step C182 (step C183; N), information related to the release of the effect mode and random numbers in the range corresponding to the lottery contents are prepared (step C169). ..

Then, from the normal notice patterns included in the notice group selected in the lottery of step C182, the notice detail lottery process (step C185) for selecting the notice pattern to appear during the reach is performed, and the latter half. Ends the variable notice lottery process. For example, when "group notice" is selected in the lottery of step C182, a notice pattern to appear from a plurality of group notices having different contents is selected, and information on the selected notice pattern is displayed in the reach notice effect. It is usually stored as production information.

In this embodiment, it is assumed that there are two notice timings (at the start of the change and before the reach) during the first half change, and there is one notice timing during the second half change, and the notice group lottery process is performed for each. Although configured, it is not limited to this. The number of advance notice timings during the first half fluctuation and the second half fluctuation may be one or a plurality of times.

Further, as in the present embodiment, by performing a lottery at each notice timing, it is possible to execute a large number of notice effects even with a small amount of memory usage. For example, when the "notice group for notice effect at the start of fluctuation" and the "notice group for notice effect before reach" are selected in two lottery as in the present embodiment, the notice group table used in the two lottery As a storage area, an area corresponding to "the number of notice groups for the notice effect at the start of fluctuation" + "the number of notice groups for the notice effect before reach" is required. On the other hand, when "notice group of notice effect at the start of change" and "notice group of notice effect before reach" are selected in one lottery, "notice group of notice effect at start of change" in one lottery. One combination is selected from the notice group table that stores a plurality of combinations of "pre-reach notice effect notice group". Therefore, as a storage area of the notice group table used in the one lottery, an area corresponding to "the number of notice groups for the notice effect at the start of fluctuation" x "the number of notice groups for the notice effect before reach" is required, and the notice is required. As the number of timings and the number of advance notice groups increases, the required area increases, so that the memory usage increases. Therefore, from the viewpoint of reducing the memory usage, it is preferable to perform the notice group lottery process at each notice timing.

On the other hand, although the notice group lottery process is performed corresponding to each notice timing, the notice group of each notice timing may be selected by one notice group lottery process for a plurality of notice timings. By doing so, it is possible to execute a large number of advance notice effects even with a small number of lottery. That is, from the viewpoint of reducing the number of lottery, it is preferable to select a plurality of notice groups in one notice group lottery process.

[Production mode management process]
FIG. 103 shows the effect mode management process (step C18) in the above-mentioned main process. In this effect mode management process, first, the total number of appearances of the notice, which is the counting result of the number of appearances of the notice, is loaded (step C201), and the total number of big hits, which is the counting result of the number of big hits, is loaded (step C202). Further, the total number of special map fluctuations, which is the counting result of the number of executions of the special map variation display game, is loaded (step C203), and the date and time information of the RTC is read out (step C204).

The total number of advance notice appearances is counted in the process (step C149) of adding the set number of advance notices to the total number of advance notice appearance counters in the above-mentioned variable effect setting process. The total number of big hits is counted by updating the total number of big hit counters by +1 each time a fanfare command is received in the big hit system command process (step C119) in the received command analysis process. The total number of special map fluctuations is counted in the process (step C135) of updating the total number of special map fluctuation counters by +1 to count the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in the variable system command process.

These form game parameters that are information about the result of the progress of the game, and the effect control device 300 serves as a game parameter collecting means that collects the game parameters that are the information about the result of the progress of the game. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the gaming parameters are counted in units of one business day, but this period can be arbitrarily set.

After that, the release state of the effect (information related to the release of the effect mode) is set based on various parameters (step C205). The various parameters include the above-mentioned game parameters, information from the RTC, information indicating that the effect type set in step C210 described later is set, and the like. The effect mode release-related information is information that specifies an effect that can be executed from among a plurality of effect modes, and this effect mode release-related information includes the total number of notice appearances, the total number of big hits, the total number of special map fluctuations, and the date and time of the RTC. It is set based on information, information indicating that the effect type is set, and the like.

The total number of appearances of the notice, the total number of big hits, the total number of fluctuations in the special figure, and the effect mode release related information are stored in the FeRAM 323, and the information can be retained even when the power is cut off. That is, the effect release information (effect mode opening-related) that allows the effect control device 300 to specify a predetermined (executable) effect mode from a plurality of effect modes based on the game parameters collected by the game parameter collecting means. It serves as an information setting means for setting information).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a newly released (executable) effect (step C206). If there is no newly released effect (step C206; N), the process proceeds to step C208. If there is a newly released effect (step C206; Y), the display setting of the release notification display corresponding to the newly released effect is set (step C207), and the process proceeds to step C208.

In step S208, it is determined whether or not the effect selectable state in which the player can select the effect mode that can be executed. The state in which the effect can be selected is, for example, a state of waiting for a customer. If the effect selection is not possible (step C208; N), the effect mode management process ends. Further, when the effect selection is possible (step C208; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an effect selection operation which is a specific operation of the effect button 25 (step C209).

If there is no effect selection operation (step C209; N), the effect mode management process ends. When there is an effect selection operation (step C209; Y), the effect type is changed to the effect type corresponding to the effect selection operation (step C210), and the effect mode management process is terminated. In the process of changing to the effect type corresponding to the effect selection operation (step C210), the effect mode opening-related information corresponding to the effect type is set, and the information indicating that the effect type is set is set. By the above processing, it is possible to change the progress of the game, the passage of the date and time, and the effect that can be executed by the operation of the player. Regarding the process of selecting the effect type by the player in steps C208 to C210, the player volume adjustment process (step C49) performed when the player setting mode is in the hall / player setting mode process shown in FIG. ) And the player LED brightness adjustment process (step C50).

FIG. 104 shows the conditions for changing the information related to the release of the effect mode. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two types of gaming modes, a character A effect mode and a character B effect mode, are prepared, and the player can select one of the game modes. The character A effect mode is a game mode in which an effect is mainly performed by adding a variation pattern or a notice regarding the character A, and as shown in FIG. 104 (a), an effect mode that can be executed according to the model content change condition is set. It is changing. Further, the character B effect mode is a game mode in which an effect is mainly performed by adding a variation pattern or a notice regarding the character B, and as shown in FIG. 104 (b), an effect mode that can be executed according to the model content change condition. Etc. are changing.

As the model content change condition, a stepwise condition from condition 1 to condition 8 is set. For example, condition 1 is achieved by satisfying either that the number of big hits is 10 times, the number of notices is 6000 times, or the number of fluctuations is 3300 times in one business day. It is also achieved by the number of days of introduction, which is the number of days since the introduction of the gaming machine into the gaming store, is 7 days. When the condition 1 is achieved, for example, in the case of the character A effect mode, SP reach A2 is added and executed as a variation pattern of the feasible decorative special figure variation display game as shown in FIG. 104 (a). A change to character A special background 2 is added as a possible notice.

Further, when the condition 3 is achieved, SP2 reach A2 is added as an executable variation pattern of the decorative special figure variation display game, and a change to update the character B normal background by +1 is added as an executable notice. The change to be updated by +1 is a change in which a stage is set for the change in the background and the stage is advanced by one step. Further, before the achievement of the condition 3, the conditions 1 and 2 are naturally achieved, and the fluctuation pattern and the advance notice added by this are also in a feasible state. In this way, since the effect mode that can be newly selected is added to the effect mode that can be selected, the previous effect mode does not disappear and the effect of attracting customers is reduced. It can be prevented from being lost. In this way, since the selection range of the effect mode is changed based on the collected game parameters, the effect of attracting customers by the means of attracting customers who change the effect mode is not limited to a specific player, and can be effectively utilized. Become.

Further, in the case of the character A effect mode shown in FIG. 104 (a), only the character A effect type 1 mode can be set until the condition 4 is satisfied, but when the condition 4 is satisfied, the character can be set. A production type 2 mode is added. With the addition of this effect type, a plurality of effect types can be selected, and one of the character A effect type 1 mode and the character A effect type 2 mode can be selected by the effect selection operation by the player.

When the character A effect type 1 mode is selected, even if the condition 4 or later is achieved, the variation pattern or the advance notice added by achieving the condition 4 or later cannot be executed. Further, when the character A effect type 2 mode is selected, it is added by satisfying the model content change condition after the condition 4 in addition to the fluctuation pattern and the advance notice that can be executed in the character A effect type 1 mode. Fluctuation patterns and notices can also be executed by satisfying the corresponding model content change conditions.

The process for setting this selection is performed in the processes of steps C208 to C210 of the effect mode management process. Then, in the process (step C205) of setting the release state of the effect (information related to the release of the effect mode) based on various parameters, the effect type specified by the information indicating that the effect type is set is used. When the selection range of the production mode set by achieving the model content change condition by other parameters is wider than the selection range of the production mode, it is information indicating that the production type is set. Set the selection range of the effect mode in the specified effect type.

The character A effect mode and the character B effect mode differ in which of the characters A and B is prioritized in the order of the variation pattern to be added and the advance notice. Therefore, if all the model content change conditions are achieved, the feasible fluctuation patterns and notices will be the same. For this reason, by making it possible to select the state up to the stage where the predetermined model content change condition is achieved as one effect type, it is possible to return to the selection range of the previous effect mode by changing the effect type. Since it becomes possible to return to the state where the appearance frequency of the character selected by the player is high, the game can be performed according to the player's preference.

FIG. 105 shows an example of a table for selecting a notice during the first half fluctuation. In step C161 in the first half change notice lottery process, the first half notice group table 1 as shown in FIG. 105 (a) can be set. Then, when the background change notice is selected in the notice group lottery process (step C162), in the process of preparing the random number in the range corresponding to the effect mode opening related information and the lottery content (step C164), FIG. Random numbers to be used are prepared as shown in (c).

The range of the random number value is set according to the information related to the effect mode, and the range of the random number value is set so that only the judgment value of the selectable notice is included in the random number value. It has become. For example, in the case of the character A effect type, in the initial state where none of the model content change conditions are satisfied, a notice pattern for updating the character A normal background by +1 or +2 and a character as shown in FIG. 105 (b). 950 random numbers from 0 to 949 are set so as to include only the determination values of the notice pattern that changes to the special background 1 and the notice pattern that changes to the character A intense heat background 1. As a result, the determination values of the other notice patterns are not included in the random number values, so that only these four notice patterns are selected.

Further, when the condition 1 of the model content change condition is satisfied, the range of the random number value is set so as to include the judgment value of the notice pattern that changes to the character A special background 2 which is the added notice pattern. Will be. Then, each time the model content change condition is achieved, the range of the random number value changes so as to include the determination value of the added notice pattern. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as a random number generation means for generating a random number value for selecting the effect mode, and all determinations associated with the effect mode specified by the effect release information (effect mode release related information). It serves as a random number value setting means for setting a value as a random number value that can be generated by the random number generation means.

FIG. 106 shows the variation pattern of the decorative special figure variation display game added by the achievement of the model content change condition. It is set so that at least one fluctuation pattern can be selected for each fluctuation pattern command that can be received even in the initial state in which none of the model content change conditions are satisfied. As a result, it is not necessary to change the setting of the variation pattern in the game control device 100 even when the effect mode opening related information is changed to change the selectable effect mode. Therefore, the added variation pattern becomes an option when the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern is received.

When a plurality of fluctuation patterns can be selected for one fluctuation pattern command, a random number is selected from the selectable fluctuation patterns. As the random number value used at this time, the range of the random number value may be set based on the effect mode opening related information so as to include only the determination value of the selectable fluctuation pattern as in the case of the advance notice selection.

That is, in the effect mode selection means (effect control device 300), the effect mode setting means (effect control device 300) has a plurality of types of effect modes according to the content information set by the content information setting means (effect control device 300). It is a selectable effect mode set from the above, and one of the effect modes specified by the effect release information (effect mode release related information) is selected and executed as the effect mode of the game. There is. Further, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect mode changing means that enables the effect mode selection means to change the effect mode that can be selected based on the operation of the operation means (effect button 25).

FIG. 107 shows a display example relating to the change of the effect mode. As shown in FIG. 107 (a), when the condition 1 of the model content change condition is achieved based on the derivation of the special result mode, the notification that the hit is a big hit is notified as shown in FIG. 107 (b). In addition, a display indicating that condition 1 of the model content change condition has been achieved is displayed. Then, a notice and a fluctuation pattern are added from the special figure fluctuation display game after the end of the special gaming state.

Further, when the condition 1 of the model content change condition is satisfied based on the number of times the special figure variation display game is executed becomes a predetermined number of times, the special figure is that the condition is satisfied as shown in FIG. 107 (c). When the variable display game is executed and the result mode of the special figure variable display game is derived as shown in FIG. 107 (d), a display indicating that the condition 1 of the model content change condition is achieved is displayed. Then, a notice and a fluctuation pattern are added from the next special figure fluctuation display game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 107 (e), by operating the effect button 25 in the customer waiting state in which the special figure variation display game is not executed, various menus are displayed as shown in FIG. 107 (f). Menu selection screen is displayed. When the effect button 25 is operated while this menu screen is displayed to select an effect customization item and perform a determination operation, selectable effect types are displayed as shown in FIG. 107 (g). Here, when the player performs an effect selection operation, which is an operation of selecting an effect type and performing a determination operation, the effect mode release information corresponding to the effect type is set, and the selectable effects and notices are changed. It has become like.

The effect types displayed in FIG. 107 (g) are only those that can be selected by satisfying the model content change condition, and here, character A effect type 1 and character B effect type 2 can be selected. be. By achieving the model content change conditions? A selectable effect type is added to the portion displayed by, and here, the character A effect type 2 and the character B effect type 2 can be added.

The game parameters for changing the effect mode are not limited to the above settings. For example, although all the notices are counted as the total number of times the notices appear, only predetermined notices such as the notices that are likely to appear when the possibility of deriving the special result mode is high may be counted. Further, points may be set according to the type of notice, the points of the notice that appear may be counted, and the condition that the points become a predetermined value may be a condition for changing the model content. Further, the number of advance notices (such as the number of pseudo-reams) executed by the instruction from the game control device 100 may also be counted as the number of advance notices. You may do so. Further, in the case of a notice executed by the player operating the effect button 25, the number of notices may be counted only when the notice is executed. In this way, the player can be prompted to operate the effect button 25.

In addition, although all types of jackpots are counted as the total number of jackpots, it is also possible to count only the predetermined jackpot types, or the types of jackpots derived by setting points according to the types of jackpots. The points may be counted, and the condition that the points become a predetermined value may be a condition for changing the model content. The types of jackpots are the probabilistic jackpot that becomes a high probability state after the end of the special gaming state, the normal jackpot that becomes the normal probability state after the end of the special gaming state, and the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the special gaming state is less than usual and special. There are abrupt probabilities that become a high probability state after the end of the game state, a rush that becomes a normal probability state after the end of the special game state, and the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the special game state is smaller than usual. Further, a small hit that does not involve the operation of the condition device may be included. Further, the types of jackpots may be classified according to the number of rounds, the opening pattern of the special variable winning device, the probability state at the time of derivation, and the like.

Further, in FIGS. 104 and 105, the configuration for adding the background change notice during the first half change has been described, but other notices during the first half change and the notice during the second half change may also be added. Further, in FIGS. 104 to 106, the configuration of the first model has been described, but the configuration of the second model can be similarly configured. In this case, the model content change condition, the fluctuation pattern, and the distribution value of the notice pattern may be common or different between the first model and the second model. If the first model and the second model are common and only the fluctuation pattern and the content of the notice are different, the common control data can be used for setting the random number range and the storage capacity can be reduced.

In addition, the types of fluctuation patterns of SP3 reach A and SP3 reach 3, which are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only in the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of big hit in FIGS. 95 (d) and (h), are increased by achieving the model content change conditions. You may do so. This fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that deterministically notifies the jackpot, and by increasing this fluctuation pattern by increasing the total number of jackpots, it is also a privilege when the jackpot is generated multiple times in succession. Can be effectively produced.

From the above, a plurality of production modes are stored in a game machine capable of executing a game based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and executing a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a predetermined result. Possible effect mode storage means (effect control device 300), game parameter collecting means (effect control device 300) that collects game parameters that are information about the result of the progress of the game, and game parameters collected by the game parameter collecting means. Based on the above, the game is selected from the information setting means (effect control device 300) for setting the effect release information capable of specifying a predetermined effect mode from the plurality of effect modes, and the effect mode specified by the effect release information. The effect mode selection means (effect control device 300) for selecting and executing any of the effect modes is provided.

Here, as the effect mode, the execution mode (variation pattern) of the decorative game executed corresponding to the game, the display of characters and the like in the game, the operation mode of the accessory, the sound emission mode of the sound, the LED and the like, and the background. , Waiting for customers images, etc. are included.

A conventional gaming machine has been proposed to have a function of identifying a player using a mobile terminal and customizing the image and sound of the gaming machine for each individual player, and using this as a means of attracting customers ( For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-231921). However, there is a problem that the means for attracting customers cannot be effectively used for a player who finds it troublesome to make various settings using a mobile terminal or a player who does not have a mobile terminal. .. However, by providing the above configuration, the selection range of the effect mode is changed based on the collected game parameters, so that the effect of attracting customers by the means of attracting customers is not limited to a specific player and can be effectively utilized. It becomes.

In addition, an operation means (effect button 25) that can be operated by the player, and an effect mode changing means (effect mode changing means) that allows the effect mode selection means (effect control device 300) to change the effect mode that can be selected based on the operation of the operation means. The effect mode specified by the effect release information including the effect control device 300) includes all the effect modes specified by the effect release information set before the change to the current effect release information. The mode changing means can change the effect mode that can be selected by the effect mode selection means in units of the effect mode specified by each effect release information set before the change to the current effect release information. ..

Therefore, it is possible to change the selection range of the feasible production mode to the one preferred by the player. In addition, since the effect mode that can be selected is changed so that a new selectable effect mode is added, the previous effect mode does not disappear and the effect of attracting customers is reduced. Can be prevented. In addition, since it is possible to return to the selection range of the previous production mode, it is possible to perform the production according to the player's preference.

Further, the variation pattern setting means (game control device 100) for setting the variation pattern, which is the execution mode of the game, is provided, and the effect mode selection means (effect control device 300) is the variation set by the variation pattern setting means. The effect mode corresponding to the pattern is selected and executed as the effect mode of the game, and the effect mode specified by the effect release information includes each of all the variation patterns that can be set by the variation pattern setting means. Therefore, the effect mode is included so that the effect mode selection means can select at least one effect mode. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the setting of the variation pattern even when the effect release information is changed to change the selectable effect mode.

Further, a random number generation means (effect control device 300) for generating a random number value for selecting the effect mode is provided, and a determination value is provided for each of the plurality of effect modes stored in the effect mode storage means (effect control device 300). Is associated with the effect mode selection means (effect control device 300), when the effect mode is selected, the random number generation means generates a random number value, and the effect mode of the determination value corresponding to the random number value is displayed in the game. Random number value setting means (effect control device) that is configured to be selected as the effect mode of the above and sets all the determination values associated with the effect mode specified by the effect release information as random numbers that can be generated by the random number generation means. 300) will be provided. Therefore, since the range of random values to be used is changed, it is not necessary to prepare a determination value table corresponding to each effect release information.

[Backup command processing]
FIG. 108 shows a backup command process (step C127) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process. In this backup command process, first, it is determined whether continuous data is being received based on the presence or absence of the continuous data receiving flag (step C221). When continuous data is being received (step C221; Y), the command data value is saved in a predetermined area of the backup RAM (FeRAM323) specified by the command. The continuous data is data transmitted from the factory data setting device 150. When transmitting this continuous data, a command indicating the type of data value is transmitted so that the effect control device 300 can grasp the type of data to be transmitted, and the command is sent to a predetermined address of FeRAM 323 in response to the command. It is designed to write data values. The write destination address and data length may be included in the continuous data.

Then, it is determined whether the reception of all the data is completed (step C222), and if it is not completed (step C222; N), the backup command processing is terminated. When completed (step C222; Y), the continuous data receiving flag is cleared (step C223), and the backup command process is terminated. The process of writing the continuous data from the factory data setting device 150 to the FeRAM 323 is performed regardless of whether or not the data has already been written to the FeRAM 323. That is, the data from the factory data setting device 150 is forcibly written to the FeRAM 323.

On the other hand, when continuous data is not being received (step C221; N), it is determined whether the ACT is within the range of the default setting (step C225). When the ACT is within the range of the default setting (step C225; Y), it is determined whether the data specified by the command has already been set in the backup RAM (FeRAM323) (step C226). In this process, it is determined whether or not the information corresponding to the specifications specified by the command is stored in the FeRAM 323 by referring to the type information stored in the model information storage unit 323c2 of the FeRAM 323.

The spec is a setting in the game control device 100 such as a probability value of a big hit and distribution of a fluctuation pattern. The game control device 100 transmits a command for specifying specifications (spec specification command) when the power is turned on to the effect control device 300, and initializes the control data stored in the FeRAM 323 to control data matching the specifications. Instruct. That is, the spec specification command performs a predetermined initialization instruction command, and the CPU 311 serves as a command determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined initialization instruction command has been received.

When the data specified by the command has already been set in the backup RAM (FeRAM323) (step C226; Y), the backup command processing is terminated. In this case, control data that matches the specifications has already been written and initialization is not required. By ending the backup command processing, unnecessary processing of writing the same control data to FeRAM 323 can be reduced. If the data specified by the command is not already set in the backup RAM (FeRAM 323) (step C226; N), the process of writing the data corresponding to the backup RAM (FeRAM 323) from the PROM 321 is performed.

As this process, a default setting value table corresponding to the command is set (step C227), and the initial value is saved in a predetermined area of the backup RAM based on the data in the table (step C228). After that, the type information of the data set as the initial value is saved (step C229), and the backup command processing is terminated.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 109 (a), the data stored in the PROM 321 is read out and written to the FeRAM 323. Of the data stored in the control information storage unit, distribution information initial value storage unit 321b, and history information initial value storage unit 321c of the PROM 321, which data value is written to which address is the default setting value stored in the FROM 321. It is specified in the table. The CPU 311 is adapted to read and write necessary data by referring to the default setting value table corresponding to the command from the game control device 100.

For example, the CPU 311 writes the fluctuation pattern control information stored in the control information storage unit 321a of the PROM 321 to the fluctuation pattern control information storage unit 323a1 of the FeRAM 323. Further, the CPU 311 writes the variation pattern selection table stored in the distribution information initial value storage unit 321b of the PROM 321 to the variation pattern distribution information storage unit 323b1 of the FeRAM 323. As a result, the FeRAM 323 is initialized, and it is possible to prevent malfunction due to old control data stored in the FeRAM 323. Further, the type information may be different for each specification, and in addition to the numerical value set arbitrarily, for example, a table number, a checksum value of the program, or the like can be used. That is, the CPU 311 serves as an initialization means for setting and initializing the control data stored in the non-volatile ROM (PROM 321) in the control data stored in the non-volatile RAM (FeRAM 323).

It should be noted that such initialization processing is mainly performed when the power is turned on for the first time when the effect control device 300 is replaced in the reuse work of the game machine in the factory, or in the game machine to which a new effect control device 300 is attached. It is done when the power is turned on. Then, after this initialization, the data is written by the factory data setting device 150, and the gaming machine is shipped.

Returning to FIG. 108, when ACT is not in the range of the default setting (step C225; N), it is determined whether ACT is in the range of continuous data writing (step C230). If the ACT is not within the default setting continuous data writing range (step C230; N), the backup command processing is terminated. If the ACT is within the range of continuous data writing (step C230; Y), the continuous data receiving flag is set (step C231), and the backup command process is terminated. As a result, the processes of steps C221 to C224 are performed. That is, the ACT is a command that is a trigger when a command within the range of continuous data writing continuously receives data of an indefinite size such as a data table.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 109 (b), the data stored in the factory data setting device 150 is read out and written to the FeRAM 323. For example, the CPU 311 writes the variation pattern selection table output from the distribution information setting unit 151 of the factory data setting device 150 to the variation pattern distribution information storage unit 323b1 of the FeRAM 323. Further, the CPU 311 writes the information output from the history information setting unit 152 of the factory data setting device 150 to the history information storage unit 323c of the FeRAM 323. As a result, the information of FeRAM323 will be updated. The type information is not changed by writing this data.

That is, the CPU 311 serves as a control data writing means capable of writing control data relating to a plurality of production modes to the non-volatile RAM (FeRAM 323). By making the control data stored in the FeRAM 323 rewritable, it is possible to prevent malfunction due to the old control data stored and held in the FeRAM 323. It is also possible to change the effect mode by updating the variation pattern selection table.

FIG. 110A shows an example of a command that the game control device 100 can transmit to the effect control device 300. The power-on command is a command transmitted when the RAM 111C is initialized, and the power failure recovery command is a command transmitted when the RAM 111C is not initialized. Further, the spec designation A to C commands are spec designation commands for designating the specs for the effect control device 300, and are also initialization instruction commands for instructing the control data to be initialized to match the specs. In the game control device 100 of the present embodiment, only the spec-designated A command is used, and the spec-designated B and C commands are not used.

Upon receiving this spec specification A command, the effect control device 300 determines that MODE is within the range of the backup command (step C126; Y), and ACT is within the range of the default setting (step C225; Y). It is determined that the process is performed from step C226 to step C229. If the spec specification B and C commands are received, the ACT determines that the command is not within the default setting range (step C225; N), and the processes from step C226 to step C229 are not performed.

That is, it is determined whether or not a predetermined initialization instruction command (spec specification A command) has been received among the initialization instruction commands (spec specification commands), and a predetermined initialization instruction command (spec specification A command) has been received. Initialization is possible only when this is done. The control program and control data corresponding to each of the spec specification A command, the spec specification B command, and the spec specification C command may be stored in the PROM 321, and the FeRAM 323 may be initialized by the data corresponding to the command. ..

FIG. 110B shows an example of a command that the factory data setting device 150 can transmit to the effect control device 300. The power-on command is the same as the command transmitted by the game control device 100, so that the effect control device 300 performs a process related to power-on. In addition, the data write command is a command that triggers the continuous reception of data of an indefinite size such as a data table.

Upon receiving this command, the effect control device 300 determines that MODE is within the range of the backup command (step C126; Y), and ACT is within the range of continuous data writing (step C230; Y). And set the continuous data receiving flag (step C231). As a result, the processes of steps C221 to C224 are performed. Further, the fluctuation pattern selection table command and the first half notice group table command are commands indicating the types of data values to be transmitted, and this command makes it possible to grasp the types of data sent by the effect control device 300.

FIG. 111 shows an example of updating information by the factory data setting device 150. Before updating the information, the variation pattern selection table as shown in FIG. 111A is stored in the FeRAM 323 (variation pattern selection table corresponding to the specification A). By writing a new variation pattern selection table by the factory data setting device 150 from this state, the variation pattern selection table of FeRAM 323 is updated (variation pattern selection table corresponding to the specification B). Here, the judgment value distribution number (selection probability) in the fluctuation pattern selection table is changed. The content to be updated can be updated for other items, and for example, the fluctuation pattern to be selected can be changed. In this way, it is possible to execute a new effect mode simply by rewriting the variation pattern selection table stored in the FeRAM 323. Therefore, it is possible to reuse the control device of the gaming machine to make a gaming machine of a different type (spec).

[Single-shot command processing]
FIG. 112 shows a one-shot command process (step C123) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process. In this one-shot command process, first, MODE determines whether it is a customer waiting demo (step C241). Then, when the MODE determines that the demo is a customer waiting demo (step C241; Y), the customer waiting demo command processing (step C242) for performing processing related to the start of the customer waiting state is performed, and the single-shot command processing is performed. finish. Further, when it is determined that the MODE is not a customer waiting demo (step C241; N), it is determined whether the MODE is in the range of the reserved system (step C243).

When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the hold system (step C243; Y), the hold command process (step C244) for storing the information related to the hold is performed, and the single-shot command process is terminated. Further, when it is determined that the MODE is not in the range of the reserved system (step C243; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a power failure recovery (step C245).

When the MODE determines that the power failure has been restored (step C245; Y), the power failure recovery command process (step C246) for performing the process related to the power failure recovery is performed, and the single-shot command process is terminated. Further, when it is determined that the MODE is not a power failure recovery (step C245; N), it is determined whether the MODE is the RAM initialization (step C247).

When the MODE determines that the RAM is initialized (step C247; Y), the RAM initialization command process (step C248) is performed to perform the process corresponding to the power-on accompanied by the RAM initialization in the game control device 100. And end the one-shot command processing. If it is determined that the MODE is not RAM initialization (step C247; N), it is determined whether the MODE is within the range of the probability information system (step C249).

When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the probability information system (step C249; Y), the probability information command process (step C250) for performing processing such as setting the effect corresponding to the probability state is performed, and the single-shot system is performed. End command processing. Further, when it is determined that the MODE is not in the range of the probability information system (step C249; N), it is determined whether the MODE is in the range of the error system (step C251).

When the MODE determines that the range is within the error system range (step C251; Y), the error command processing (step C252) for performing processing such as error notification is performed, and the single-shot system command processing is terminated. When it is determined that the MODE is not in the error system range (step C251; N), it is determined whether the MODE is in the RTC system range (step C253).

When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the RTC system (step C253; Y), the RTC command processing (step C254) for performing processing such as RTC setting is performed, and the single-shot system command processing is terminated. Further, when it is determined that the MODE is not in the range of the RTC system (step C253; N), the single-shot system command processing is terminated.

[RTC command processing]
FIG. 113 shows the RTC command processing (step C254) in the above-mentioned single-shot command processing. The RTC-type command is a command output when the factory data setting device 150 transmits information about the RTC. In this RTC command processing, first, it is determined whether MODE is initialization (step C261). Then, when it is determined that the MODE is initialization (step C261; Y), the RTC initialization process (step C262) for initializing the RTC is performed, and the RTC command process is terminated. If it is determined that the MODE is not initialization (step C261; N), it is determined whether the MODE is date and time information (step C263).

When the MODE determines that the date and time information is used (step C263; Y), the RTC date and time information setting process (step C264) for setting the date and time information in the RTC is performed, and the RTC command process is terminated. This makes it possible to correct the date and time of the RTC. Further, when it is determined that the MODE is not the date and time information (step C263; N), it is determined whether the MODE is the model switching date and time information (step C265).

When it is determined that the MODE is the model switching date / time information (step C265; Y), a storage area for the model switching date / time information corresponding to the ACT is set (step C266), and the model switching date / time indicated by the ACT is set in the storage area. The information is saved (step C267), and the RTC command processing is terminated. This makes it possible to adjust the date and time when the model is changed. Further, when it is determined that the MODE is not the model switching date / time information (step C265; N), the RTC command processing is terminated.

In this way, by using the factory data setting device 150, it is possible to change not only the fluctuation pattern selection table but also various data. It is also possible to provide the factory data setting device 150 with a function of inspecting the effect control device 300.

From the above, the non-volatile ROM (PROM321) that stores the control program and control data related to the effect control of the game, and the stored contents can be retained even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure, and is related to the effect control of the game. A non-volatile RAM (FeRAM 323) that can store control data, a control program and control data stored in the non-volatile ROM, and a calculation that controls related to the production control of the game according to the control data stored in the non-volatile RAM. A processing means (CPU311) is provided, the arithmetic processing means is provided with a control data writing means (CPU311) capable of writing control data relating to a plurality of production modes to a non-volatile RAM, and the control data writing means is provided with a plurality of control data writing means. When new control data related to the effect mode is received, even if the control data related to the plurality of effect modes is stored in the non-volatile RAM, the new control data related to the plurality of effect modes is written to the non-volatile RAM. Will be there.

Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that stores control data in game control in a RAM and performs game control based on the control data stored in the RAM (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-925 [0033]). In a conventional gaming machine, it is conceivable to back up the RAM, but if the control program is changed, there is a risk that the control data stored in the RAM and the control program will not correspond and will malfunction. be. However, according to the above configuration, since the control data stored in the non-volatile RAM can be rewritten, it is possible to prevent malfunction due to the control data stored and held in the non-volatile RAM.

Further, as a game, a variable pattern setting means (game control device 100) is configured to execute a variable display game that variablely displays a plurality of identification information, and sets a variable pattern, which is an execution mode of the variable display game, from among a plurality of variable display games. ) And the effect mode selection means for selecting the effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern set by the variation pattern setting means from a plurality of effect modes with reference to the variation pattern selection table defining the effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern. (Effect control device 300), the non-volatile RAM (FeRAM323) stores the variation pattern selection table as control data relating to a plurality of effect modes, and the control data writing means (CPU311) has a plurality of effect modes. As control data related to, the variation pattern selection table is written to the non-volatile RAM.

Therefore, it is possible to execute a new effect mode only by rewriting the variation pattern selection table stored in the non-volatile RAM. Therefore, it is possible to reuse the control device of the gaming machine to make a gaming machine of a different type (spec). Here, as the effect mode, the execution mode (variation pattern) of the decorative game executed corresponding to the variable display game, the display of characters and the like in the variable display game, the operation mode of the accessory, the voice, the LED, and the like are used. Light emission mode, background, etc. are included.

Further, the control data writing means (CPU311) can write a variation pattern selection table in which the selection ratio of the effect mode to the selected variation pattern is different as the variation pattern selection table to be written in the non-volatile RAM (FeRAM323). Become. Therefore, it is possible to execute a new effect mode only by rewriting the variation pattern selection table stored in the non-volatile RAM. Therefore, it is possible to reuse the control device of the gaming machine to make a gaming machine of a different type (spec).

Further, the non-volatile ROM (PROM321) that stores the control program and control data related to the effect control of the game, and the stored contents can be retained even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure, and the control data related to the effect control of the game can be stored. A storable non-volatile RAM (FeRAM 323), a control program and control data stored in the non-volatile ROM, and an arithmetic processing means for performing control related to the effect control of the game according to the control data stored in the non-volatile RAM (FeRAM 323). CPU311), and the arithmetic processing means is stored in the non-volatile ROM in the command determination means (CPU311) for determining whether a predetermined initialization instruction command has been received, and the control data stored in the non-volatile RAM. An initialization means (CPU311) for setting and initializing control data is provided, and the initialization means is set in the non-volatile RAM when it is determined by the command determination means that a predetermined initialization instruction command has been received. It is possible to initialize the stored control data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent malfunction due to the control data stored in the non-volatile RAM.

Further, the initialization means (CPU 311) writes control data relating to a plurality of production modes stored in the non-volatile ROM (PROM 321) to the non-volatile RAM (FeRAM 323), and the game machine corresponding to the written control data. When the type information indicating the type is configured to be written to the non-volatile RAM and the type information stored in the non-volatile RAM matches the type information corresponding to the control data written by the initialization means, the command determination means Even if it is determined by (CPU311) that a predetermined initialization instruction command has been received, the control data stored in the non-volatile RAM is not initialized. Therefore, it is possible to reduce unnecessary processing of writing the same control data to the non-volatile RAM.

Further, the arithmetic processing means (CPU311) includes a control data writing means (CPU311) capable of writing control data relating to a plurality of effect modes to the non-volatile RAM (FeRAM 323), and the control data writing means has a plurality of effect modes. When new control data related to is received, even if the control data related to the plurality of effect modes is stored in the non-volatile RAM, the new control data related to the plurality of effect modes is written to the non-volatile RAM. It becomes.

Therefore, since the control data stored in the non-volatile RAM can be rewritten, it is possible to prevent malfunction due to the control data stored and held in the non-volatile RAM. Further, it is possible to execute a new effect mode only by rewriting the control data stored in the non-volatile RAM. Therefore, it is possible to reuse the control device of the gaming machine to make a gaming machine of a different type (spec).

Further, the game control means (game control device 100) for comprehensively controlling the game and the effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect mode based on the control information from the game control means are provided. The game control means includes a first connection connector (command transmission connector 141) provided for transmitting control information to the effect control means, and the effect control means receives control information transmitted from the game control means. A second connector (command receiving connector 328) provided for this purpose is provided, and the first connector and the second connector are configured to be connectable, and at least the shape of the first connector is non-volatile. It is configured to have the same shape as the third connection connector (command transmission connector 153) included in the setting device (factory data setting device 150) for storing control data that can be output to the sex RAM. Therefore, the data of the effect mode storage means can be changed even when the effect control means is enclosed in the case, and the setting can be easily changed even before shipment or in the case of reuse.

[First modification]
Next, the gaming machine of the first modification will be described. It should be noted that basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and the same reference numerals are given to the same configuration, and the description thereof will be omitted. The gaming machine of this modification is different in the initialization process of FeRAM323.

In the gaming machine of this modification, the main process shown in FIG. 114 is performed instead of the main process shown in FIG. 89. In this main process, when the ID data (unique information) in the control ROM (PROM321) and the backup ID data (unique information) stored in FeRAM323 do not match (step C9; N), the backup RAM (FeRAM323) Instead of the process of clearing all the contents of, the process of clearing the contents of the backup RAM excluding the hall setting value data, the effect mode release related information, and the model switching setting information (step C281) is performed.

As a result, even if the FeRAM 323 is initialized, the hall setting value data, the effect mode release related information, and the model switching setting information are not initialized, and only the control data necessary for preventing malfunction can be initialized. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need to reset the hall setting value data and the model switching setting information. In addition, it is possible to prevent the selection range of the effect set by the game results so far from returning to the initial state and deteriorating the interest of the player. When initializing the FeRAM 323, the data to be left without being initialized may be selected by the operation of the operating means.

From the above, the non-volatile ROM (PROM321) stores a plurality of effect modes as control data, and the arithmetic processing means (CPU311) can specify a predetermined effect mode from the plurality of effect modes. Is selected as the effect mode of the game from the information setting means (CPU311) that is set every time a predetermined condition is satisfied and stored in the non-volatile RAM (FeRAM323) and the effect mode specified by the effect release information. It is determined by the determination means (CPU311) that the unique information stored in the non-volatile ROM and the unique information stored in the non-volatile RAM do not match. In this case, the control data and the unique information are initialized by the initialization means (CPU311), while the effect release information (effect mode release-related information) is retained without being initialized.

Even if the unique information stored in the non-volatile ROM and the unique information stored in the non-volatile RAM do not match, the effect release information stored in the RAM is retained so that the effect release information is initially set. It is possible to prevent the player's interest from being reduced by returning the selection range of the effect to the initial state.

[Second modification]
Next, the gaming machine of the second modification will be described. It should be noted that basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and the same reference numerals are given to the same configuration, and the description thereof will be omitted. The gaming machine of this modified example allows the switching of models to be used as an effect.

[Big hit command processing]
FIG. 115 shows the jackpot command process (step C119) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process. In this jackpot command process, first, it is determined whether MODE is a fanfare (step C291). When the MODE is a fanfare (step C291; Y), the jackpot start screen information is set (step C292), and the look-ahead information corresponding to the reserved start memory is acquired (step C293). It is determined whether the look-ahead information includes jackpot information (step C294).

If there is no jackpot information in the acquired look-ahead information (step C294; N), that is, if all the special figure fluctuation display games based on the current start memory are out of order, the jackpot command processing is terminated. Further, when the acquired look-ahead information includes jackpot information (step C294; N), that is, when a special result is derived in the special figure variation display game based on the current start memory, the special result is continuous in a short period of time. The continuous change flag indicating that the occurrence is set is set (step C295).

After that, the value of the model content setting area is acquired (step C296), and it is determined whether the model content information is 1 (step C297). When the model content information is 1 (step C297; Y), the sound information setting value is set to 2 (step S298), and the jackpot command processing is terminated. If the model content information is not 1 (2) (step C297; N), the sound information setting value is set to 1 (step S299), and the jackpot command processing is terminated. As a result, when the start memory existing at the time of the occurrence of the special gaming state has a start memory having a special result, the voice in the special gaming state becomes the voice of a model different from the current model. That is, it is possible to notify the player of the existence of the starting memory which is a special result by the change of the voice.

If the MODE is not a fanfare (step C291; N), it is determined whether the MODE is an interval (step C300). Then, when the MODE is an interval (step C300; Y), the round number display information is updated (step C301), and the jackpot command processing is terminated. If the MODE is not an interval (step C300; N), it is determined whether the MODE is the ending (step C302).

If MODE is not the ending (step C302; N), the jackpot command processing is terminated. When the MODE is the ending (step C302; Y), the screen information corresponding to the game state after the end of the big hit is set (step C303). For example, when the high probability state is reached after the end of the special gaming state, screen information for notifying that the high probability state is reached is set.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is a continuous change flag (step C304), and if there is no continuous change flag (step C304; N), the jackpot command processing is terminated. If there is a continuous change flag (step C304; Y), the continuous change flag is cleared (step C305), a random number for determining model switching is acquired (step C306), and the acquired random number for determining model switching is the model. It is determined whether it is a switching value (step C307).

When the acquired random number for determining model switching is the model switching value (step C307; Y), the value set in the sound information is set in the model content setting area (step C308), and the jackpot command process is terminated. As a result, the model can be switched to a model different from the model set before the occurrence of the special gaming state. If the acquired random number for determining model switching is not the model switching value (step C307; N), the value set in the model content setting area is set in the sound information (step C309), and the jackpot command processing is terminated. .. As a result, the model that was set before the occurrence of the special gaming state is maintained, and the sound is also returned to that of the model. That is, if the starting memory existing at the time of the occurrence of the special gaming state has a starting memory having a special result, the voice in the special gaming state is regarded as the voice of a model different from the current model, but with a predetermined probability. The model after the end of the special gaming state can be switched to the model that uses the voice in the special gaming state.

[Model switching process]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the model switching process shown in FIG. 116 is performed instead of the model switching process shown in FIG. 92. In this model switching process, first, it is determined whether the date and time have been confirmed based on the presence or absence of the switching date and time confirmed flag (step C72). If the date and time have been confirmed (step C72; Y), the model switching process is terminated. If the date and time have not been confirmed (step C72; N), the switching date and time confirmed flag is set (step C73). The switching date / time confirmed flag is a process (step C7) in which the initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized in the main process so that the switching date / time is confirmed only once after the power of the gaming machine is turned on. It is cleared by saving the initial value.

Next, it is determined whether or not the model switching date and time is set (step C74), and if the model switching date and time is not set (step C74; N), the model switching process is terminated. When the model switching date and time is set (step C74; Y), the date and time information is read from the RTC (step C75), and the model switching date and time information is acquired (step C311).

Then, the value of the model content setting area is acquired (step C312), and it is checked whether the model content information set in the model content setting area and the model switching date / time information match (step C313). As described above, the model may be switched in the wake of the special gaming state, and it is determined by this switching whether the currently set model is the model set based on the model switching date and time information.

If the model content setting area and the model content information set in the model switching date / time information match (step C314; Y), it is not necessary to switch the model here, so the model switching process ends. If the model content setting area and the model content information set in the model switching date / time information do not match (step C314; N), various settings for switching to the model content corresponding to the model switching date / time information are made (step C315). ), End the model switching process.

That is, it is possible to switch the model based on the model switching date and time information, and the model based on the model switching date and time information is set when the power is turned on. Here, if it is before the date and time specified in the model switching date and time information, the first model is set at the time of turning on the power, and if it is before the date and time specified in the model switching date and time information, the second model is set at the time of turning on the power. The model is set. By setting the model based on the model switching date and time information at the time of turning on the power in this way, the effect of attracting customers by switching the model based on the model switching date and time information can be maintained even if the effect is performed by switching the model.

FIG. 117 shows changes in the set values of the content information and the model switching setting information of each effect mode when the starting memory existing at the time of occurrence of the special gaming state has a starting memory having a special result. FIG. 117 (a) is an example in which the model is changed after the end of the special gaming state. Before the occurrence of the special gaming state, 1 is set as the model content information and the first model is set, and the setting value of the model switching setting information of each production mode is also set to 1 corresponding to the first model. ing.

When the special result is derived and the special gaming state is started (t1), the set value of the sound information is changed to 2 corresponding to the second model different from the first model. As a result, only the voice is changed to the voice of the second model during the special game state, and the player can recognize that there is a start memory having a special result during the start memory. After that, when the special game state ends (t2), 2 corresponding to the second model set in the sound information is set as the setting value of the model content information and the model switching setting information of each production mode. The model will be the second model.

The set values of the model content information and the model switching setting information of each production mode are stored in the FeRAM 323, and the information is maintained even if the power of the gaming machine is turned off (t3 to t4). Then, when the power is turned on (t4), the model is set based on the model switching date and time information. Here, since it is the period for setting the first model, the setting values of the model content information and the model switching setting information of each production mode are changed to 1 corresponding to the first model.

FIG. 117 (b) is an example in which the model is not changed after the end of the special gaming state. It is the same as FIG. 117 (a) until the end of the special gaming state. Then, when the special gaming state ends (t12), the set value of the sound information is returned to 1 corresponding to the first model, and the first model is used even after the end of the special gaming state.

In this state, the power of the gaming machine is cut off (t13), and in the model setting based on the model switching date and time information at the time of turning on the power (t14), here is the period for setting the first model. The set value of the content information and the model switching setting information of each production mode is maintained as 1 corresponding to the first model. In this way, by making it possible to switch models in addition to switching based on the model switching date and time information, it is possible to perform effective production on a gaming machine in which a plurality of types of models can be set.

From the above, when the game is executed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined conditions and the result of the game is a special result, the game is directed in a game machine capable of executing a special gaming state advantageous to the player. A content information setting means (effect control device 300) that can set any of a plurality of specified content information, and an effect mode storage means (effect control device 300) that stores a plurality of types of effect modes as the effect mode of the game. ), And an effect mode setting means (effect control device 300) for setting an effect mode that can be selected from a plurality of types of effect modes according to the content information set by the content information setting means. Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the setting means can execute an effect mode that does not correspond to the set content information.

Further, a start winning memory means for extracting a predetermined random number based on winning a prize in the starting opening (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) and storing up to a predetermined number as starting storage which is the right to execute the variable display game. (Game control device 100) and a pre-determination means for determining a random number stored as a start memory in the start winning prize storage means (game control device 100) before the execution of the variation display game based on the start memory. The predetermined condition is that the start memory stored when the special result is derived is determined by the pre-determination means to have a start memory having a special result.

Further, the content information setting means (effect control device 300) performs the effect mode setting means (effect control device 300) that does not correspond to the set content information in the special game state. As the content information after the end of the above, the content information corresponding to the executed production mode can be set.

Further, a timekeeping means (effect control device 300) capable of generating information indicating the current date and time is provided, and the content information setting means (effect control device 300) is a timekeeping means at the time of turning on the power regardless of the set content information. Content information will be set based on the information indicated by.

[Third modification example]
Next, the gaming machine of the third modification will be described. It should be noted that basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and the same reference numerals are given to the same configuration, and the description thereof will be omitted. The gaming machine of this modification includes the date and time in the model content change condition.

[Production mode management process]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the effect mode management process shown in FIG. 118 is performed instead of the effect mode management process shown in FIG. 103. In this effect mode management process, after the processes of steps C201 to C210 are performed, the date and time information of the RTC is read out (step C321), and it is determined whether or not the specific release period is reached (step C322). Then, in the case of the specific release period (step C322; Y), the release state corresponding to the date and time information is set (step C323).

FIG. 119 shows the conditions for changing the information related to the release of the effect mode. In the gaming machine of this modification, business hours are included in the model content change condition, and in the case of the character A production mode shown in FIG. 119 (a), the time forms a specific release period from 10:00 to 11:00, 14 In the case of time to 15:00 and 18:00 to 19:00, a change pattern or a notice that can be executed is set assuming that condition 5 of the model content change condition is achieved.

Further, in the case of the character B effect mode shown in FIG. 119 (b), when the time is from 10:00 to 11:00, 14:00 to 15:00, and 18:00 to 19:00, which form a specific release period, the model content is changed. It is assumed that the condition 6 of the condition has been achieved, and a feasible fluctuation pattern and a notice are set. By doing so, the fluctuation pattern and the notice can be different depending on the time, and it can be an effective means of attracting customers. In addition, if fluctuation patterns and notices are added based on the number of days since the introduction, various fluctuation patterns and notices can be shown even if the number of days since the introduction has not passed, and the effect of attracting customers at the beginning of the introduction can be enhanced. Can be done.

If the conditions above the model content change conditions that are said to have been achieved during the specified release period have already been achieved, the feasible fluctuation patterns and notices will not change even during the specified release period. In addition, after the end of the specified release period, the feasible fluctuation patterns and notices return to the state before the start of the specified release period, but if the model content change condition is newly achieved by the game during the specified release period, the relevant Feasible fluctuation patterns and notices are set according to the achieved conditions.

In addition, the player may be able to select whether to add a fluctuation pattern or a notice during the specific release period. In addition, a plurality of types may be provided in the specific release period, and the fluctuation patterns and notices added may differ depending on the types. For example, a morning period, a daytime period, an evening period, and a night period may be set in the specific release period, and fluctuation patterns and notices added in each period may be set individually. Furthermore, in the night period, it may be possible to select the addition of fluctuation patterns and notices that are added in other periods. Further, it is not assumed that the predetermined model content change condition is achieved in the specific release period, but a fluctuation pattern or a notice that can be executed only in the specific release period may be set.

The game machine 10 as described above is a game machine capable of executing a game based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and executing a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a predetermined result. A content information setting means (effect control device 300) capable of setting any of a plurality of content information defining the effect mode of the game, and an effect mode storage means for storing a plurality of types of effect modes as the effect mode of the game. (Effect control device 300), an effect mode setting means (effect control device 300) that sets an effect mode that can be selected from a plurality of types of effect modes according to the content information set by the content information setting means. A timing means (effect control device 300) capable of generating information indicating the current date and time, an effect mode change storage means (effect control device 300) capable of storing information indicating the date and time for changing the content information, a timing means, and a timing means. It is determined that the content information is changed by the content information change determination means (effect control device 300) for determining whether or not to change the content information and the content information change determination means based on the information indicated by the effect storage mode change storage means. In this case, the content information changing means (effect control device 300) for changing the set content information to different content information is provided.

Here, as the production mode of the game, the execution mode (variation pattern) of the decorative game executed corresponding to the game, the display of the character or the like in the game, the operation mode of the accessory, the sound emission mode of the voice, the LED, etc. , Background, waiting image for customers, etc. are included.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress the effect of attracting customers from diminishing with the passage of time and to generate new means of attracting customers.

Further, the effect mode setting means (game control device 100) for setting the variation pattern, which is the execution mode of the game, and the effect mode setting means (game control device 100) corresponding to the variation pattern set by the variation pattern setting means. The effect mode selecting means (effect control device 300) for selecting from a plurality of effect modes set by the effect control device 300) is provided, and the effect mode setting means can be set according to the content information. As a result, the effect mode is set so that at least one effect mode can be selected for each of all the variation patterns that can be set by the variation pattern setting means.

Therefore, it is not necessary to change the setting of the fluctuation pattern even when the content information is changed to change the selectable effect mode.

Further, the display device 41 for displaying the game is provided, and the game is a variable display game in which a plurality of identification information is variablely displayed and then the identification information according to the result is stopped and displayed, and the content information setting means (effect control device 300). The predetermined identification information is defaulted from the identification information setting means (effect control device 300) that sets a plurality of identification information according to the content information set by the identification information setting means and the plurality of identification information set by the identification information setting means. The information display means includes an information display means (effect control device 300) to be displayed on the display device 41 when the power is turned on as the identification information, and the information display means defaults the identification information corresponding to the content information set in the content information setting means. It is displayed as.

Therefore, the set content information can be confirmed by confirming the default identification information displayed when the power is turned on.

Further, the game control means (game control device 100) for comprehensively controlling the game and the effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect mode based on the control information from the game control means are provided. The game control means includes a first connection connector (command transmission connector 141) provided for transmitting control information to the effect control means, and the effect control means includes an effect mode storage unit (effect control device 300). A second connection connector (command receiving connector 328) provided for receiving control information transmitted from the game control means is provided, and the first connection connector and the second connection connector are configured to be connectable. A third connection connector (command transmission connector 153) included in a setting device (factory data setting device 150) for storing a plurality of types of effect modes capable of outputting at least the shape of the first connection connector to the effect mode storage means. ) Has the same shape.

Therefore, the data of the effect mode storage means can be changed even when the effect control means is enclosed in the case, and the setting can be easily changed even before shipment or in the case of reuse.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the gaming machine of the second embodiment will be described. It should be noted that basically, the machine has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and the description is mainly different. The part will be explained.

FIG. 120 shows a front view of the gaming board 30 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the effect operation device 900 forming the board effect device 44 is provided at the lower part of the center case 40. As will be described later, the effect operating device 900 includes a rotating member 910 provided with a square cylindrical rotating member main body 920, and a drive source (stepping motor 955) for operating the rotating member 910, and has an axis along the left-right direction. By rotating around the rotation member 910, the side surface of the rotating member 910 that can be visually recognized by the player can be changed.

Below the center case 40, the first start winning opening 36 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives the start condition of the special figure 1 variable display game and the second starting winning opening that gives the starting condition of the special figure 2 variable display game. A winning device 98 having a mouth 97 (starting winning mouth, starting winning area) is provided. The winning device 98 is provided with a distribution mechanism for internally distributing the game balls flowing into the upper inflow port 99 into the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 97 alternately. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a, and the game ball that has won the second starting winning opening 97 is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 37a. It should be noted that the game ball flowing into the inflow port 99 may always win a prize in any of the starting winning openings, or may be discharged to the outside of the winning device 98 without winning. ..

The normal symbol start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 is provided on the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32. Further, a normal variable winning device (starting winning opening, starting winning area) provided with a second starting winning opening (starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition of the special figure 2 variable display game in addition to the second starting winning opening 97 provided in the winning device 98 (starting winning entry). (Public train) 37 is provided at the lower right of the center case 40. The normal variable winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b only on the right side, and can be converted into a closed state in which the movable member 37b is substantially vertical and an open state in which the movable member 37b is tilted to the right. Further, the ordinary variable winning device 37 is provided with a partition wall 37d that regulates the inflow of game balls on the left side portion facing the movable member 37b. The partition wall 37d prevents the game ball from flowing into the normally variable winning device 37 when the movable member 37b is closed. The game ball that has won the prize in the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a.

Further, below the normal variable winning device 37, there is a first special variable winning device (first large winning opening, lower size) that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A winning opening) 38 is arranged. The second special variable winning device 39 is not provided, and the first special variable winning device 38 is opened in the special gaming state regardless of the type of special result. Of course, a second special variable winning device may be provided.

Next, the detailed structure of the center case 40 will be described with reference to FIG. 121. The center case 40 includes a front component 600 (front decoration unit) arranged in front of a flat plate-shaped game board main body 30c made of an opaque material (for example, wood) or a transparent material (for example, transparent resin), and a game board main body. A central constituent member (central decorative unit) 700 arranged behind the front constituent member 600, which is behind the 30c, and a back surface constituent member (control unit) 800 arranged behind the central constituent member 700 are provided. FIG. 121 shows an exploded perspective view of the game board 30 as viewed from the front side.

The front component 600 includes a base frame member 602 formed in a frame shape so as to form an opening 601 penetrating in the front-rear direction, and is configured by attaching various members to the base frame member 602. The base frame member 602 has a peripheral wall 603 inserted into an opening 30b formed in the game board main body 30c and penetrating the front and rear, and extends outward at the front end of the peripheral wall 603 perpendicularly to the peripheral wall 603. A plate-shaped (flange-shaped) front wall 604 formed in such a manner, and decorative armor formed so as to project in front of the front wall 604 and restricting the inflow of game balls from the game area 32 to the opening 601 side. A unit 605 (entrance control unit) is provided.

The outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall 603 comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the opening 30b when the front component 600 is inserted into the opening 30b formed in the game board main body 30c from the front side. As a result, the front component 600 is arranged at predetermined vertical and horizontal positions with respect to the game board main body 30c. Further, the portion of the front wall 604 formed outside the space surrounded by the peripheral wall 603 is said to be the same when the front component 600 is inserted into the opening 30b formed in the game board main body 30c from the front side. The back surface of the game board main body 30c abuts on the front surface of the game board main body 30c so as to extend outward from the peripheral edge of the opening 30b. As a result, the front component 600 is arranged at a predetermined front-rear position with respect to the game board main body 30c. Further, a plurality of screw holes are formed in this portion so that the front component 600 can be fixed to the game board main body 30c by screws.

Further, a part of the front wall 604 is arranged on the front side of the game board main body 30c at a position visible to the player, and the front surface thereof is decorated. In addition, the front wall 604 is formed with screw holes, screwed portions, bosses for positioning, recesses for receiving bosses, slits for receiving ribs, and the like so that various members can be fixed in appropriate positions. It has become.

The decorative armor portion 605 is formed so as to surround the opening 601. The decorative armor portion 605 is ahead of the front wall 604 by the width of the front and rear of the game area 32 (the width from the front of the game board body 30c to the back of the cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front of the game board 30). It is designed to extend to. Therefore, by attaching the front component 600 to the predetermined position of the game board main body 30c, the decorative armor portion 605 located on the front side of the front wall 604 extends into the game area 32, and the game ball flowing down the game area 32. It is designed to regulate the inflow to the opening 601 side. As a result, the visibility of the display device 41 can be ensured, and the number of game balls flowing into the stage 621 can be limited. That is, the area surrounded by the decorative armor portion 605 inside the base frame member 602 forms an entry restricted area in which the entry of the game ball is restricted.

Further, in the lower right portion of the base frame member 602, a decorative portion 607 is formed which extends forward by the width of the front and rear of the game area 32 from the front wall 604, similarly to the decorative armor portion 605. An inter-decorative part flow path 608 is formed between the armor portion 605 and the decorative armor portion 605 to allow the game ball flowing down the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 to flow down.

The warp device 610 provided on the left side of the base frame member 602 flows into the inflow port 611 opened to the left for receiving the game ball flowing down the game area 32 outside the center case 40 and the inflow port 611. It has a tubular warp flow path that guides the game ball to the stage, and the game ball that has flowed down the warp flow path is guided to the left end of the stage 621.

The stage 621 is formed by the upper surface of the stage member 620 attached to the base frame member 602. The stage 621 has a predetermined front-rear width on which the game ball can roll, and both the left and right sides are inclined surfaces that descend toward the center, and the central portion arranged directly above the winning device 98 faces upward. It is formed in a protruding substantially W shape. The central portion of the stage 621 protrudes upward, but is lower than the left and right ends. In the stage 621 formed in a substantially W shape, an inclined surface that descends forward is formed at the lowest portion located on both sides of the central portion that protrudes upward. Due to this inclined surface, the game ball whose flow force is weakened on the stage 621 flows down to the game area 32.

Further, in the portion of the stage 621 formed in a substantially W shape, which protrudes upward, an inclined surface for guiding the game ball toward the rear is formed. The game ball on the stage 621 rolls left and right without falling to the inclined surface when the momentum to roll left and right is strong, but the momentum just weakens at this part and the game ball that has fallen to the inclined surface is guided backward. Will be done. The game ball guided backward by the inclined surface is guided to directly above the inflow port 99 of the winning device 98 through a passing portion 624 having an inner diameter through which the game ball formed in the lower part of the stage 621 can pass. It has become.

The central constituent member 700 has a base member 702 including a tubular portion 710 formed in a cylindrical shape so as to form an opening 701 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The base member 702 is formed with a plurality of screw holes, bosses, and the like for attaching the central constituent member 700 to the back surface constituent member 800, and the central constituent member 700 is attached to the game board main body 30c via the back surface constituent member 800. It can be attached. A decorative member 711 is arranged on the inner peripheral surface of the tubular portion 710. Further, an effect operation device 900 is provided at the lower part of the inner peripheral surface of the tubular portion 710.

The back surface component 800 includes a rear base member 810 having a recessed chamber that opens forward. In the concave chamber of the rear base member, the above-mentioned central constituent member 700 and a discharge ball flow path member for detecting and discharging a game ball that has won a prize in various winning openings are arranged. Further, a display control unit 820 provided with the display device 41 is arranged behind the rear base member 810, and the display unit of the display device 41 is arranged from the window portion 811 formed on the rear wall of the concave chamber of the rear base member 810. It is designed to be visible. Further, a mounting portion 812 for mounting on the back surface of the game board main body 30c is formed at the front end portion of the rear base member 810. A plurality of screw holes are formed in the mounting portion 812 so that the back surface component 800 can be fixed to the back surface of the game board main body 30c by screws.

As shown in FIG. 122, the effect operation device 900 has a configuration in which both ends of a rotating member 910 including a square cylindrical rotating member main body 920 are rotatably supported by a first support portion 950 and a second support portion 960. ing. Further, as shown in FIGS. 121 and 122, a rear cover member 721 is arranged behind the effect operation device 900, and side cover members 722 are arranged on the left and right sides of the effect operation device 900, and the game in the rotating member 910. Only the side facing the person is visible. Since the effect operation device 900 is arranged below the display device 41, the side surface of the rotating member 910 facing diagonally forward and upward is a surface facing the player. Hereinafter, the direction facing the player is referred to as a display direction. In FIGS. 120 to 123, the side surface (first side surface 921) to which the plate labeled “ABC” is attached is in a state of facing the display direction.

As shown in FIGS. 122 and 123, the rotating member 910 includes a square cylindrical rotating member main body 920 and a first supported portion 930 and a second supported portion 940 attached to both end ends of the rotating member main body 920. Be prepared. Information about the game is displayed on each of the four side surfaces of the rotating member main body 920. As will be described later, the gaming machine of the present embodiment includes four types of contents having different gaming contents such as effects and display contents. Plates displaying names corresponding to each content are attached to the first side surface 921, the second side surface 922, the third side surface 923, and the fourth side surface 924, which are four sides arranged along the circumferential direction. Then, the side surface to which the plate on which the name corresponding to the currently set content is displayed is attached is controlled to face the display direction.

The first side surface 921, the second side surface 922, the third side surface 923, and the fourth side surface 924 are counterclockwise when viewed from the left end direction when viewed from the player side in a state where the effect operation device 900 is attached to the game board 30. When the rotating member 910 is rotated in the clockwise direction (normal rotation direction), the display direction is directed in the order of the first side surface 921, the second side surface 922, the third side surface 923, and the fourth side surface 924. Here, the plate 1 labeled "ABC" is attached to the first side surface 921, the plate 2 labeled "Iroha" is attached to the second side surface 922, and the plate 3 labeled "Aiu" is the first. A plate 4 attached to the three side surfaces 923 and labeled "XYZ" is attached to the fourth side surface 924.

A light emitting device 970 including a plurality of LEDs is inserted inside the square cylindrical rotating member main body 920. The light emitting device 970 is arranged so that the rotating member 970 does not come into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the rotating member main body 920 even if the rotating member 910 rotates, and the surface provided with the LED faces the display direction. It is supported by one support portion 950 and a second support portion 960. The rotating member main body 920 is made of a material capable of transmitting light, and the plates attached to each side surface are also made of a material capable of transmitting light, and can be decorated by transmitting light from the light emitting device 970.

The first supported portion 930 is attached to a position at the left end of the rotating member main body 920 when viewed from the player side in a state where the effect operation device 900 is attached to the game board 30. The first supported portion 930 has a fixing portion 934 for fixing to the end portion of the rotating member main body 920 and a circular tubular shape extending to the side opposite to the side fixed to the rotating member main body 920 (left side). The first fitted portion 935 of the above is provided. Further, the central axis orthogonal to the radial direction in the first fitted portion 935 having a circular cylinder coincides with the central axis parallel to the length direction of the rotating member main body 920 having a square cylinder.

The first fitted portion 935 is a gear in which a plurality of teeth 936 are formed on the outer peripheral surface, and meshes with the gear 956 driven by the stepping motor 955 that forms a drive source. The rotating member 910 can be driven to rotate. Further, in the space inside the first fitted portion 935 formed in the shape of a circular cylinder, one end portion of the light emitting device 970 is arranged so as to penetrate therethrough.

Further, on the outer peripheral surface of the first fitted portion 935, a plurality of plate-shaped light-shielding plates 931, 932, 933 for detecting the state of the rotating member 910 by the first motor switch sensor 952 are provided. Each of the light-shielding plates 931, 932, 933 is provided so that the plate surface is along one plane perpendicular to the central axis of the first fitted portion 935 formed in a circular cylinder shape.

The arrangement positions of the light-shielding plates 931, 932, 933 are as shown in FIGS. 125 (a) and 125 (g), for example. At a position adjacent to the third side surface 923, a first light-shielding plate 931 is provided over a predetermined width along the circumferential direction with the position corresponding to the center in the width direction of the third side surface 923 as the center. Further, at a position adjacent to the fourth side surface 924, a second light-shielding plate 932 is provided over a predetermined width along the circumferential direction with the position corresponding to the center in the width direction of the fourth side surface 924 as the center. Further, at a position adjacent to the first side surface 921, a third light-shielding plate 933 is provided over a predetermined width along the circumferential direction with the position corresponding to the center in the width direction of the first side surface 921 as the center.

The first light-shielding plate 931 and the second light-shielding plate 932 have a single plate shape, but the third light-shielding plate 933 has a slit over a certain width at a position corresponding to the center in the width direction of the first side surface 921. It is formed and has a shape divided into two with the slit in between. Further, each of the light-shielding plates 931, 932, 933 has a symmetrical shape about an axis along the radial direction passing through a position corresponding to the center in the width direction of the adjacent side surface.

As shown in FIGS. 122 and 123, the second supported portion 940 is attached to a position at the right end of the rotating member main body 920 when viewed from the player side in a state where the effect operation device 900 is attached to the game board 30. The second supported portion 940 has a fixing portion 944 for fixing to the end portion of the rotating member main body 920 and a circular tubular shape extending to the side opposite to the side fixed to the rotating member main body 920 (left side). The second fitted portion 945 of the above is provided. The central axis orthogonal to the radial direction in the circular tubular second fitted portion 945 coincides with the central axis parallel to the length direction of the square tubular rotating member main body 920. Further, in the space inside the second fitted portion 945 having a circular cylinder shape, the other end portion of the light emitting device 970 is arranged so as to penetrate therethrough.

Further, on the outer peripheral surface of the second fitted portion 945, a plurality of plate-shaped light-shielding plates 941, 942, 943 for detecting the state of the rotating member 910 by the second motor switch sensor 962 are provided. Each of the light-shielding plates 941, 942, 943 is provided so that the plate surface is located on one plane perpendicular to the central axis of the second fitted portion 945 formed in a circular cylinder shape.

The arrangement positions of the light-shielding plates 941, 942, 943 are as shown in FIGS. 125 (b) and 125 (d). At a position adjacent to the third side surface 923, a fourth light-shielding plate 941 is provided over a predetermined width along the circumferential direction with the position corresponding to the center in the width direction of the third side surface 923 as the center. Further, at a position adjacent to the fourth side surface 924, a fifth light-shielding plate 942 is provided over a predetermined width along the circumferential direction with the position corresponding to the center in the width direction of the fourth side surface 924 as the center. Further, at a position adjacent to the second side surface 922, a sixth light-shielding plate 943 is provided over a predetermined width along the circumferential direction with the position corresponding to the center in the width direction of the second side surface 922 as the center.

The fourth light-shielding plate 941 and the fifth light-shielding plate 942 have a single plate shape, but the sixth light-shielding plate 943 has a slit over a certain width at a position corresponding to the center in the width direction of the second side surface 922. It is formed and has a shape divided into two with the slit in between. Further, each of the light-shielding plates 941, 942, 943 has a symmetrical shape about an axis along the radial direction passing through a position corresponding to the center in the width direction of the adjacent side surface.

As shown in FIGS. 122 and 123, the first support portion 950 is a circular tubular first fitting that fits inside the circular tubular first fitting portion 935 provided in the first supported portion 930. A joint portion 951 is provided. In the state where the first fitting portion 951 and the first fitted portion 935 are fitted, the central axis orthogonal to the radial direction of the first fitting portion 951 and the radial direction of the first fitted portion 935 are orthogonal to each other. It is designed to coincide with the central axis. Further, the outer diameter of the first fitting portion 951 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the first fitting portion 935, and the first fitting portion 951 is first fitted with the central axis as the center. The unit 935 is rotatable.

Inside the first fitting portion 951 formed in a circular cylinder shape, a light emitting device fixing portion 957 for fixing one end of the light emitting device 970 is provided. The light emitting device fixing portion 957 is provided with a connector 958 for connecting a wiring for causing the light emitting device 970 to emit light, and the connector 958 is provided at an end portion of the light emitting device 970 on the first support portion 950 side. A connector (not shown) is connected.

Further, the first support portion 950 is provided with a sensor mounting portion 953 for mounting the first motor switch sensor 952 for detecting the state of the rotating member 910. The first motor switch sensor 952 mounted on the sensor mounting portion 953 is an optical sensor in which the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion are arranged so as to face each other at a predetermined interval, and the light receiving portion detects the light from the light emitting portion. This outputs an ON signal. By attaching the first motor switch sensor 952 to the sensor mounting portion 953, each light-shielding plate 931, 932, 933 formed on the first supported portion 930 with the rotation of the rotating member 910 has a gap between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion. The first motor switch sensor 952 is arranged so as to pass through.

Further, the first support portion 950 is formed with a motor mounting portion 954 for mounting the stepping motor 955 that forms a drive source. The gear 956 driven by the stepping motor 955 attached here meshes with a plurality of teeth 936 formed on the outer peripheral surface of the first fitted portion 935 provided on the first supported portion 930, and the stepping motor 955. The rotating member 910 can be rotated by the driving force of the above.

The second support portion 960 includes a circular tubular second fitting portion 961 that fits inside the circular tubular second fitting portion 945 provided on the second supported portion 940. In the state where the second fitting portion 961 and the second fitted portion 945 are fitted, the central axis orthogonal to the radial direction of the second fitting portion 961 and the radial direction of the second fitted portion 945 are orthogonal to each other. It is designed to coincide with the central axis. Further, the outer diameter of the second fitting portion 961 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the second fitting portion 945, and the second fitting portion 961 is second fitted around the central axis. The portion 945 is rotatable.

Inside the second fitting portion 961 formed in the shape of a circular cylinder, a light emitting device fixing portion 967 for fixing one end of the light emitting device 970 is provided. The other end of the light emitting device 970 inserted into the second fitting portion 961 is fixed to the light emitting device fixing portion 967 by a screw.

Further, the second support portion 960 is provided with a sensor mounting portion 963 for mounting the second motor switch sensor 962 for detecting the state of the rotating member 910. Like the first motor switch sensor 952, the second motor switch sensor 962 mounted on the sensor mounting portion 963 is an optical sensor in which the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion are arranged so as to face each other at a predetermined interval, and the light receiving portion is The ON signal is output by detecting the light from the light emitting unit. By attaching the second motor switch sensor 962 to the sensor mounting portion 963, each of the light-shielding plates 941, 942, 943 formed on the second supported portion 940 with the rotation of the rotating member 910 has a gap between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion. The second motor switch sensor 962 is arranged so as to pass through.

The first support portion 950 and the second support portion 960 are fixed to the central constituent member 700. As a result, the rotating member 910 is supported in a state of being rotatable about the central axis along the left-right direction of the game board 30. Further, the light emitting device 970 is supported by the first support portion 950 and the second support portion 960 in a state where the surface provided with the LED faces the display direction. Even if the rotating member 910 rotates, the light emitting device 970 does not rotate, and the surface on which the LED is arranged always faces the display direction.

The effect control device 300 performs rotation control of the rotating member 910 and light emission control of the light emitting device 970. FIG. 124 shows the process of change due to rotation of the rotating member 910. As shown in FIG. 124 (a), by rotating the first side surface 921 to which the plate 1 labeled “ABC” is attached by 90 degrees in the normal rotation direction from the state where the first side surface 921 faces the display direction, FIG. 124 (a) As shown in b), the second side surface 922 to which the plate 2 labeled "Iroha" is attached changes to a state facing the display direction.

Further, by rotating 90 degrees in the normal rotation direction from the state shown in FIG. 124 (b), the third side surface 923 to which the plate 3 displayed as "Aiu" is attached is displayed as shown in FIG. 124 (c). It changes to a state facing the direction. Further, by rotating 90 degrees in the normal rotation direction from the state shown in FIG. 124 (c), the fourth side surface 924 to which the plate 4 displayed as "XYZ" is attached is displayed as shown in FIG. 124 (d). It changes to a state facing the direction. Then, by rotating 90 degrees in the normal rotation direction from the state shown in FIG. 124 (d), the state returns to the state shown in FIG. 124 (a). Of course, it can also rotate in the reverse direction opposite to the forward rotation direction.

The effect control device 300 grasps the state of the rotating member 910 that rotates in this way based on the control information of the stepping motor 955 and the information from the first motor switch sensor 952 and the second motor switch sensor 962, and the rotating member 910. It is designed to control the rotation of.

FIG. 125 shows the states of the rotating member 910 at the left end and the right end as seen from the player side in each of the states of FIGS. 124 (a) to 124 (d). First, in the case of the state shown in FIG. 124 (a), the state at the left end portion is shown in FIG. 125 (a), and the state at the right end portion is shown in FIG. 125 (b).

As shown in FIG. 125 (a), at the left end of the rotating member 910, none of the light-shielding plates 931, 932, 933 is located at the position of the first motor switch sensor 952, and the first motor switch sensor 952 is in a light-transmitting state (ON). State). The light-shielding plate visible at the position of the first motor switch sensor 952 is the sixth light-shielding plate 943 at the right end facing each other, and is not detected by the first motor switch sensor 952. Further, the first light-shielding plate 931 is hidden by a gear 956. As shown in FIG. 125 (b), at the right end of the rotating member 910, the fourth light-shielding plate 941 is located at the position of the second motor switch sensor 962, and the second motor switch sensor 962 is in a light-shielding state (OFF state). There is.

Next, in the case of the state shown in FIG. 124 (b), the state at the left end portion is shown in FIG. 125 (c), and the state at the right end portion is shown in FIG. 125 (d). As shown in FIG. 125 (c), at the left end of the rotating member 910, the first light-shielding plate 931 is located at the position of the first motor switch sensor 952, and the first motor switch sensor 952 is in a light-shielding state. The second light-shielding plate 932 is hidden by a gear 956. Further, as shown in FIG. 125 (d), at the right end of the rotating member 910, the fifth light-shielding plate 942 is located at the position of the second motor switch sensor 962, and the second motor switch sensor 962 is in a light-shielding state.

Next, in the case of the state shown in FIG. 124 (c), the state at the left end portion is shown in FIG. 125 (e), and the state at the right end portion is shown in FIG. 125 (f). As shown in FIG. 125 (e), at the left end of the rotating member 910, the second light-shielding plate 932 is located at the position of the first motor switch sensor 952, and the first motor switch sensor 952 is in a light-shielding state. The third light-shielding plate 933 is hidden by a gear 956. Further, as shown in FIG. 125 (f), at the right end of the rotating member 910, none of the light-shielding plates 941, 942, 943 is located at the position of the second motor switch sensor 962, and the second motor switch sensor 962 is in a light-transmitting state. It has become. The light-shielding plate visible at the position of the second motor switch sensor 962 is the third light-shielding plate 933 at the left end facing the second motor switch sensor 962, and is not detected by the second motor switch sensor 962.

Next, in the case of the state shown in FIG. 124 (d), the state at the left end portion is shown in FIG. 125 (g), and the state at the right end portion is shown in FIG. 125 (h). As shown in FIG. 125 (g), at the left end of the rotating member 910, the third light-shielding plate 933 is located at the position of the first motor switch sensor 952. Since the third light-shielding plate 933 is formed with a slit, the first motor switch sensor 952 is in a light-transmitting state. Further, as shown in FIG. 125 (h), the sixth light-shielding plate 943 is located at the position of the second motor switch sensor 962 at the right end portion of the rotating member 910. Since the sixth light-shielding plate 943 is formed with a slit, the second motor switch sensor 962 is in a light-transmitting state.

From the above, as shown in FIG. 126, the first motor switch sensor 952 and the second motor switch when the display plate faces the display direction for each display plate which is a plate corresponding to the currently set content. The state of sensor 962 is defined. When the display plate is the plate 1 displayed as "ABC", if the plate 1 faces the display direction, the first motor switch sensor state, which is the detection state of the first motor switch sensor 952, is the light transmission state. The second motor switch sensor state, which is the detection state of the second motor switch sensor 962, is a light-shielding state.

Further, when the display plate is a plate 2 displayed as "Iroha", if the plate 2 faces the display direction, the first motor switch sensor state and the second motor switch sensor state are in a light-shielding state. Further, when the display plate is a plate 3 displayed as "Aiu", if the plate 3 faces the display direction, the first motor switch sensor state is in a light-shielding state, and the second motor switch sensor state is in a light-transmitting state. It becomes. Further, when the display plate is a plate 4 displayed as "XYZ", and if the plate 4 faces the display direction, the first motor switch sensor state and the second motor switch sensor state are in the light transmission state. It becomes.

Thereby, when the display plates are the plates 1 to 3, it is possible to grasp whether the display plate is facing the display direction from the first motor switch sensor state and the second motor switch sensor state. Since the light-shielding plate has a certain width along the circumferential direction, it is not possible to detect a slight deviation from the display direction, but if the deviation is about this degree, other plates will not be visible to the player. There is no problem. Further, by performing the sensing operation described below, the deviation from the display direction is corrected.

When the display plate is the plate 4, the first motor switch sensor state and the second motor switch sensor state are in the light transmission state even when the plate 4 is not facing the display direction depending on the rotation angle of the rotating member 910. Therefore, it is not possible to grasp whether the display direction is directed only from the state of the first motor switch sensor and the state of the second motor switch sensor. However, the state can be grasped by combining the sensing operation described below.

Next, a sensing operation for making the display plate, which is a plate corresponding to the currently set content, face the display direction will be described. This sensing operation is performed, for example, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on or when the content is changed. Further, it is also performed when the condition of the origin check set for each display plate is satisfied as shown in FIG. 126, that is, when it is detected that the display plate is not facing the display direction.

In this sensing operation, the plate alignment process is first performed. In this plate alignment process, the rotating member 910 is rotated in the forward rotation direction, the change shown in the column of "first motor switch sensing" is detected in the first motor switch sensor 952, and the second motor switch sensor 962 is ". From the time when the change shown in the column of "second motor switch sensing" is detected (hereinafter referred to as "sensing time"), the motor switches to rotate in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined number of steps (predetermined angle) and stops. Since the light-shielding plate has a predetermined width along the circumferential direction from a position corresponding to the center in the width direction on the side surface of the rotating member main body 920, a predetermined number of steps corresponding to the width of half the width of the light-shielding plate from the time of sensing. By rotating only in the forward rotation direction, one of the plates is in a state of facing the display direction.

After the plate alignment process, a check process is performed to check whether the display plate is facing the display direction. In this check process, it is determined whether the first motor switch sensor state and the second motor switch sensor state are the states when the display plate faces the display direction when stopped. Then, when the display plate is in the state of facing the display direction, the sensing operation is terminated.

If the display plate is not in the display direction, the rerotation process is performed. When the display plate is the plate 2 or the plate 4, the change at the time of sensing is the same, so it is possible to confirm which plate is facing the display direction by the check process. Then, when a plate different from the display plate faces the display direction, the rerotation process is performed.

In the re-rotation process, the rotating member 910 is rotated in the forward rotation direction by a certain number of steps. The number of steps at this time is such that the light-shielding plate at the position of the first motor switch sensor 952 or the second motor switch sensor 962 deviates from the position of the first motor switch sensor 952 or the second motor switch sensor 962, and the number of steps is in the circumferential direction. The number of steps is such that the adjacent light-shielding plate does not reach the position of the first motor switch sensor 952 or the second motor switch sensor 962. After performing this rerotation process, the above plate alignment process and check process are performed.

If the first motor switch sensor state and the second motor switch sensor state do not change to the state when the display plate faces the display direction even after performing the rerotation process, plate alignment process, and check process loop a predetermined number of times. , Perform error processing assuming that some abnormality has occurred. In the error processing, the operation of the effect operation device 900 is stopped, and the LED of the game board 30, the display device 41, or the like is used to notify the occurrence of an error. In addition, information notifying the occurrence of an error may be transmitted to the outside. However, since the game can be executed even if there is an abnormality in the effect operation device 900, it is preferable that the error notification does not affect the game.

In the plate alignment process and the re-rotation process, the rotating member 910 is supposed to rotate in the forward rotation direction, but it may be rotated in the reverse rotation direction. Further, after performing the plate alignment process and the rerotation process in the forward rotation direction, the plate alignment process and the rerotation process may be performed again in the reverse direction. By performing the sensing operation in this way, it is possible to prevent the plate other than the plate to be shown to the player from being visible due to the displacement of the rotating member 910.

Next, the process for changing the content will be described. The gaming machine of the present embodiment has four types of contents having different game contents such as effects and display contents, and the game progresses according to one content selected and set from the contents. .. In addition, the content can be changed by the operation of the clerk of the amusement store.

[Hall / player setting mode processing]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the hole / player setting mode processing shown in FIG. 127 is performed instead of the hole / player setting mode processing shown in FIG. 91. In this hole / player setting mode process, the content release process (step C401) is performed in the hole setting mode.

[Content cancellation process]
FIG. 128 shows the content release process (step C401) in the hole / player setting mode process shown in FIG. 127. In this content release process, first, it is determined whether the content is being switched (step C411). Note that the content switching is a mode as shown in FIG. 129 (d) in which the content can be switched. If the content is being switched, the content switching flag is set, and the presence or absence of this flag is set. It is possible to determine whether the content is being switched.

If the content is being switched (step C411; Y), the process proceeds to step C416. Further, when the content is not being switched (step C411; N), it is determined whether or not there is an input of the release password necessary for setting the mode in which the content can be switched (step C412). If the release password is not input (step C412; N), the content release process ends. When the release password is input (step C412; Y), the release password data in FeRAM323 is compared with the input release password data (step C413).

If the release password data do not match (step C414; N), the content release process ends. If the release password data match (step C414; Y), the content switching flag is set (step C415). This makes it possible to switch the contents. Next, it is determined whether there is a content switching operation input which is an operation of selecting a desired content from a plurality of contents (step C416).

If there is no content switching operation input (step C416; N), the content release process ends. If there is a content switching operation input (step C416; Y), the content confirmation operation input, which is an operation for temporarily setting the content information corresponding to the content switching operation (step C417) and setting the selected content, is performed. It is determined whether or not there is (step C418).

Then, when there is no content confirmation operation input (step C418; N), the content release process is terminated. If there is a content confirmation operation input (step C418; Y), the provisionally set content information is set as the confirmed content information (step C419). As a result, new content will be set. After that, the content switching flag is cleared (step C420), and the content release process is terminated. The set confirmed content information is written in the backup RAM (FeRAM323) by the process of step C43, and is retained even if the power of the gaming machine is cut off. That is, here, the predetermined content information change condition is satisfied and the content is changed by matching the release password data and inputting the content confirmation operation.

The effect control device 300 performs a process of changing the game content such as the effect and the display content as the content is changed. The PROM 321 shown in FIG. 88 stores data for each of the four types of contents having different game contents such as effects and display contents. When there is a change in the content, after erasing the data corresponding to the previous content from the FeRAM 323, the data corresponding to the newly selected content is written to the FeRAM 323, and control is performed based on the newly written data. conduct. As a result, the game content such as the effect and the display content is changed. It should be noted that the data corresponding to the set content may not be written to the FeRAM 323, and the data corresponding to the set content may be used among the data corresponding to each content stored in the PROM 321.

Examples of the game content to be changed include display on the display device 41, sound, lighting mode of the decorative LED, content and selection probability of reach effect, execution mode of look-ahead effect, notice, and content of effect mode. Since the control content of the game control device 100 is not changed, the jackpot probability and the selection ratio of the fluctuation time do not change. Of course, the control content of the game control device 100 may also be changed.

Further, the effect control device 300 changes the display plate on the effect operation device 900 according to the confirmed content information based on the setting of the confirmed content information. Then, the rotating member 910 is controlled to rotate so that the display plate faces the display direction. In addition, by performing a sensing operation as the content changes, it is possible to prevent the plate other than the plate that should be shown to the player from being visible due to the displacement of the rotating member 910, and the content that has not been released yet can be displayed. It can be prevented from being disclosed.

FIG. 129 shows an example of a screen displayed on the display device 41 in an operation related to content change. When the hole setting mode is started, the screen as shown in FIG. 129 (a) is displayed. On this screen, items that can be changed, such as volume, LED brightness, and content settings, are listed, and the current settings are displayed. Here, "CR Iroha" of "B" is set as the content.

By operating the effect button 25 in this state, a movement operation for moving the cursor is possible, and a confirmation operation for proceeding to a setting change of the item on which the cursor is located is possible. The cursor here is highlighted so as to surround the item name whose setting can be changed, and in FIG. 129 (a), the cursor is located at the volume setting item.

FIG. 130 (c) shows by performing a move operation with the effect button 25 from the state of FIG. 129 (a), moving the cursor to the content setting item as shown in FIG. 129 (b), and performing a confirmation operation. The screen for entering the unlock password is displayed. On this screen, the character is input by moving the cursor that selects the character by the movement operation by the effect button 25 to the desired character and performing the confirmation operation, and this is repeated to input the release password. do.

When the entered release password matches the release password data in FeRAM323, the mode is set so that the content can be switched, and the screen for changing the content setting is displayed as shown in FIG. 129 (d). Here, in the content setting item, the content of A to D can be selected by the movement operation (content switching operation) by the effect button 25, and the content information of the selected content is temporarily set each time the movement operation is performed. Will be done. Then, the selected content is set by performing the confirmation operation (content confirmation operation) by the effect button 25, and the content information temporarily set based on the confirmation operation is set as the confirmed content information. It should be noted that the screen returns to the screen shown in FIG. 129 (a) based on the confirmation operation.

By making it possible to change the content as described above, it is possible to perform an effect that can obtain a further effect of attracting customers, which is differentiated from other gaming machines. In addition, by entering the unlock password, it is possible to switch to a completely different model of content. For example, the content that can be set for each game store can be different, and a means of attracting customers that other game machines do not have. It will be possible to realize. In addition, the effect operation device 900 can be operated according to the set content, and the set content can be clearly notified.

That is, the effect control device 300 (PROM 321 or FeRAM 323) serves as an effect mode storage means for storing a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, effect modes of different models) as the effect mode of the game. Further, the effect control device 300 (CPU311) serves as a content information setting means capable of setting any of the plurality of content information defining the effect mode of the game, and the content information set by the content information setting means. Depending on the situation, it serves as an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode that can be selected from a plurality of types of effect modes. Further, the effect control device 300 (CPU311) serves as a content information changing means for changing the set content information to different content information based on the establishment of a predetermined content information changing condition.

Further, the effect control device 300 (FeRAM 323) serves as a password data storage means for storing the release password data required when changing the content information. Further, the effect control device 300 serves as a match determination means for determining whether or not the release password data and the password data input by a predetermined operator match. Further, the gaming machine 10 can be operated by a drive source (stepping motor 955), and is provided with an effect operating device in which a normal state is set in correspondence with a plurality of content information. Further, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect operation control means for controlling the operation of the effect operation device in response to the content information set in the content information setting means.

As the release password data in the FeRAM 323, the data stored as the initial information in the PROM 321 shown in FIG. 88 may be written in the FeRAM 323. In this case, as shown in FIG. 109 (a), based on the reception of the spec designation command from the game control device 100, the release password data stored as the initial information in the history information initial value storage unit 321c of the PROM 321 is stored in the FeRAM 323. The hole setting information storage unit 323c1 of the history information storage unit 323c of the above is written.

Further, the data may be written from the factory data setting device 150 shown in FIG. 88 to the FeRAM 323. In this case, as shown in FIG. 109 (b), based on the reception of the data writing command from the factory data setting device 150, the release password setting unit provided in the history information setting unit 152 of the factory data setting device 150 is set. The stored release password data is written in the hole setting information storage unit 323c1 of the history information storage unit 323c of the FeRAM 323.

That is, it includes a game control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game, and an effect control means (effect control device 300) that controls the effect mode based on the control information from the game control means. The game control means includes a first connection connector (command transmission connector 141) provided for transmitting control information to the effect control means, and the effect control means include a password data storage means (FeRAM323) and a game control means. A second connector (command receiving connector 328) provided for receiving control information transmitted from the connector is provided, and the first connector and the second connector are configured to be connectable, and at least the first connector is provided. The shape of the connector 1 is the shape of the third connector (command transmission connector 153) provided in the setting device (factory data setting device 150) for storing the release password data that can be output to the password data storage means. It may be configured with the same shape. By doing so, the password data for canceling the password data storage means can be changed even when the effect control means is enclosed in the case, and the setting can be easily changed.

If the release password data is written from the factory data setting device 150, for example, the release password data can be set for each game store. As a result, it is possible to notify the cancellation password data as a privilege to a specific game store and allow the content to be changed. It is also possible to notify the game store that paid the content usage fee of the cancellation password data and allow the content to be changed. In addition, it is possible to prevent the content from being changed by obtaining a password from another store.

It is also possible to set different release password data for each content so that the content corresponding to the entered release password data can be selected. In this case, the content may be changed by satisfying the predetermined content information change condition only by matching the release password data. Further, the content may be arbitrarily changed without inputting the release password data. In this case, the predetermined content information change condition is satisfied and the content is changed only by inputting the content confirmation operation.

Further, the content that can be selected may be limited based on the information of RTC338. For example, it may be possible to select specific content based on a certain date on the calendar or a certain period of time since the installation in the amusement store. Further, when the content that can be selected is restricted based on the information of RTC338, the content that is not yet selectable may be notified.

As a notification, for example, a digest movie about a content that cannot be selected yet is displayed on the display device 41 at predetermined time (for example, 1 hour), and then a game with the content that can be selected next as a trial version is displayed. It may be possible to enable a predetermined period (for example, 20 games). In addition, the player may be able to select whether or not to play the game in the trial version. By making such an announcement, it is possible to motivate the player to visit the game store again in order to play the game with the content that can be selected next. In particular, by notifying the number of days until the next new content can be selected, it is possible to more clearly motivate the player to visit the game store.

Further, the content may be changed based on the player's selection. For example, based on operating the effect button 25 while waiting for a customer, any content can be selected from the currently selectable contents. Further, the content may be changed based on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied in the game. In these cases, the sensing operation of the effect operation device 900 may be prevented from being performed when the content is changed, and the content that has not been published may not be disclosed.

Further, even if the content is the same, the execution mode of the advance notice effect may be selected. For example, a mode in which no advance notice effect is performed, a mode in which a notice is given by sound or light or a change mode of identification information, a mode in which a one-shot notification effect for deterministically notifying a big hit occurs, etc. The player may be able to select from a plurality of modes. By doing so, it is possible to give a single gaming machine a variety of playability by combining the content change and the mode change.

In particular, if the selectable content is content compatible with past models, the current gaming machine can execute a mode that inherits the production content of the model at that time as it is and a new production that was not available in the model at that time. By making it possible to select a mode that is close to the production of, it can be a gaming machine that is accepted by a wide range of generations. In addition to allowing the player to select whether or not to perform the effect as a mode, the player may be able to set whether or not to execute an individual effect (pre-reading effect, one-shot notification effect, etc.).

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the gaming machine of the third embodiment will be described. It should be noted that basically, the machine has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and the description is mainly different. The part will be explained. The gaming machine of the present embodiment can simultaneously execute the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game.

It is possible to provide the gaming machine of the present embodiment with a function of switching contents as in the gaming machines of the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above. Further, the content may be switched during the execution of the game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition in the game. In such a case, the content switching may be performed with the content switching as a specific event in the time notification effect described later. The timing may be notified.

Further, when the control content of the game control device 100 can also be changed, the control content of the game control device 100 in the above-mentioned first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the game machine of the present embodiment is switched with each other. It is also possible to do. The configuration of the game board 30 may be any of the configurations of each embodiment, but the control by the game control device 100 and the contents of the contents should be appropriately changed so as to be suitable for the configuration of the adopted game board 30. do.

As shown in FIG. 130, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is rotatably assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11. The game board 30 (see FIG. 131) is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration and production, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. are displayed in the abnormality notification color (for example, red). A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) with (), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, a sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided in the lower part of the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. A lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (storage plate) for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown), and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 are provided. The outflowing upper plate ball outlet 22, the lower plate (receiver) 23 for storing the game balls discharged when the upper plate 21 is full, the operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launching device, and the like are provided. Further, the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21 is provided with an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. Further, a touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. Further, on the lower right side of the lower part of the front frame 12, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device may be provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25. A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub-display device.

Further, on the right side of the effect button 25, there is a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection button that is operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28. A balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card is provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the hitting ball launching device moves the gaming ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the gaming area 32 on the front surface of the gaming board 30. Fire. Further, by operating the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, the player can perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in the display device 41 (see FIG. 131). It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. 131. FIG. 131 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect component) 40 having a display device 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the periphery of the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube), for example. In the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbol), a character that directs the special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the effect of the effect is displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen. Further, the left portion and the right portion of the center case 40 are provided with a board effect device 44 that produces a game by operating. The board effect device 44 can be operated from the state shown in FIG. 131 toward the center of the display device 41.

Further, three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40. The game ball that has won a prize in these general winning openings 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 141).

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a first start winning opening 36 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition of the special figure 1 variable display game is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 141). Further, in the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a second start winning opening 37 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition of the special figure 2 variable display game is provided. The game ball that has won a prize in the second starting winning opening 37 is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 141).

Below the center case 40 in the game area 32, on the right side of the first start winning opening 36, there is a first special that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A variable winning device (upper large winning opening) 38 is arranged.

The first special variable winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side, and is the result of a special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on the method, the upper prize opening is changed from a closed state (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a state that is advantageous to the player). That is, the first special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, an upper winning opening that is opened and closed by an opening / closing door 38c driven by an upper winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 141) as a driving device, and is provided with a big hit or a small hit. During the special game state based on the above, by converting the upper prize opening from the closed state to the open state, the inflow of the game ball into the upper prize opening is facilitated, and the player is given a predetermined game value (prize ball). ) Is given.

Inside the upper prize opening (winning area), the upper prize opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 141) is arranged as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the upper prize opening. There is. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two upper prize opening switches 38a are provided, and the game ball flowing into the upper prize opening is detected by any of the upper prize opening switches 38a. By providing a plurality of upper prize opening switches 38a in this way, it is possible to quickly detect the game ball that has flowed into the upper prize opening.

Immediately below the first start winning opening 36, a second special variable winning device (lower large winning opening) 39 that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game is arranged. Has been done. The second special variable winning device 39 is provided with an opening / closing door 39c that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in.

The second special variable winning device 39 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 39c that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side, and is the result of a special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the lower prize opening is changed from the closed state (closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to the open state (favorable state for the player). That is, the second special variable winning device 39 includes, for example, a lower big winning opening opened and closed by an opening / closing door 39c driven by a lower big winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 141) as a driving device, and is provided with a big hit or a small hit. During the special game state based on, the lower prize opening is changed from the closed state to the open state to facilitate the inflow of the game ball into the lower prize opening, and the player is given a predetermined game value (prize ball). ) Is given.

Inside the lower prize opening (winning area), a lower prize opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 141) is arranged as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. .. Further, below the second special variable winning device 39, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that did not win in the winning opening or the like is provided.

The arrangement of the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 is not limited to this. For example, in FIG. 131, the second special variable winning device 39 may be provided adjacent to the upper side or the lower side of the first special variable winning device 38. In this case, it may be completely overlapped on the top and bottom, or it may be shifted to the left and right so that only a part of it overlaps on the top and bottom. In addition, the opening / closing doors 38c and 39c are not limited to the attacker type, but the slide type that can open the big winning opening by sliding the plate-shaped member that can close the big winning opening, etc. It may be in the form of.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the gaming areas 32 in which the gaming balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left gaming area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right gaming area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed), so that the player can aim to win the first start winning opening 36 and launch the game ball to the right game area. By (so-called right-handed), it is possible to aim for a prize in the second start winning opening 37 or the first special variable winning device 38. The second special variable winning device 39 can be aimed at either the left or right gaming area by firing the gaming ball.

Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end portion of the center case 40 is disposed at a position corresponding to the right gaming region, and is launched into the right gaming region. The resulting game ball is configured to pass through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. Since the material at least on the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is a material that allows the game ball passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visually recognized from the outside, the player or the like can see the flow path. A game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, a game ball flowing down the right game area) can be visually recognized through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42. ..

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), the display of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game forming the special figure variable display game, and various information are displayed collectively. A display device 50 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 132, the batch display device 50 is a special figure 1 display for a special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display unit) composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. 51 (D1) and special figure 2 variable display game special figure 2 display (second special figure variable display unit) 52 (D2), and special figure 1 variable display game start memory number notification composed of LED lamps. A storage display unit 54 (D11 to D14) for use is provided.

Further, the batch display device 50 has a round display unit 60 (D3 to D7) for displaying the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing of the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39), and left-handed (D3 to D7). The first game state display unit 77 (D8 to D10) that notifies the player of the advantageous hitting method (the hitting method corresponding to the game state) among the normal hitting and the right-handed hitting, and the probability state (high) of the special figure fluctuation display game. A probability display unit 78 (D15 to D18) for notifying a probability state (probability state or low probability state) is provided. The batch display device 50 has a probability state display unit that displays that the probability state of the jackpot is in the high probability state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and a display that lights up when a jackpot occurs to notify the occurrence of the jackpot. A unit (display) or the like may be provided. Further, it is a normal game that executes a normal map variation display game like a conventional gaming machine and constitutes a second start winning opening in which a game ball can win a prize based on the specific result of the normal map variation display game. When equipped with a variable winning device, a normal map display unit that displays a normal map fluctuation display game, a storage display unit for notifying the start memory number of the normal map variation display game, and a time saving state that lights up when a time saving state occurs and a time saving state occurs. A time-saving state notification unit or the like may be provided to notify the user.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is centered, for example, during the execution of the variation display game, that is, while the decorative special figure variation display game is being performed on the display device 41. Flashes the segment to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 100 msec. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51, as shown in FIG. 132 (b), it is provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment display in addition to the central segment. The eighth segment is also blinking and driven to indicate that it is changing, so that the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be distinguished from each other. Then, when the result of the game is "off", for example, the central segment (in the case of special figure 1, the eighth segment on the lower right side in addition) is turned on as the result mode of the off, and the result of the game is In the case of "hit", the result mode (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the result mode of the hit result mode (special result mode) is turned on and the game result is displayed.

FIG. 132 (c) shows the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = holding number) among the number of winning balls to the first starting winning opening 36, which is a variable start condition of the special figure 1 display 51. ) Is displayed by turning off and turning on (blinking) a plurality of LEDs. The round display unit 60 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and as shown in FIG. 132 (d), all the LEDs are turned off when not in the special gaming state, and are selected according to the special result during the special gaming state. The LED is turned on according to the number of rounds. The round display unit may be composed of a 7-segment type display.

As shown in FIG. 132 (e), for example, the first game state display unit 77 turns off all the LEDs when the left-handed hit is more advantageous to the player than the right-handed hit (during normal hitting). In the case where right-handed is more advantageous for the player than left-handed (when right-handed), all LEDs are turned on. As shown in FIG. 132 (e), the probability display unit 78 turns off all LEDs when the jackpot probability state is a low probability state (normal probability state), and the jackpot probability state is a high probability state (probability change). In the case of (state), all LEDs are turned on.

FIG. 133 shows a display mode in the special figure 1 display 51. Special Figure 1 Fluctuation display During the fluctuation display of the game, the central segment and the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment are blinked at a cycle of 100 msec. Then, the result is displayed by lighting in a manner corresponding to the result at the end of the fluctuation time. In some cases, a plurality of lighting modes are associated with one result, and in this case, one of these lighting modes is selected by a random number or the like.

FIGS. 134 and 135 show the display mode of the special figure 2 display 52. Special Figure 2 Fluctuation display During the fluctuation display of the game, the central segment blinks at a cycle of 100 ms. Then, the result is displayed by lighting in a manner corresponding to the result at the end of the fluctuation time. In some cases, a plurality of lighting modes are associated with one result, and in this case, one of these lighting modes is selected by a random number or the like. A plurality of patterns of lighting modes are set for each of the large hit and the small hit, which will be described later, but this does not clearly inform the player which small hit has occurred, especially when the small hit occurs (recognition). By doing so, it is possible to prevent an act of illegally acquiring a game ball at the time of a small hit by looking at the lighting mode of the special figure 2 display 52.

FIG. 136 shows the probabilities of big hits and small hits, the distribution probability of the big hit type when the big hit is won, and the distribution probability of the small hit type when the small hit is won. The big hit is a special result (first special result) accompanied by the operation of the conditional device, and the small hit is a special result (second special result) not accompanied by the operation of the conditional device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is the first as a special electric accessory. 1 It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is activated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

The jackpot probability, which is the probability of a jackpot (first special result), is common to Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, and the probabilities in the normal gaming state, which is a low probability state, and the specific gaming state, which is a high probability state, are shown in the figures. The probability is as shown in 136 (a). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the high probability state is reached after the end of the special gaming state (first special gaming state) based on the big hit, and the low probability state is reached when the special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times in this case). It is configured to be. Further, regardless of which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game results in a high probability state, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game Both are in a high probability state.

The small hit probability, which is the probability of a small hit (second special result), is as shown in FIG. 136 (b). This small hit probability is higher in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1. In addition, the small hit probability is always constant regardless of the gaming state and the big hit probability. In the big hit and small hit lottery, the big hit and the small hit are not won in duplicate. Therefore, in the high probability state, the special figure 2 will always win either a big hit or a small hit. In addition, it may be possible that the result may be off.

Further, FIG. 136 (c) shows the jackpot types that can be selected in the special figures 1 and 2, the special variable winning device and the distribution probability that are opened in each jackpot type, and FIG. 136 (d) shows the special hit types. The small hit types that can be selected in FIGS. 1 and 2, the special variable winning device that is opened in each small hit type, the opening time, the number of opening times, and the distribution probability are shown. As for the 2R probability variation D1 of the special figure 2, it is almost impossible to expect a ball to come out, but since it is a big hit, the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in a high probability state is set to 50 times again. In the special gaming state based on this 2R probability variation D1, the number of games that can be executed in the high probability state is added.

FIGS. 137 and 138 show fluctuation patterns of the special figure fluctuation display game. FIG. 137 (a) shows a fluctuation pattern in the case where the result is out of order in the low probability state. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim for a prize in the first start winning opening 36 by hitting the left side, and aiming for a prize in the second starting winning opening 37 by hitting the right side. It has become. That is, it is possible to select whether to mainly execute the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game according to the player's intention. Further, depending on the game state, the game is designed on the assumption that one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly played, and the player plays the game according to this design. It is configured so that it is advantageous for the player to play the game mainly in the special figure variation display game, which is determined to be the main in the design so that the game progresses. In the following description, one special figure variation display game determined to be the main in each game state may be referred to as a main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as an irregular variation.

In the low probability state, the special figure 1 variable display game is designed to be the main fluctuation, and the special figure 2 variable display game is designed to be the irregular fluctuation. In order for the player to proceed with the game according to this design, for Special Figure 2, a long variation in which a variation time of about 10 minutes is set is selected regardless of which variation pattern is selected. It has become. That is, in the normal gaming state, the variable time that can be determined as the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game is longer than the variable time that can be determined as the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game. The probability of a small hit is higher in the special figure 2 variable display game than in the special figure 1 variable display game. FIG. 2 The execution of the variable display game is made inefficient in terms of time, and in the low probability state, the player is made to proceed mainly with the special figure 1 variable display game.

FIG. 137 (b) shows a fluctuation pattern when the result is out of order in a high probability state. In the high probability state, the fluctuation pattern is not set because the lottery result may not be out of order for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. Further, for the special figure 1 variation display game, only one variation pattern is selected. In this high-probability state, contrary to the case of the low-probability state described above, the special figure 2 variation display game is designed to be the main variation, and the special figure 1 variation display game is designed to be the irregular variation.

Here, the fluctuation time in the case of a deviation result in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in which the irregular fluctuation occurs in the high probability state is the deviation result in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in which the irregular fluctuation occurs in the low probability state. It is set shorter than the fluctuation time of (see FIG. 137 (a)). As will be described later, a short time is set as the fluctuation time when the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a big hit or a small hit in the high probability state, and in the high probability state, the special figure 2 variable display game is drawn by lottery. This is because the result of is not out of order.

In other words, in a high-probability state where the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is short and it can be executed efficiently in terms of time, the special figure 1 variable display game which has a missing result as a result of the lottery is clearly disadvantageous. , It is possible to allow the player to proceed mainly with the special figure 2 variable display game without setting such a long variable time. Therefore, it is not necessary to set an unnecessarily long fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game, but when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed at the same time, the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly used. As the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game is sufficiently long with respect to the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game, the game is forcibly stopped by a big hit or a small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game so that the game progresses.

FIG. 138 (a) shows a fluctuation pattern when the result is a big hit in a low probability state. For the special figure 2, only the fluctuation pattern that does not generate the reach state can be selected. In the low probability state, the fluctuation time when the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a big hit may be set to be longer than the variable time which can be selected when the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a big hit. FIG. 138 (b) shows a fluctuation pattern when the result is a big hit in a high probability state. None of them generate a reach state, and a fluctuation pattern with a very short fluctuation time is selected.

In particular, for the special figure 1 variable display game, the second shortest variable time is selected when compared including the variable time that can be selected when a big hit or a small hit is made in the special figure 2 variable display game. ing. This increases the possibility that the special figure 1 variable display game, which has irregular fluctuations even in a high probability state, will stop before the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the main fluctuation, and is a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game. Is less likely to be forcibly changed to a missed result. In addition, although the distribution of the fluctuation pattern in Special Figure 2 is performed according to the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be determined by a random number or the like.

FIG. 138 (c) shows a fluctuation pattern when the result is a small hit in a low probability state. As for the special figure 2, the reach state is not generated, and the long fluctuation in which the fluctuation time of about 10 minutes is set is selected. FIG. 138 (d) shows a fluctuation pattern when the result is a small hit in a high probability state. None of them generate a reach state, and a fluctuation pattern with a very short fluctuation time is selected. The special figure 1 variable display game has the same time as the case of the loss in the high probability state, but this is also forcibly stopped by the big hit or the small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game as in the case of the loss. It's enough time to be played. Regarding the fluctuation time when the special figure 1 variable display game is missed or a small hit in a high probability state, it should be sufficient time to be forcibly stopped by the big hit or small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game. For example, the time may be shorter than the time shown here.

139 and 140 show special in a special gaming state (first special gaming state) based on a big hit (first special result) and a special gaming state (second special gaming state) based on a small hit (second special result). The opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device is shown. FIG. 139 shows the opening / closing pattern of the special variable winning device in the big hit type and the small hit type that can be selected in the special figure 1 variable display game, and FIG. 140 shows the big hit type and small that can be selected in the special figure 2 variable display game. The opening / closing pattern of the special variable winning device in the hit type is shown.

For example, as shown in FIG. 139, when the jackpot type is the jackpot of 16R probability variation A1 in the special figure 1 variation display game, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened according to the special figure 1 upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 1. .. In the special figure 1 upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 1, after the fanfare period of 5000 ms, the opening period of 29000 ms is set in the first round (1R). After that, the rounds in which the interval period of 2000 ms and the open period of 29000 ms are set are repeated up to 16 rounds, and after the ending period of 11000 ms has elapsed, the special gaming state ends.

The time described in the interval period and the ending period in each opening / closing pattern shown in FIGS. 139 and 140 is the time obtained by adding the remaining ball processing time and the interval time or the ending time. For example, the interval period in the special drawing 1 upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 1 is 2000 ms, of which 1400 ms in the first half is the remaining ball processing time and 600 ms in the latter half is the interval time. Further, the ending period in the special drawing 1 upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 1 is 11000 ms, of which 1400 ms in the first half is the remaining ball processing time and 9600 ms in the latter half is the ending time.

Other opening and closing patterns are the fanfare period, opening period, interval period (including remaining ball processing time) and ending period (including remaining ball processing time) as shown in the figure, and the first special variable winning device is based on this. The 38 or the second special variable winning device 39 is opened. In addition, the opening / closing pattern 5 of the special drawing 2 upper prize opening of FIG. 140 is configured by repeating the opening period of 27200 ms in 5R, opening of 200 ms and closing of 1500 ms 11 times, and then opening of 25,000 ms. In addition, in any opening / closing pattern, if a specified number of prizes are won in each round, the opening period of the round ends at that point.

It should be noted that, for example, in the case of the opening / closing patterns having the same opening / closing mode from the start to the middle of the special gaming state, such as the special drawing 1 upper prize opening opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 and the special drawing 2 upper winning opening opening / closing patterns 2 and 3, the display is displayed. The effect of the device 41 may be the same so that it becomes difficult to distinguish the type of big hit and the type of small hit. Further, the information that enables the determination of the big hit type and the small hit type may be suggested or notified during the special gaming state.

In addition, when a big hit is executed by any of the special drawing 2 upper prize opening opening / closing patterns 4 and 5, whether or not the long opening round is executed again after the end of 4R (whether or not to continue) is produced. You may do it. In this case, for example, if the special figure 2 upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 4 is used, a short opening is performed from 5R to 16R, which is the final round, and the big hit ends. In the above-mentioned special figure 2, the long opening (25000 ms) is performed after the short opening that is substantially the same as the 5R to 16R of the large winning opening opening / closing pattern 4 is performed, and then the same long opening as up to 4R is resumed. .. Therefore, in the case of the special figure 2 upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 4, the time from 5R to 15R is used, and in the case of the special figure 2 upper winning opening opening / closing pattern 5, the time is used during multiple short opening of 5R. If it is the special figure 2 upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 4, the result that the long opening does not resume (the big hit game does not continue) is notified, and if it is the special figure 2 upper winning opening opening / closing pattern 5, the continuous production is performed. By notifying the result that the long opening is resumed (the big hit game is continued), the player's expectation may be fueled.

From the above, the special results include the first special result (big hit) that can generate the first special game state, and the second special game that has a lower game value that can be given to the player than the first special game state. The second special result (small hit) that can generate the state is included.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game. Further, when the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a decorative special figure variable display game. When the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a hit (special result). Further, when the first special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a big hit, and the second special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a small hit, are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a special gaming state.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a gaming ball (pachinko ball) from a launching device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the general winning opening 35 and the first starting winning opening 36, 2nd start winning opening 37, 1st special variable winning device 38 or 2nd special variable winning device 39, or flowing into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the gaming area 32 and discharged from the gaming area 32. Will be done. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, the type of winning opening is changed. A corresponding number of prize balls are discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 141) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

The winning ball to the first starting winning opening 36 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game by the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided inside, and a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) is used as the first starting memory. It is memorized up to the limit. Special Figure 1 When the game ball wins in the first start winning opening 36 while the variable display game can be started and the first start memory number is 0, the first start memory is generated with the generation of the start right. Is stored, the first start memory number is incremented by 1, and the special figure 1 variation display game is immediately started based on the first start memory, and at this time, the first start memory number is subtracted by 1. .. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 variable display game cannot be started immediately, for example, when the special figure 1 variable display game has already been played and the special figure 1 variable display game has not ended, or when the special game state is set. In addition, when the game ball wins in the first start winning opening 36, if the first start memory number is less than the upper limit number, the first start memory number is added by 1 and one first start memory is stored. .. Then, when the special figure 1 variable display game can be started (the end of the previous special figure 1 variable display game or the end of the special gaming state) when the first start storage number is 1 or more, the first The start memory number is subtracted by 1, and the special figure 1 variable display game is started based on the stored first start memory.

The winning ball to the second starting winning opening 37 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game by the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided inside. If there is a prize in the second start winning opening 37 in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, the special figure 2 variable display game is immediately executed based on the winning. Further, when the special figure 2 variable display game cannot be started immediately, for example, when the special figure 2 variable display game has already been played and the special figure 2 variable display game has not ended, or when the special game state is set. In addition, even if the game ball wins in the second start winning opening 37, the second start memory does not occur. If there is a prize in the second start winning opening 37 in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, the second start memory is temporarily generated for the convenience of processing, but the second start memory is Since it will be digested immediately, the second start memory for holding the start of the special figure 2 variable display game does not occur.

Further, when the start winning ball is detected, a big hit random value, a big hit symbol random value, and each fluctuation pattern random value are extracted as start memory information, and the extracted random value is in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 141). The special figure storage area (a part of the RAM) is stored as a special figure start memory up to a predetermined number of times (for example, up to four times for the first start memory). Then, the stored number of the special figure start storage is displayed on the storage display unit 54 (special figure 1 hold display) for notifying the start winning number of the batch display device 50, and also on the display device 41 of the center case 40. Decorative special figure Displayed as a start memory display.

The game control device 100 plays a special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 (first variation display device) based on the winning of the first start winning opening 36 or the first start memory, and the second start. Based on the winning of the winning opening 37, the special figure 2 variable display game is played on the special figure 2 display device 52 (second variable display device). The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, but while one special figure variable display game is being executed, the other special figure variable display game has a special result (big hit or small hit). If this happens, one of the special figure fluctuation display games is terminated as a result other than the special result (missing result).

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, after the variable display is performed in the display mode as shown in FIGS. 133 to 135, the predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result mode (big hit result mode) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes a big hit and becomes the first special game state (so-called big hit state). Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 corresponds to the second special result (small hit result mode). It becomes a small hit and becomes a second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, the special figure 1 display 51 serves as a first variable display means capable of displaying the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36. Further, the special figure 2 display 52 serves as a second variable display means capable of displaying the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 37.

In addition, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, a plurality of types of decorative identification information (numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) are variablely displayed on the display device (image display device) 41. The decoration special figure variation display game to be made to be executed is to be executed. The decorative special figure variable display game includes a decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and a decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game, and these are separate. Is displayed in the display area of. Then, the variation display is performed according to the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed according to the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special map variation display game.

That is, the display device 41 variablely displays the decorative identification information in accordance with the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) (decorative variable display game). It is a decorative variation display means that can display a decorative special figure variation display game). It should be noted that different display devices may be used in the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one of the decorative special figure variable display games may be displayed. Further, the game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the probability of a small hit is higher in the special figure 2 variable display game, but in the case of the normal gaming state which is a low probability state, the variable time is used as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game. Very long (about 10 minutes) long variation is selected. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in terms of time in the normal game state, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at the acquisition of a small hit in the normal game state. I have to. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is advantageous for the player to hit left to aim at the first start winning opening 36 and play the special figure 1 variable display game. The length variation time is about 10 minutes, but it may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.).

Then, when a big hit occurs and a special game state is reached, the first special variable winning device 38 can be aimed by right-handed striking. If the second special variable winning device 39 is opened in a special gaming state based on a big hit or a small hit, it can be aimed by either right-handed or left-handed. After the end of the special gaming state based on the big hit, it becomes a specific gaming state which is a high probability state. In this specific game state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is short, so it is advantageous for the player to hit right to aim at the second start winning opening 37 and play the special figure 2 variable display game. Will be. In the specific gaming state, the opening of the special variable winning device based on the small hit and the opening of the special variable winning device based on the big hit occur frequently, and the player can acquire a large amount of game balls.

FIG. 141 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It is composed of a CPU unit 110 having a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. ..

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and uses an operating clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 or the like to generate. A predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to enable operation. Will be done.

The power supply device 400 is a normal power supply having an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from a DC32V voltage. A power failure monitoring signal that has a unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure. It also includes a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal or a reset signal.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, mainly. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, it is possible to reduce the cost by excluding it from the target of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area of the CPU 111A and a storage area of various signals and random numbers during game control. It is used as. As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start storage to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), which is a fluctuation pattern after the reach state, and fluctuations before the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state (special gaming state) for the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results is already derived and displayed at a stage where it is not yet derived. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas of the display device. When the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle after display and the result mode is displayed, the left and right variable display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example). The state in which the variable display is stopped due to the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display regions is satisfied (for example, the same). The state in which the identification information is used, except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. Further, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variable display game. That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived (when it is out of order) in the special figure variable display game. Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining a hit in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in a special figure variation display game (various types). Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining (including the execution time of the fluctuation display game in reach and non-reach fluctuation display), hit random numbers for determining the hit of the clock fluctuation display game, etc. A clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 is provided. There is.

Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit, small hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state. One of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables based on the number of start storages and the like. Here, the CPU 111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the payout control device 200. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and controls for paying out the lending ball.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a start port 1 switch 36a in the first start winning opening 36, and a start port 2 in the second start winning opening 37. Switch 37a, winning opening switch 35a, a plurality of (1 to x, two in this embodiment) upper large winning opening switch 38a, second special variable winning device 39 arranged in the first special variable winning device 38. An interface chip that is connected to the lower prize opening switch 39a, and a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches is input and converted into a 0V-5V positive logic signal ( Proximity I / F) 121 is provided. Since the input range of the proximity I / F 121 is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is illegally shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut and floats. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as the above and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the upper winning opening switch 38a, and the lower winning opening switch 39a are the second input port 123. Is entered in. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 is detected. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 are also input. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine so that the detection signal is input to the third input port 124.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 to the test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, in the input unit 120, a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting a radio wave) and a payout busy signal (payout control device). Signal indicating whether or not the 200 can accept commands), payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating payout abnormality), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (it is full)), and a touch switch signal (for the input of the touch switch provided on the operation unit 24). A first input port 122 is provided which takes in (based on a signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise is removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing test device. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged in a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like are transmitted via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine controls the game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be achieved. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not go through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test device.

Further, in the output unit 130, opening / closing data of the upper prize opening solenoid 38b, which is connected to the data bus 140 and opens the first special variable winning device 38, and the lower major winning opening solenoid 39b, which opens the second special variable winning device 39. A second output port 134 is provided for outputting. Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device installed in a game store (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.), and can provide information about the game machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signals of the upper winning opening solenoid 38b and the lower winning opening solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal (driving). Circuit) 138a, batch display device output from the second driver 138b and fourth output port 136 that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135. The third driver 138c that outputs the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current drawing side of 50, and the fifth output port 137 that outputs the external information signal supplied to the external device such as the management device to the external information terminal board 71. 4 drivers 138d are provided.

To the first driver 138a, DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a current is passed through the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and a current is drawn from the cathode terminal via the segment wire by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of bilateral communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can send and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the transmission / reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning opening 37, the winning opening switch 35a, and the upper large winning opening switch 38a, the lower prize opening switch 39a is provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as proximity) that detects a game ball by utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. (Called a switch) is used. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like is a micro switch having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 142.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. It is equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A holdable FeRAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timing means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect content, instructs the VDP 312 about the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the playback sound, lights the decorative lamp, and the motor. And the drive control of the solenoid, the management of the production time, etc. are executed.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. The wait signal WAIT etc. for the purpose is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal sync signal HSYNC, and a vertical sync signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An effect control command signal (effect command) such as a decorative special figure hold number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331. ). Since the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 and a glass frame 15 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect provided on a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 and a game board 30 (including a center case 40) for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, a frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided. A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and is provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) and inputting the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300. Is provided, and a switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300. DC32V, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motor and LED, DC5V for power supply voltage of command I / F331, DC15V for driving motor, LED and speaker It is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, the DC- is used to generate DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, VDP312 (VDPREST signal), sound source LSI314, amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc., are output from the main control microcomputer 311. It is supplied to the signal) and puts them in the reset state. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

In these control circuits, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start opening 1 switch 36a provided in the first start winning opening 36, the random value for jackpot determination of the special figure 1 variation display game is extracted. The first start storage is stored in the RAM 111C. The big hit determination random value or the like in the first start storage is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining the hit / miss or the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is performed. Further, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the second start winning opening 37, the random value for jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variation display game is extracted and the second is stored in the RAM 111C. Memorize the start memory. The big hit determination random value or the like in the second start storage is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining the hit / miss or the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is performed. The second start memory can be generated only in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, and the information necessary for starting the special figure 2 variable display game is temporarily stored. , Special Figure 2 The start of the variable display game is not suspended.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variablely displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, a process of displaying the special figure variation display game to be stopped and displayed is performed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37) of the game ball flowing down the game area 32. Make a means.

Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of displaying the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling light emission of various LEDs based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and also displays the special result mode. Performs processing to generate a state. In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111A opens the opening / closing door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38 by, for example, the upper prize winning opening solenoid 38b, so that the game ball can flow into the upper winning opening. Control to do. Alternatively, the lower special winning opening solenoid 39b opens the opening / closing door 39c of the second special variable winning device 39 to control the inflow of the game ball into the lower winning opening.

Then, the large winning opening is opened until either a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins the large winning opening, or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the large winning opening. Opening is defined as one round, and control (cycle game) is performed in which this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this high-probability state, the probability of a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that in the low-probability state. Further, regardless of which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game results in a high probability state, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game Both are in a high probability state.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 143 and 144 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 147 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 143, first, the process of disabling interrupts (step X1) is performed, and then the stack pointer, which is the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs. The stack pointer setting process (step X2) for setting is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X4). In the case of the present embodiment, the range of the RAM address is 0000h to 01FFh, 00h or 01h is taken as the upper rank, and the first 00h is set in step X4. Next, the firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step X5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step X6), and a process of setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step X7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to an instruction from a game control device 100 that is a main control means A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can prevent the command from being missed. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the timing of the power-on delay timer is performed using a storage area (RAM area or register, etc. that is not subject to the validity determination) that is not subject to the validity determination (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the initialization switch 112 is surely performed. Can be detected. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 may be operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the initialization switch 112 may be operated from the power-on to the standby time. You need to keep doing it. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such annoying operations, and the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power. Can be prevented from being unacceptable.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), the process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps X8 to X12) is performed. First, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step X8), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Do (step X9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step X8 (step X10). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks (step X10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X9). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step X10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the start of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X11), and is the timer value 0? Is determined (step X12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step X12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks for the power failure monitoring signal (step X8). When the timer value is 0 (step X12; Y), that is, when the standby time has expired, access permission is granted to the read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM (step X13). ), Output off-data to all output ports (set to no output) (step X14).

Next, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step X15) and read first. However, it is determined from the state of the first input port 122 whether the initialization switch is turned on (step X16).

When the initialization switch is off (step X16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step X17), and it is normal. If (step X17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step X18). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X18; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step X19), and the calculated checksum and the power are turned off. It is determined whether the checksums of the above match (step X20). When the checksums match (step X20; Y), the process proceeds to step X21 in FIG. 144, and processing is performed when the checksum is normally restored from the power failure.

Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step X16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X17; N or step X18; N). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step X20; N), the process proceeds to step X23 in FIG. 144 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

In step X21 of FIG. 144, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step X21). The area to be initialized here is a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal flag area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. It is considered to be indefinite. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is set to an indefinite state indicating that the state has not been determined.

After that, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure status prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X22), and the step. Proceed to X28. In the case of this embodiment, in step X22, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, and a screen designation command are transmitted. As the screen designation command, if both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are in the normal processing described later, that is, the special figure variation display game is not being executed and the special game state is not being executed, the customer is waiting. Send the command of the waiting demo screen, otherwise send the command of the recovery screen. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

On the other hand, when jumping from steps X16, X17, X18, X20 to step X23, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permission (step X23), and all the areas including the busy signal flag area and the touch switch signal status monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step X24), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step X25). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step X26). The area to be initialized here is a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the production mode. Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X27), and the process proceeds to step X28. In the case of this embodiment, in step X27, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, and a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demo screen is displayed and light and sound are displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)). Send multiple commands such as (command to notify RAM initialization). In addition to these commands, depending on the model, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

In step X28, a process of activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. It also includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step X28, a process for starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X29). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) by exchanging them in a predetermined order and storing them as different bit arrangements (arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the values of the predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of turning on the power are extracted, and the corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, the random numbers that determine the winning symbol of the special figure). After saving in a predetermined area of the RWM as an initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number) (step X30), interrupting is permitted (step X31). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it can be difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the initial value random number update process (step X32) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are configured to be generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are the timer interrupt processing that is the processing unit of the program. It is a "slow counter" that is updated based on the CTC output having the same cycle (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing). Further, in the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number, a so-called "initial value change method" is adopted in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes around. It should be noted that each random number may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step X32, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step X33), and the power failure occurs. It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step X34). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X34; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step X32). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step X32) (step X31), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is executed with priority, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to avoid the interrupt processing being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

In addition to the main process, the initial value random number update process in step X32 may be performed in the timer interrupt process as well. If such a method is adopted, both are initially used. In order to avoid executing the value random number update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update and cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing and only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update processing, which causes the main processing. It has the advantage of being simplified.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X34; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step X33 (step X35). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks (step X35; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X34). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step X35; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step X36) is complete. The process of outputting off-data to the output port (step X37) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X38), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X39). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step X40) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off and a process (step X41) for saving the calculated checksum, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step X42). ), And then wait for the power of the gaming machine to be turned off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to the instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control device) that delays the start of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is provided. , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the fact that the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of being operated from the outside, and the initialization operation unit are operated. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C is provided, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation process]
FIG. 145 shows the checksum calculation process (steps X19, X40) in the above-mentioned main process. In this checksum calculation process, first, the start address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address (step X51), the number of repetitions is set (step X52), and "0" is set as the calculated value (step X53). .. The number of bytes of the RAM used is set in the number of repetitions.

After that, the value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is used as a new calculated value (step X54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step X55), the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step X56), and the checksum is checked. It is determined whether or not the calculation of is completed (step X57). If the calculation is not completed (step X57: N), the process returns to step X54 and the above process is repeated. When the calculation is completed (step X57: Y), the checksum calculation process is completed.

[Initial value random number update process]
FIG. 146 shows the initial value random number update process (step X32) in the above-mentioned main process. In this initial value random number update process, first, the big hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step X61), the small hit symbol initial value random number 1 is updated by +1 (step X62), and the initial value random number update process is completed. Here, the "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol in the special symbol variation display game, and the "small hit symbol initial value random number" is the special symbol variation display game. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the small hit stop symbol. In this way, the randomness of the random number can be increased by continuously incrementing the initial value random number as long as time allows in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine that is started in a predetermined cycle. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 147 is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step X101). By switching to the register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same processing as in step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different. Next, input processing from various sensors and switches, signal acquisition, that is, input processing (step X103) for reading the state of each input port is performed. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step X104) for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (upper prize winning opening solenoid 38b, lower winning opening solenoid 39b) is performed. When the firing stop signal is output in step X5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, the signal is not processed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of launch permission as seen from the game control device, and the second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the state of launch permission as seen from the payout control device is also payout control. Generated within the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready to launch.

Next, the payout command transmission process (step X105), the random number update process 1 (step X106), and the random number update process 2 (step X107) for outputting the commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 are performed. After that, monitoring whether there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the upper winning opening switch 38a, and the lower winning opening switch 39a, and monitoring the error. Performs a winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X108) for performing (whether the front frame or the glass frame is open, etc.).

Next, a start port switch monitoring process (step X109) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37. Then, the special figure 1 game process (step X110) for processing the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 game process (step X111) for performing the special figure 2 variable display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step X112), which is provided in the game machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents, a magnetic sensor 61. Magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113) that checks the detection signal from the LED and determines whether there is an abnormality, and the panel radio error that checks the detection signal from the panel radio sensor 62 and determines whether there is an abnormality. The monitoring process (step X114) is performed. Further, an external information editing process (step X115) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.
Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupt) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) are interrupt return processes. It is automatically performed at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, there is also a gaming machine that needs to be instructed to execute a process of restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process of restoring the register bank designation.

[Input processing]
Next, the details of the input process (step X103) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 148, in the input process, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch captured in the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step X121). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step X122), and the state of the read input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step). X123).

Next, the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step X124), and the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step X125).
Then, after preparing the unused bit data (step X126), the bit data to be inverted is prepared (step X127), and the switch reading process (step X128) is performed.

After that, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step X129), and the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step X130).
Then, after preparing the unused bit data (step X131), the bit data to be inverted is prepared (step X132), the switch reading process (step X133) is performed, and the input process is completed.

In the present embodiment, "preparation" means setting a value in a register, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory.
Further, as the information about the unused bit data and the bit data to be inverted, the information prepared corresponding to each input port is used.

[Switch reading process]
Next, the details of the switch reading process (steps X128, X133) in the above-mentioned input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 149, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal captured in the target input port is read (step X141). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step X142), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step X143), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area is reached. Save (store) to (step X144). After that, it waits for the delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading to elapse (step X145).

When the delay time (0.1 ms) has elapsed, the state of the signal captured in the target input port is read a second time (step X146). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step X147), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step X148), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area is reached. Save (store) to (step X149). After that, a definite bit pattern is created in which the bits with the same state are 1 and the bits with different states are 0 in the first and second reads (step X150), and the logical product of the definite bit pattern and the port input state 2 is taken, and this time. It is a fixed bit (step X151).

Next, an undetermined bit pattern is created in which the bits having the same state as 0 and the different bits are set to 1 in the first and second reads (step X152), and the logic between the undetermined bit pattern and the confirmed state at the time of the previous interrupt. The product is taken and used as the last holding bit (step X153). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state in which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed. Then, the fixed bit this time and the holding bit last time are combined and saved as the fixed state this time (step X154), the exclusive OR of the previous and the fixed state this time is taken, and the save is saved as the rising edge (step X155). The switch read process ends.

When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch is read once for each interrupt process, and the signal is changed by comparing with the result of the previous read. There is a method to judge whether or not it has been done, but if it is done so, if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, there is a possibility that the correct judgment cannot be made. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned problems by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (step X104) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 150, in the output process, first, off-data is output (reset) to the port 135 (see FIG. 141) that outputs the data of the segment of the batch display device (LED) 50 (step X161). Next, the data to be output to the solenoid output port 134 that outputs the data of the upper prize-winning port solenoid 38b and the lower prize-winning port solenoid 39b is combined and output (step X162).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit line of the batch display device (LED) 50 is updated (step X163), and the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (step). X164), the acquired information and the external information data are combined (step X165). Then, the combined data is output to the digit output port 136 and the external information output port 137 (step X166). After that, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step X167), and the loaded data is output to the port 135 for segment output (step X168).

Subsequently, the data to be output to the external information terminal board 71 is loaded and synthesized (step X169), the combined data and the launch permission output data are combined (step X170), and the combined data is used for external information output. Output to port 137 (step X171). Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step X172). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step X173).

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step X174). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( Step X175). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step X176), and the output process is terminated.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step X105) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 151, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step X181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and the winning number counter area 1 and the winning number counter area 2 are provided. The prize number counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out the prize ball, and the prize has not yet been sent. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a prize ball command counter that can store information regarding the prize ball command.

The prize number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main prize ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number) generated by winning a prize in the prize opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). The winning data corresponding to the prize balls that are used and have not been processed to generate the main prize ball signal is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main prize ball signal counter that can store information about the main prize ball signal. In addition to this main prize ball signal, the payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200 reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). By collating these two signals, it is possible to monitor fraudulent payouts.

Each of these prize number counter areas is provided with a prize number counter area for each prize ball number set for each prize opening (for example, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls). Therefore, the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area is added by 1 based on the winning of the winning opening. That is, it is possible to store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the winning area. The winning number counter area 1 is allocated to a wider area than the winning number counter area 2, so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, whereas the payout command may suspend the transmission depending on the state of the payout control device 200 which is the destination, and more untransmitted. This is because data may be accumulated.

In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the prize number counter area 2 (step X181), among the plurality of prize number counter areas provided for each prize ball number, "0" is set in the prize number counter area to be checked. Determine if there is a non-count count. Then, when there is no count number (step X181: N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step X182), and it is determined whether the check of the count number of all the winning number counter areas is completed. (Step X183). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step X183; Y), the process proceeds to step X192. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step X183; N), the process returns to step X181 and the above process is repeated.

Further, when it is determined in step X181 that there is a count number (step X181; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (step X184), and the target winning number counter. Acquire the number of payouts corresponding to the area (step X185). Then, the value of the prize ball remaining number area and the acquired number of payouts are added to obtain a new prize ball remaining number (step X186), and the game is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step X187). As the value of the prize ball remaining number area before this processing, a fraction that is less than a predetermined number that is a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

After that, 10 which is a predetermined number as a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is subtracted from the addition result (step X188), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step X189). If the subtraction result is not 0 or more (step X189; N), the process proceeds to step X192. In this case, since the subtracted result is not saved in the prize ball remaining number area, the value before subtraction is stored in the prize ball remaining number area. When the subtraction result is 0 or more (step X189; Y), the value in the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (step X190), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step X191). , Return to step X188.

As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in connection with the winning of the game ball to a predetermined winning area to the outside of the game machine. .. By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of game balls such as during a big hit is concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game ball, and the accuracy generated during the big hit It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted.

In step X192, if the payout command transmission timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become 0 (step X193). If the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (step X193; N), the payout command transmission process ends. When the payout command transmission timer is 0 (step X193; Y), it is determined whether the payout busy signal flag is busy (step X194).

The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control, and if the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is turned on. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be accepted. That is, the payout busy signal forms a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control. The payout busy signal flag is information that sets whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control based on the state of the payout busy signal, and is an idle state or payout that can immediately start payout control. Either a busy state in which control cannot be started immediately or an indefinite state in which the state is indefinite is set.

The indefinite state is set, for example, by clearing the busy signal flag area in the process when the power is turned on. This indefinite state is set to an idle state or a busy state based on the state of the payout busy signal being maintained for a predetermined period of time indicating that the payout control can or cannot be started immediately. It will be solved with. That is, when a power failure occurs and the device recovers from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, a prize ball command is immediately issued to the payout control device 200. The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 in response to the continuous output of the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 without transmission. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and surely grasps that the payout process can be performed immediately before transmitting the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It is possible to prevent it from being damaged.

When the payout busy signal flag is busy (step X194; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. Here, even if the state is indefinite, it is determined that the user is busy. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not send the payout command, it is possible to perform unnecessary processing by not performing the subsequent processing related to the transmission of the payout command. It is designed to prevent and reduce the burden of control.

When the payout busy signal flag is not busy (step X194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step X195). In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the prize number counter area 1 (step X195), among the plurality of prize number counter areas provided for each prize ball number, "0" is set in the prize number counter area to be checked. Determine if there is a non-count count.

Then, when there is no count in the winning number counter area to be checked (step X195; N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step X196), and all the winning number counter areas are covered. It is determined whether the check of the count number is completed (step X197). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step X197; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step X197; N), the process returns to step X195 and the above process is repeated.

Further, if it is determined in step X195 that there is a count number in the winning number counter area to be checked (step X195; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step). X198), the payout command corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 1 is acquired (step X199). Then, the acquired command is written to the payout serial transmission buffer (step X200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step X201), and the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and for example, 200 ms is set as an initial value.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one prize in the prize area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls based on this payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start the payout control can start the payout control. If so, it serves as a prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means.

Since the game control device 100 controls to transmit the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200 in this way, the prize is awarded only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winning that has not been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 in the event of a power failure and is backed up by the payout control device 200. Accurate payout control can be achieved without having the function to do so.

In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine of JP-A-2000-321759), when a power cutoff state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data to its own storage means and immediately before the power cutoff. The payout control state based on the data of is maintained. However, the conventional gaming machine requires a function for backing up, which has a problem of increasing the cost. According to the present invention, it is possible to realize accurate payout control even if the payout control device 200 does not have a function for backing up.

In addition, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay, and the prize ball is paid out by an external device such as a hall computer. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be accurately grasped. Further, since the prize ball command counter that can store the information about the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter that can store the information about the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball with different transmission timings are provided. The signal information can be managed separately, and the information can be managed reliably.

Based on the above, the game is controlled comprehensively, and the winning areas provided in the game area 32 (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35, first special variable winning device 38). , The game control means (game control device 100) that transmits a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball to the second special variable prize device 39), and the game based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. A payout control means (payout control device 200) for controlling payout of balls is provided, and the game control means is a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control. A state signal indicating that the payout control means can start payout control when a power failure occurs and the player recovers from the power failure by controlling the transmission of a prize ball command to the payout control means based on (busy signal). Even if is output, the prize ball command is not immediately transmitted to the payout control means, and a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is continuously output from the payout control means over a predetermined period. In response to this, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means.

Further, in the game area 32, prize areas having different numbers of prize balls (first start winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35, first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39) are provided. A plurality of game control means (game control device 100) are provided, and a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying whether or not a prize ball command for instructing payout control of a game ball has not been transmitted for each number of prize balls. When the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started and each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control means (payout control device 200). The state signal is transmitted, and the identification of whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control is performed before the specification of whether or not each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command. You are trying to do it.

In addition to comprehensively controlling the game, the predetermined winning areas (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35, first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39) are performed. ), The game control means (game control device 100) that transmits a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball, and the payout control that controls the payout of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. The game control means includes means (payout control device 200), and the game control means can start payout control by a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control, which is output from the payout control means. The prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) that transmits the prize ball command to the payout control means when indicating that, and the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the predetermined winning area. A state in which an external information output means (game control device 100) for outputting a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal) including information about the game machine to the outside of the game machine is provided, and the external information output means is output from the payout control means. The signal outputs the prize ball signal regardless of whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control.

Further, even if the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) indicates that the status signal can start the payout control when a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command is issued in response to the state in which the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started continues for a predetermined period. It means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

Further, the game control means (game control device 100) has a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) that can store information about the prize ball command and a prize that can store information about the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100) is provided, and the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) is provided with a predetermined winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35). , 1st special variable winning device 38, 2nd special variable winning device 39) is generated in units of one winning ball command, and the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started. The prize ball command is configured to be transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) is information on the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area. Is memorable, and the prize ball command that has not been transmitted is updated at the time of winning the game ball to the predetermined winning area, and is updated in correspondence with the transmission to the prize ball command to the payout control means. The number of prize balls is memorable, and the external information output means accumulates the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the predetermined winning area, and the prize ball signal is output every time the accumulated value reaches the predetermined number. The prize ball signal counter is configured to be output to the outside of the game machine, and can store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the predetermined winning area, and the winning ball is won in the predetermined winning area. By updating at times and updating in correspondence with the cumulative processing of the number of prize balls by the external information output means, it is possible to store the number of prize balls that have not been cumulatively processed yet.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 152 shows the random number update process 1 (step X106) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 147). The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number, which are the targets of the initial value random number update process. In this random number update process 1, first, it is determined whether the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X221).

When the big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step X221; N), it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X224). When the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step X221; Y), the jackpot symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step X222), and the next initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number is supported. It is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the random number counter (random number area) to be used (step X223). After that, it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X224).

When the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step X224; N), the random number update process 1 is terminated. When the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step X224; Y), the small hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step X225), and the next initial initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number is loaded. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step X226), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 153 shows the random number update process 2 (step X107) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 147). The random number update process 2 is a process for updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variable pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variable pattern random numbers 1) as variable pattern random numbers, and the random number update process 2 updates both of them. Then, every time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. Moreover, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (random number for determining the reach variation mode) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is configured to be.

In the random number update process 2, first, the random number update scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be the target of the current update process is updated (step X231). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step X232). Then, the upper limit determination value of the random number is acquired from the referenced table based on the calculated address (step X233). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

Subsequently, for example, the value of the M1 counter provided in the gaming microcomputer in this embodiment is loaded (step X234). Randomness can be given to random numbers by using the value of the M1 counter. Next, the mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step X235). The mask value has a different number of bits depending on the random number to be updated, for example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter and the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 are used. Is set to the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter when updating. This is because the upper limit differs depending on the type of random number. As the mask value, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated when the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, and the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated when the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated. Although 4 bits are illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited to this.

Next, it is determined whether the random number region (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236). When the random number region is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236; Y), the value remaining by masking the upper 1 byte as the addition value with the mask value of the M1 counter (hereinafter, this is used). The mask update value is set by adding "1" to the masked value), the lower 1 byte is set to "0" (step X237), and the process proceeds to step X239. When the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to "0" and the lower 1 byte is set to the above mask update value as the addition value (step). X238), the process proceeds to step X239. The reason for adding "1" to the masked value is to avoid that the masked value may become "0", and if "0" is added later, it does not change from the value before addition. be.

Then, it is determined whether the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step X239), and when it is a 2-byte random number (step X239; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (step X240). , Step X242. When the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step X239; N), "0" is set as the upper 1 byte of the random number value, and the value of the random number area to be updated (1 byte) is set as the lower 1 byte of the random number value. ) Is set (step X241), and the process proceeds to step X242.

In step X242, a value obtained by adding the added value determined in step X237 or X238 to the random number value is used as a new random number value, and it is determined whether the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step X233 (step). X243). Then, when the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step X243; N), the new random number value is saved in the random number area lower than the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step X245). When the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step X243; Y), the value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random number value is used as the new random number value again (step X244), and this value is set to 1. Save in the random number area lower than the byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step X245).

Next, it is determined whether the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step X246), and if it is not a 2-byte random number (step X246; N), the random number update process 2 is terminated. Further, in the case of a 2-byte random number (step X246; Y), a new random number value (the value when a new random number value is calculated again) is saved in a random number area higher than the 2-byte random number (step X247). ), The random number update process 2 is terminated.

In this way, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. Therefore, the CPU 111A has a variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game ball into the start region of the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37. It serves as a random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining.

[Winning opening switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 154 shows the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X107) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 147). In this winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, a winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the upper winning opening switches 38a in the upper winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step X301). , Even though the big winning opening is not open, the fraud & winning monitoring process (step X302) for monitoring whether there is an illegal winning in the big winning opening and detecting a normal winning is executed.

In the winning opening monitoring table (fraud monitoring table), a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input in the target switch, a lower address of fraud monitoring information, a lower address of the fraudulent winning number area, and a fraudulent winning error Information on the notification command, the upper limit of the number of fraudulent winnings (the number of fraud occurrence determinations), the address of the winning slot switch table, and the notification timer update information (permission / update) are defined. Further, information on the number of repetitions of monitoring (number of switches), the monitoring switch bit, the address of the winning number counter area 1 and the address of the winning number counter area 2 is defined in the winning opening switch table. These fraud monitoring tables and winning tables are prepared according to each of the switches to be monitored.

After that, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other lower major winning opening switch 39a in the lower major winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) is prepared (step X303), and is monitored for illegal winning. The fraudulent & winning monitoring process (step X304) for detecting a normal winning is executed. Next, prepare a winning opening monitoring table for winning opening switches (here, starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a, winning opening switch 35a of general winning opening 35) that can always win (step X305), and the number of winning openings. The winning number counter update process (step X306) is performed. Then, the special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring process for monitoring the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state scheduled to be executed mainly for the special figure 1 variable display game is performed (step X307).

Next, the status scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored for status should be monitored this time is updated (step X308). This status scan counter is updated in the range 0-3. After that, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step X309). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step X310) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

By referring to the value of the status scan counter in the game machine status monitoring table 1, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status can be monitored based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of a switch connector disconnection or the like. When the value of the status scan counter is set to 1, monitoring of the status based on the shoot-out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the status scan counter is 2, the status monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 3, the status monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set.

Next, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step X311). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step X312) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

By referring to the value of the state scan counter to the game machine state monitoring table 2, if the value of the state scan counter is 0, the state monitoring based on the signal output from the glass frame opening detection switch is set, and the state scan is set. When the value of the counter is 1, the monitoring of the state based on the signal output from the front frame opening detection switch is set. Further, when the value of the state scan counter is 2, the monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave invalid signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, the monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is set.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the status scan counter is 0 (step X313), and if the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (step X313; N), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no status monitoring target in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. When the value of the error scan counter is 0 (step X313; Y), the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (step X314), and the gaming machine status check for determining the status such as whether an error has occurred is determined. The process (step X315) is performed.

By referring to the value of the status scan counter in the game machine status monitoring table 3, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status can be monitored based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to the occurrence of the switch connector disconnection or the like. Set. It should be noted that the game machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counters are 1 to 3.

After that, the payout busy signal check process (step X316) for setting the busy signal flag based on the payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start the payout control is performed, and the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is completed. do. Since the processes of steps X314 to X316 are executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is 0, the processes are executed once for every four timer interrupts. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processes of steps X314 to X316 are performed every 16 ms.

[Illegal & winning monitoring process]
FIG. 155 shows the fraudulent & winning monitoring processing (steps X302, X304) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / status monitoring processing. This fraud & winning monitoring process is a process performed on each of the two upper prize opening switches 38a of the first special variable winning device 38 and the lower major winning opening switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39. As for the large prize openings (special variable prize devices 38 and 39), fraud is likely to be performed by forcibly opening the opening / closing door to insert a game ball and pay out the prize ball, so fraud is monitored in addition to detecting the prize. ..

In this fraud & winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning port switch to be error-monitored is checked (step X321), and it is determined whether or not the fraud monitoring period is in progress (step X322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened when the winning opening switch to be error-monitored is the upper large winning opening switch 38a, and the winning opening to be error-monitored. When the switch is the lower large winning opening switch 39a, it is a period other than the special gaming state in which the second special variable winning device 39 is opened.

Then, in the case of the fraud monitoring period (step X322; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the target winning opening switch (step X323). When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step X323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step X332). Further, when there is an input in the target winning opening switch (step X323; Y), the number of target fraudulent winnings is updated by +1 (step X324), and the number of fraudulent winnings after addition is the number of fraud occurrence determinations to be monitored (for example). It is determined whether the number exceeds 5) (step X325).

The reason why the number of judgments is 5 is that, for example, when the large winning opening in the open state is converted to the closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the large winning opening, and the game ball is the valid period of the large winning opening switch. This is to prevent it from being judged as illegal when a prize is won or when there is noise in the signal, and it is not easily judged as an error even though it is not illegal.

Then, when the number of determined items is not exceeded (step X325; N), the winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step X330). When the number of determined items is exceeded (step X325; Y), the number of illegal winnings is limited to the number of illegal winnings (step X326), and the initial value (for example, 60,000 ms) is saved in the target illegal winning notification timer area (step). X327). Next, a target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step X328), a fraudulent prize occurrence flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step X329), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340). ).

On the other hand, when it is not the fraud monitoring period (step X322; N), the winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step X330), and the winning number counter update process (step X331) for setting the winning ball is performed. .. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step X332), and whether or not the notification timer update permission is permitted is determined (step X333). Then, when the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step X333; N), the fraudulent & winning monitoring process is terminated. When the update of the notification timer is permitted (step X333; Y), if the target notification timer is not 0, the notification timer is updated by -1 (step X334). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to 0.

The update of the notification timer is permitted when the winning opening switch to be error-monitored is one of the upper winning opening switches 38a, and is permitted when the winning opening switch to be error-monitored is the other upper winning opening switch 38a. Not done. As a result, regarding the fraudulent notification of the first special variable winning device 38, the notification timer is updated twice as often, and it is prevented that the time is up in half of the specified time (for example, 60,000 ms). .. When the winning opening switch to be error-monitored is the lower large winning opening switch 39a, the update of the notification timer is always permitted.

After that, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step X335), and if the value is not 0 (step X335; N), that is, if the time is not up, the fraudulent & winning monitoring process is terminated. If the value is 0 (step X335; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been timed up, the target fraud release command is prepared (step X336), and the fraudulent prize cancellation flag is set as the fraud flag. Prepare (step X337). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338).

When the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & prize monitoring process, the target number of illegal prizes is cleared (step X338; Y). Step X339), the prepared fraudulent flag is compared with the value of the target fraudulent flag area (step X340). If it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338; N), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the fraud & winning monitoring process before the previous time, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. Compare with the value of the invalid flag area (step X340).

Then, when the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area match (step X340; Y), the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared invalid flag and the value of the target invalid flag area do not match (step X340; N), the prepared invalid flag is saved in the target invalid flag area (step X341), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step X342), the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. By the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an illegal winning error release command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is released, and the start and end of the error notification are set. Will be done.

[Winning number counter update process]
FIG. 156 shows the winning number counter update processing (steps X306, X331) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / status monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing. In this winning number counter update process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning opening switch table of the winning opening monitoring table (step X351), and the number is input to the target winning opening switch (to be exact, the input is changed). ) Is present (step X352).

When there is no input (step X352: N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X361), and it is determined whether the monitoring of all switches is completed (step X362). When there is an input (step X352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step X353), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X354), and it is determined whether or not the overflow occurs (step X354). Step X355). When no overflow has occurred (step X355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step X356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X357). ). Further, when an overflow occurs (step X355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X357).

After loading the value of the target winning number counter area 2 (step X357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X358), and it is determined whether or not the overflow occurs (step X359). If no overflow has occurred (step X359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step X360), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X361). ), It is determined whether the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step X362). When an overflow occurs (step X359; Y), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X361), and it is determined whether the monitoring of all switches is completed (step X362).

When the monitoring of all the switches is not completed (step X362; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not there is an input in the target winning opening switch (step X352). When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step X362; Y), the winning number counter update process is terminated. By the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning in the winning area, and the winning information is stored.

[Direction command setting process]
FIG. 157 shows the effect command setting process (step X342) in the above-mentioned fraud & prize monitoring process. Note that this effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process. In this effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step X371), and it is determined whether the transmission buffer is full (step X372).

If the transmission buffer is full (step X372; Y), the process returns to step X371. If the transmission buffer is not full (step X372; N), the command data (MODE (upper byte)) is written to the production serial transmission buffer (step X373), and the status of the serial transmission buffer is read (step X374). , Determining if the transmit buffer is full (step X375).

If the transmission buffer is full (step X375; Y), the process returns to step X374. If the transmission buffer is not full (step X375; N), the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step X376), and the effect command setting process is terminated.

As described above, by transmitting the command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, the burden on the game control device 100 can be reduced and the analysis of the command can be made difficult. In addition, the command transmission timing can be accelerated and the number of data lines can be reduced. Further, the effect control device 300 does not need to capture commands in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced.

[Special Figure 2 Abnormal change monitoring processing]
FIG. 158 shows the special figure 2 abnormality change monitoring process (step X307) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is advantageous for the player to play the special figure 1 variable display game in the normal gaming state which is a low probability state, but the player who does not know this is advantageous. Alternatively, it is conceivable that a player who intentionally aims to execute the special figure 2 variable display game makes a right-handed strike. In the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation monitoring process, a process is performed to notify such a player to perform a left-handed strike.

In this special figure 2 abnormality change monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a special figure 1 change check flag (step X381). The special figure 1 check flag is a flag set when the special figure 1 variable display game is started in a low probability state. When the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is not present (step X381; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is present (step X387). When the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is present (step X381; Y), the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is cleared (step X382), and the special figure 1 fluctuation number is updated by +1 (step X383).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations in the special figure 1 is smaller than the specified value (for example, 18) (step X384), and when it is smaller than the specified value (step X384; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is present. Determination (step X387). Further, when the value is larger than the specified value (step X384; N), the number of abnormal fluctuations of the special figure 2 added by executing the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the normal gaming state (low probability state) must be 0. If -1 is updated (step X385), the special figure 1 fluctuation number is cleared to 0 (step X386), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is present (step X387). The minimum value of the number of abnormal fluctuations in Special Figure 2 is set to 0.

The special figure 2 check flag is a flag set when the special figure 2 variable display game is started in a low probability state. In the determination of whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is present (step X387), if the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is not present (step X387; N), the process proceeds to step X390. If there is a special figure 2 check flag (step X387; Y), the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is cleared (step X388), the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is updated by +1 (step X389), and the special figure 2 is checked. 2 It is determined whether the number of abnormal fluctuations is smaller than the specified value (for example, 5) (step X390).

When the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is not smaller than the specified value (step X390; N), the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is kept at the specified value (step X391), and the special figure 2 abnormal change notification timer is set to the initial value (for example). 60000 ms) is set (step X392). Next, the special figure 2 abnormal change occurrence flag is prepared (step X393), the special figure 2 abnormal change occurrence command is prepared (step X394), and the process proceeds to step X399. In this case, although it is a normal game state (low probability state) in which it is recommended to hit left and proceed with the game mainly in the special figure 1 variable display game, the player hits right and special. FIG. 2 is a case where a variable display game is being executed, and processing is performed to notify the player to make a left-handed strike.

On the other hand, when the number of abnormal fluctuations in the special figure 2 is smaller than the specified value (step X390; Y), the special figure 2 abnormal change notification timer is updated by -1 (step X395), and it is determined whether the time is up (step X396). ). If the time is not up (step X396; N), the special figure 2 abnormality change monitoring process is terminated. When the time is up (step X396; Y), the special figure 2 abnormal change release flag is prepared (step X397), and the special figure 2 abnormal change release command is prepared (step X398).

After that, it is determined whether the prepared flag is the same as the value of the current special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area (step X399). Then, when the prepared flag and the value of the current special figure 2 abnormal change flag area are the same (step X399; Y), that is, when there is no change in the state, the special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the prepared flag and the value of the current special figure 2 abnormal change flag area are not the same (step X399; N), that is, when there is a change in the state, the prepared flag is the special figure 2 abnormal change release flag. (Step X400).

If the prepared flag is not the special figure 2 abnormal change release flag (step X400; N), that is, if it is the special figure 2 abnormal change occurrence flag, the prepared flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal change flag area (step). X402), the effect command setting process is performed, and the special figure 2 abnormality change monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, when the prepared flag is the special figure 2 abnormal change release flag (step X400; Y), the special figure 2 abnormal change number is cleared to 0 (step X401), and then the processes of steps X402 and X403 are performed. (Step X403), the special figure 2 abnormality change monitoring process is terminated. By the above processing, the special figure 2 abnormal change generation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 with the detection of the special figure 2 abnormal change, and the special figure 2 abnormal change release command is sent to the effect control device with the release of the special figure 2 abnormal change. It is transmitted to 300, and the start and end of the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation notification are set.

FIGS. 159 and 160 show an example of the processing by the special figure 2 abnormality change monitoring process accompanying the progress of the game. In the example shown in FIG. 159, in the normal gaming state, the number of abnormal fluctuations in Special Figure 2 is 3, and the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 1 is 15. When the next special figure 1 variation display game is started from this state (t11), the special figure 1 variation number changes from 15 to 16. Further, when the special figure 2 variation display game is started (t12), the number of special figure 2 abnormal fluctuations changes from 3 to 4.

After that, every time the special figure 1 variation display game is started, the special figure 1 variation number is updated by +1 (t13, t14). Here, when the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 1 reaches the specified value of 18 (t14), the number of abnormal fluctuations in Special Figure 2 is updated by -1 and changes from 4 to 3, and the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 1 is cleared to 0. To. Similarly, every time the special figure 1 variation display game is started, the special figure 1 variation number is updated by +1 (t15 to t17), and when the special figure 1 variation number reaches the specified value of 18 (t17), The number of abnormal fluctuations in Special Figure 2 is updated by -1 and changes from 3 to 2, and the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 1 is cleared to 0. That is, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is subtracted every time the specified number (here, 18 times) of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is executed.

FIG. 160 shows a case where the special figure 2 abnormality change notification is performed. In this example, in the normal gaming state, the number of abnormal fluctuations in Special Figure 2 is 3. When the special figure 2 variation display game is started from this state (t21), the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is updated from 3 to 4. Further, when the special figure 2 variation display game is started (t22), the special figure 2 abnormal variation number reaches the specified value of 5.

As a result, the special figure 2 abnormal change occurrence flag is saved, and based on this flag, external information indicating that the special figure 2 abnormal change has occurred and the game machine error status signal are started to be output to the device outside the game machine. It is possible to grasp the occurrence of special figure 2 abnormal fluctuations with a management device of a game store or the like. Further, a command for generating an abnormal change in FIG. 2 is transmitted to the effect control device 300. Based on the reception of this command, the effect control device 300 notifies that an abnormal change has occurred in Special Figure 2 by display, voice, or the like.

Further, when the number of abnormal fluctuations in Special Figure 2 reaches the specified value of 5, the time counting by the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation notification timer is started (t22), and the predetermined time (60 seconds in this case) elapses (60 seconds in this case). t23), the number of abnormal fluctuations in Special Figure 2 is cleared to 0, and the output of external information and the game machine error status signal is stopped. Further, a special figure 2 abnormality change release command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 ends the notification that the special figure 2 abnormality change has occurred based on the reception of this command. If the special figure 2 variable display game is newly started before the elapse of the predetermined time, the time counting of the predetermined time is newly started from that time.

In this way, by determining that the special figure 2 abnormal variation has occurred based on the fact that the special figure 2 abnormal variation number reaches the specified value (for example, 5), for example, the game ball unintentionally enters the game area on the right side. Therefore, when a prize is won in the second start winning opening 37, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 from being immediately determined to be an abnormal change. Furthermore, by playing the special figure 1 variation display game a predetermined number of times, the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is subtracted, so that the special figure 2 abnormal variation generated for the unintended winning of the second starting winning opening 37 The number will be resolved if the game is played after that, and it is possible to prevent a mere mistake or the result of another player's game from accumulating and being determined to be an abnormal variation in Special Figure 2.

In addition, the specified value of the special figure 2 abnormal variation number to be notified of the special figure 2 abnormal change and the specified value of the special figure 1 variable number to be subtracted from the special figure 2 abnormal change number are arbitrarily set. It is configurable. Each of the specified values set here may be any value as long as it can prevent the player from aiming at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state. If a power failure occurs and the system recovers, monitoring should be resumed from the state before the power failure. In addition, even if the special figure 2 abnormality change notification is performed, the prize balls will be paid out as usual for the prize.

[Game machine status check process]
FIG. 161 shows the gaming machine state check process (steps X310, X312, X315) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this gaming machine state check process, first, a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter is acquired (step X451), and it is determined whether the signal to be monitored is on (step X452).

Information corresponding to the status scan counter is defined in the status monitoring table. This information includes, for example, the lower address of the start address of the state monitoring area, the lower address of the port input state area of the switch control area where the target signal information is stored, the mask data for extracting only the bit of the target signal, and the signal. On judgment data, status off command (in the case of an error system, an error notification end command is issued), status on command (in the case of an error system, an error notification start command is issued), status off monitoring timer comparison value, status on monitoring timer Includes comparison values.

When the target signal is not on (step X452: N), the state off flag is prepared as the state flag (step X453), and the target state off command is acquired and prepared (step X454). After that, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step X455), and the value in the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step X459). When the target signal is not on (step X452: N), it is a state indicating that the error type signal is not an error (normal), and is a state indicating that the signal from the touch switch is not touched. be.

On the other hand, when the target signal is on (step X452: Y), the state on flag is prepared as the state flag (step X456), and the target state on command is acquired and prepared (step X457). After that, the target state-on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step X458), and the value in the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step X459). When the target signal is on (step X452: Y), it is a state indicating that the error-type signal is an error (abnormal or invalid), and the signal from the touch switch is touched. It is a state showing.

When the value of the target signal control area and the current signal state match (step X459; Y), that is, when the signal state has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X462). , It is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463). Further, when the value of the target signal control area and the state of the current signal do not match (step X459; N), that is, when the state of the signal changes, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area (step X459; N). Step X460). Then, the target status monitoring timer is cleared (step X461), the target status monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X462), and it is determined whether the value of the target status monitoring timer is equal to or higher than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X461). Step X463).

If the value of the target status monitoring timer is not equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463; N), the gaming machine status check process ends. When the value of the target status monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463: Y), the status monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the comparison value of -1 (step X464). The state flag is compared with the value of the target state flag area (step X465).

Then, when the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area match (step X465; Y), the gaming machine state check process ends. If the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area do not match (step X465; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step X466), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step X467), the game machine state check process is completed. As a result, the state off command prepared in step X454 or the state on command prepared in X457 is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 162 shows the payout busy signal check process (step X316) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step X471). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start the payout control.

When the payout busy signal is not on (step X471; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step X472), and an off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step X473). When the payout busy signal is on (step X471; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step X474), and an on confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step X475). ..

After that, it is determined whether the value in the busy signal state region is the same as the state of the current signal, that is, whether there is a change of on or off (step X476), and if they are the same (step X476; Y), The busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X479). If they are not the same (step X476; N), the current signal state is saved in the busy signal state region (step X477), the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (step X478), and the busy signal monitoring timer is set. Update by +1 (step X479).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is larger than the previously set on-determination monitoring timer comparison value or off-determination monitoring timer comparison value, that is, whether the signal confirmation time (for example, 32 ms) has been reached (step). X480).
If the signal confirmation time has not been reached (step X480; N), the payout busy signal check process is terminated. When the signal confirmation time is reached (step X480; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1, and the previously set on-determination monitoring timer comparison value or off-determination monitoring timer comparison value of -1 is set. (Step X481), the prepared state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step X482), and the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

By this process, the busy signal flag is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, the busy signal flag is not changed immediately even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, but the busy signal flag is changed when the changed state continues for the signal confirmation time. It is less likely to be affected by such factors.

Further, since the busy signal flag is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal flag is not set and the state becomes indefinite until any signal state continues for the signal confirmation time. As a result, when a power failure occurs and the device recovers from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued to the payout control device 200 even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200. A prize ball command is issued to the payout control device 200 in response to a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200, which is not transmitted to the payout control device 200. Will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and surely grasps that the payout process can be performed immediately before transmitting the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It is possible to prevent it from being damaged.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (step X109) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 163, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, the start port 1 (first start winning port 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step X491), and the hard random number acquisition process is performed (step X492). Then, it is determined whether or not there is start opening winning information that is set when a big hit random number is acquired based on the winning to the first starting winning opening 36 in the hard random number acquisition process (step X493).

If the information with the starting opening winning is not set based on the winning to the first starting winning opening 36 (step X493; N), the process proceeds to step X499. In this case, the information that there is no starting opening prize is set. On the other hand, when the information with the starting opening winning is set based on the winning to the first starting winning opening 36 (step X493; Y), it is determined whether or not the probability is low (step X494). Then, when the probability is low (step X494; Y), the process proceeds to step X497. If the probability is not low (step X494; N), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X495), and an effect command setting process is performed (step X496). After that, a table for setting the information of the hold by the start port 1 is prepared (step X497), and the special figure start port 1 switch process is performed (step X498).

Based on the reception of the right-handed instruction notification command, the effect control device 300 performs right-handed instruction notification instructing the player to perform right-handed by display, voice, or the like. Right-handed is more advantageous for the player when in a high-probability state, and when a prize is detected in the high-probability state at the first starting winning opening 36, which is designed to win only if left-handed. Right-handed instruction notification is performed.

Next, a winning monitoring table for starting port 2 (second starting winning opening 37) is prepared (step X499), a hard random number acquisition process is performed (step X500), and a big hit random number is generated based on the winning to the second starting winning opening 37. It is determined whether or not there is information on the starting opening winning that is set when the acquisition is made (step X501).

If the start opening winning information is not set based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 37 (step X501; N), the starting opening switch monitoring process is terminated. In this case, the information that there is no starting opening prize is set. On the other hand, when the information with the starting opening winning is set based on the winning to the second starting winning opening 37 (step X501; Y), it is determined whether or not the probability is high (step X502). Then, when the probability is high (step X502; Y), the process proceeds to step X507. Further, when the probability is not high (step X502; N), it is determined whether the player is in the big hit, that is, in the first special game state which is the special game state based on the big hit (step X503).

If the jackpot is in progress (step X503; Y), the process proceeds to step X507. Further, when the jackpot is not hit (step X503; N), it is determined whether the final fluctuation is in high probability (step X504). The high-probability final fluctuation is during the execution (including the stop time) of the special figure fluctuation display game for a predetermined number of times (here, the 50th time) from the end of the first special game state, and the lottery in the high-probability state. Is running the last special figure variation display game that was played.

If this high-probability final fluctuation is in progress (step X504; Y), the process proceeds to step X507. If the final fluctuation with high probability is not in progress (step X504; N), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X505), and an effect command setting process is performed (step X506). After that, a table for setting the hold information by the start port 2 is prepared (step X507), the special figure start port 2 switch process is performed (step X508), and the start port switch monitoring process is completed.

Based on receiving the left-handed instruction notification command, the effect control device 300 performs left-handed instruction notification instructing the player to perform left-handed by display, voice, or the like. Left-handed is more advantageous for the player when in a low-probability state, and when a prize is detected in the low-probability state at the second starting winning opening 37, which is designed to win only if right-handed. The left-handed instruction is notified.

In the first special game state, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened except for some big hit types, so that the left-handed instruction notification is not performed even in the low probability state. Further, in the special figure variation display game that is executed last in the high probability state, the probability state is changed to the low probability state after the lottery at the start of the game, so that the probability state is low during the game, but the game is high. Since the judgment is made based on the probability state, there is a high possibility that a special game state will occur, and since the specific game state is produced until the end of the game, the left-handed instruction notification is not performed.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
FIG. 164 shows a hard random number acquisition process (steps X492, X500) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process. In this hard random number acquisition process, first, information on no winning opening is set (step X511), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target switch (step X512).

If there is no input to the target switch (step X512; N), the hard random number acquisition process ends. When the target switch has an input (step X512; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step X513), and it is determined whether or not the target random number latch register has latch data (step X514).

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step X514; N), the hard random number acquisition process ends. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step X514; Y), the jackpot random number extracted in the target hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step X515). Then, the start opening winning information is set (step X516), and the hard random number acquisition process is completed.

[Special figure start port 1 switch processing]
FIG. 165 shows the special figure start port 1 switch process (step X498) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process. In this special figure start port 1 switch process, first, the number of times the start port signal 1 is output, which is the number of times the information regarding the number of times the prize is won to the first start winning port 36 is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10, is loaded. (Step X521), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X522), and it is determined whether the number of outputs overflows (step X523). When the number of outputs does not overflow (step X523; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal 1 output count area of the RWM (step X524), and the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number). Is less than the upper limit value (step X525). On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525. Here, the number of outputs can be stored up to 255, but if the number of outputs is stored up to the upper limit, the value is not saved after the update because it loops due to +1 update and becomes 0.

When the number of special figure 1 hold is less than the upper limit value (4 in this case) (step X525; Y), the special figure 1 information setting flag used for sorting the fluctuation pattern in the special figure hold information determination process described later is set (step X525; Y). Step X526), the number of reserved special figures 1 is updated by +1 (step X527). Next, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 1) corresponding to the reserved number of special figure 1 is calculated (step X528), and the big hit random number prepared by the above-mentioned hard random number acquisition process is used as the big hit random number of RWM. Save to the storage area (step X529).

After that, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step X530), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X531). Further, the small hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X532). Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X533). Then, the special figure hold information determination process (step X534), which is the look-ahead process, is performed, the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step X535), and the effect command setting process is performed (step X535). Step X536), the special figure start port 1 switch processing is completed. That is, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) can extract a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36, and can store the predetermined random number as the first starting memory up to a predetermined upper limit number. It serves as the first start storage means.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
FIG. 166 shows the special figure hold information determination process (step X534) in the above-mentioned special figure start port 1 switch process. The special figure hold information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining result-related information corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory before the start timing of the special figure 1 variable display game based on the special figure 1 start memory. In this special figure hold information determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure hold information is in the high probability state (step X541), and if the special figure hold information determination process is in the high probability state (step X541; Y), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. .. Further, when it is not in the high probability state (step X541; N), it is determined whether the player is in the big hit, that is, in the first special game state which is the special game state based on the big hit (step X542).

If the jackpot is in progress (step X542; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process ends. Further, when the jackpot is not in progress (step X542; N), the jackpot determination process for determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is performed depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (step X543). Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step X544; Y), the big hit symbol random number check table is set (step X545), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared big hit symbol random number is acquired (step X546). Prepare a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information (step X551).

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step X544; N), a small hit determination process for determining whether or not the jackpot is a small hit is performed depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the small hit determination value (step X547). ). Then, when the determination result is a small hit (step X548; Y), the stop symbol information of the small hit is set (step X549), and the look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551). If the determination result is not a small hit (step X548; N), the out-of-order stop symbol information is set (step X550), and the look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

After preparing the look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information (step X551), the effect command setting process is performed (step X552). Next, the special figure 1 information setting process (step X553) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed. Processing is performed (step X554).

Then, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure 1 variation display game is prepared (step X555), and the effect command setting process is performed. Perform (step X556), and end the special figure reservation information determination process. The special figure 1 information setting process in step X553 and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process in step X554 are the processes executed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of the special figure 1 normal processing. Is similar to.

By the above processing, the look-ahead stop symbol command including the result of the special figure 1 variable display game based on the special figure 1 start memory and the information of the fluctuation pattern in the special figure 1 variable display game based on the special figure 1 start memory are included. A look-ahead variation pattern command is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or a small hit and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory is changed to the special figure 1 change based on the corresponding special figure 1 start memory. It is possible to notify the effect control device 300 before the start timing of the display game, and in particular, by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game is started. It is possible to notify the player of the result-related information before the timing.

That is, the game control device 100 may determine the result of the first variation display game and the variation mode information before the start of the first variation display game based on the first start storage stored in the first start storage means. Make the first possible decision-making measure. Further, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start prize storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). (Judgment, etc.) Makes a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only at the start prize when the start memory occurs, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is played. good.

Note that this special figure hold information determination process is performed only for the special figure 1 variable display game, and for the special figure 2 variable display game that does not generate a start memory for holding the start of the special figure variable display game. Not done. In addition, the look-ahead process is not performed when the probability is high. This is a state in which the special figure 2 variable display game is the main body during the high probability state, and the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly removed by deriving the special result in this special figure 2 variable display game. This is because it is almost always stopped at. In other words, it is not so meaningful to notify the look-ahead result because most of them are out of order, and it is forcibly changed to the off-reading result after notifying the look-ahead result which is a special result in the special figure 1 variable display game. This is because the contradiction may occur.

However, since the special figure 2 variable display game does not generate the start memory for suspending the start of the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 change while there is the first start memory during the first period of the specific gaming state. There is a high possibility that only the display game will be played, and in such a case, the look-ahead effect may be performed for the first start memory. Of the first start memory that performs such look-ahead effect, the one that occurred before the start of the specific gaming state is pre-reading, so the result is used, and the one that occurs after the start of the specific gaming state is used. , The pre-reading process is performed for the target of such pre-reading effect. Of course, the look-ahead process may be performed regardless of the probability state, and it may be determined whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect based on the result of the look-ahead process in another process.

[Special figure start port 2 switch processing]
FIG. 167 shows a special start port 2 switch process (step X508) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process. In this special figure start port 2 switch process, first, the number of times the start port signal 2 is output, which is the number of times the information regarding the number of times the prize is won to the second start winning port 37 is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10, is loaded. (Step X561), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X562), and it is determined whether the number of outputs overflows (step X563). When the number of outputs does not overflow (step X563; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal 2 output count area of the RWM (step X564), and the start port 2 (second start winning port 37) wins. Determine if it is invalid.

The start opening 2 winning invalidity means that the special figure 1 variable display game that has a special result (big hit or small hit) is stopped (during processing during special figure display described later), during the first or second special gaming state, and Special Figure 2 The variable display game is being executed. When the start port 2 winning is invalid (step X565; Y), the special figure start port 2 switch process is terminated. If the starting port 2 winning is not invalid (step X565; N), the special figure 2 hold number is set to 1 (step X566), and the address of the random number storage area for the special figure 2 is calculated (step X567). ), The jackpot random number prepared in the above-mentioned hard random number acquisition process is saved in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (step X568).

After that, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted (step X569) and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X570). Further, the small hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X571). Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 are extracted and saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X572), and the special figure start port 2 switch processing is completed. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a start winning prize storage means for extracting and storing a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the second start winning opening 37. Since there are few types of fluctuation patterns in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is not used.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
FIG. 168 shows the special figure 1 game processing (step X110) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing. Special Figure 1 Variable display Controls the entire process related to the game and sets the display of Special Figure 1. In this special figure 1 game process, first, during the big hit / small hit of special figure 2, that is, during the special gaming state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. (Step Y101).

If the big hit / small hit of the special figure 2 is not in progress (step Y101; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y102), and if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, the game is updated by -1 (step Y103). ). Further, when the big hit / small hit in FIG. 2 is in progress (step Y101; Y), the process proceeds to step Y103.

In the large prize opening switch monitoring process, the game ball in the upper large prize opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the lower large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. Performs processing to monitor detection. In the special figure 1 game processing, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit, and the special figure 2 variable display is performed. Regarding the special game state executed based on the result of the game being a big hit or a small hit, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special figure 2 game process described later.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104). Special figure 1 When the value of the game processing timer is not 0 (step Y104; N), that is, when the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y119, and subsequent processing is performed. Further, when the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the process is branched to the processing corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. The special figure 1 game sequence branch table referred to in the above is set in the register (step Y105). Then, using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number is acquired (step Y106), and the subroutine call by the special figure 1 game processing number is performed (step Y107).

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "0", the change start of the special figure 1 variation display game is monitored, and the change start setting and the effect setting of the special figure 1 variation display game, and the special figure 1 variation display game are monitored. FIG. 1 Special figure 1 for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuations Fig. 1 Performs normal processing (step Y108). In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "1", the special figure 1 sets the stop display time, sets the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 display processing, and the like. 1 Perform the variable processing (step Y109).

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command can be set according to the type of big hit, or each big hit type. The special figure 1 display processing (step Y110) for setting the fanfare time according to the large winning opening opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is performed.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "3", the opening time of the big winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step Y111). In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step Y112) for setting the information necessary for performing the remaining ball processing is performed.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, or the special drawing 1 The big winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y113) for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is performed. In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "6", the special figure 1 jackpot end process (step Y114) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal process (step Y108). I do.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "7", the opening time / opening pattern of the large winning opening when a small hit occurs is set, the fanfare command is set, and the small hit medium processing is performed. The small hit fanfare process (step Y115) for setting the information necessary for the game is performed. In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "8", the small hit middle processing (step Y116) for setting the ending command and the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing is performed. conduct.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "9", the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls that have won in the large winning opening during the small hit medium processing and the small hit end. Small hit remaining ball processing (step Y117) for setting information necessary for processing is performed. In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "10", the special figure 1 small hit end process (step Y118) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal processing is performed.

After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 is prepared (step Y119), and the symbol fluctuation control process (step Y120) related to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed to perform the special figure 1 fluctuation control process. FIG. 1 Ends game processing. This special figure 1 game process is a process for performing a series of execution control regarding the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game).

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing]
FIG. 169 shows the special figure 2 game processing (step X111) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing. In the special figure 2 game process, control of the entire process related to the special figure 2 variable display game and setting of the display of the special figure 2 are performed. This special figure 2 game process basically performs the same process as the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process for the special figure 2.

In this special figure 2 game processing, first, during the big hit / small hit of special figure 1, that is, during the special gaming state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. (Step Y131). Then, when the big hit / small hit of the special figure 1 is not in progress (step Y131; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y132), and if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, the game is updated by -1 (step Y132). Step Y133). Further, when the big hit / small hit in FIG. 1 is in progress (step Y131; Y), the process proceeds to step Y133.

In the large prize opening switch monitoring process, the game ball in the upper large prize opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the lower large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. Performs processing to monitor detection. In the special figure 2 game processing, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit, and the special figure 1 variable display is performed. Regarding the special game state executed based on the result of the game being a big hit or a small hit, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134). Special figure 2 When the value of the game processing timer is not 0 (step Y134; N), that is, when the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y152, and subsequent processing is performed. Further, when the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, is the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer 0? Is determined (step Y135).

When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y135; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (step Y150), and the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is extended to the special figure 2 game processing timer area. The variable timer value (here, 60000 ms) is saved (step Y151), and the processing after step Y152 is performed.

In order to prevent the player from intentionally executing the special figure 2 variable display game with a high probability of small hits in the normal gaming state, the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state is very long. (For example, 10 minutes). However, since the area that can be used as the special figure 2 game processing timer is limited, it is difficult to measure the fluctuation time at one time even if the upper limit value is set as the initial value of the timer. Therefore, the fluctuation time is measured by a plurality of times using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times the time is measured for the specified time (here, 60,000 ms).

When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135; Y), the special figure 2 game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is set in the register. (Step Y136). Then, using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is acquired (step Y137), and the subroutine call by the special figure 2 game process number is performed (step Y138).

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variable display game is monitored, and the variable start setting and the effect setting of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the special figure 2 variation display game are monitored. FIG. 2 Special figure 2 for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuations Fig. 2 Ordinary processing (step Y139) is performed. In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "1", the special figure 2 sets the stop display time, sets the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display processing, and the like. 2 Perform the variable processing (step Y140).

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command can be set according to the type of big hit, or each big hit type. The special figure 2 display processing (step Y141) for setting the fanfare time according to the large winning opening opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is performed.

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "3", the opening time of the big winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step Y142). In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step Y143) for setting the information necessary for performing the remaining ball processing is performed.

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, or the special drawing 2 The big winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y144) for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is performed. In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "6", the special figure 2 big hit end processing (step Y145) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing (step Y108). I do.

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "7", the opening time / opening pattern of the large winning opening when a small hit occurs is set, the fanfare command is set, and the small hit medium processing is performed. The small hit fanfare process (step Y146) for setting the information necessary for the game is performed. In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "8", the small hit middle processing (step Y147) for setting the ending command, setting the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, and the like is performed. conduct.

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "9", the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls that have won in the large winning opening during the small hit medium processing and the small hit end. Small hit remaining ball processing (step Y148) for setting information necessary for processing is performed. In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "10", the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y149) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing is performed.

After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 is prepared (step Y152), and the symbol fluctuation control process (step Y153) related to the special figure 2 display 52 is performed to perform the special figure 2 fluctuation control process. FIG. 2 The game process is terminated. This special figure 2 game process is a process for performing a series of execution control regarding the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). The above-mentioned special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing for special figure 2, and in the following description, the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing. The corresponding processing will be explained in parallel in.

[Large winning opening switch monitoring process]
FIG. 170 shows the big winning opening switch monitoring process (steps Y102, Y132) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this large winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the upper special winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is being opened (step Y161). Then, when the upper prize opening is open (step Y161; Y), the process proceeds to step Y166. Further, when the upper prize opening is not open (step Y161; N), it is determined whether the remaining ball processing of the upper prize opening is being processed (step Y162). The remaining ball processing in this determination includes both the large winning opening residual ball processing based on the big hit and the small hit remaining ball processing based on the small hit.

If the remaining ball processing of the upper prize opening is being processed (step Y162; Y), the process proceeds to step Y166. Further, when the remaining ball processing of the upper prize opening is not in progress (step Y162; N), it is determined whether the lower prize opening (second special variable winning device 39) is being opened (step Y163). Then, when the lower prize opening is not open (step Y163; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the lower prize opening is open (step Y163; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the lower prize opening switch (step Y164).

The opening in steps Y161 and Y163 means the opening in the first special gaming state, which is the special gaming state based on the first special result (big hit), and the special gaming state based on the second special result (small hit). Includes both during opening in the second special gaming state. Further, in the determination of steps Y161 to Y163, the determination may be made by referring to the special figure 1 or special figure 2 game processing number, or a flag indicating whether or not each state is set may be set. The determination may be made based on this flag.

If there is no input to the lower prize opening switch (step Y164; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process ends. If there is an input to the lower prize opening switch (step Y164; Y), 1 is set in the winning counter for counting the number of winnings to the winning opening added in the current large winning opening switch monitoring process. (Step Y165), and the process proceeds to step Y175.

On the other hand, in step Y166, which shifts to the case where the upper prize opening is open (step Y161; Y) or the remaining ball processing of the upper prize opening is being processed (step Y162; Y), 0 is set to the winning counter. Set (step Y166). After that, it is determined whether or not there is an input in the upper prize opening switch 1 (one of the upper prize opening switches 38a) (step Y167), and if there is no input (step Y167; N), the process proceeds to step Y171.

Further, when there is an input to the upper prize opening switch 1 (step Y167; Y), the grand prize opening count command is prepared (step Y168), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y169). In the case of the first special variable winning device 38, a large winning opening count command is transmitted in order to produce an effect by winning. Further, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step Y170), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper winning opening switch 2 (the other upper winning opening switch 38a) (step Y171).

Then, when there is no input to the upper prize opening switch 2 (step Y171; N), the process proceeds to step Y175. Further, when there is an input to the upper prize opening switch 2 (step Y171; Y), the grand prize opening count command is prepared (step Y172), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y173). Further, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step Y174), and the process proceeds to step Y175.

After that, when the value of the winning counter is 0 (step Y175; Y), when the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step Y176; Y), or when the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step Y177; Y). If it is any of the above, the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If the value of the winning counter is not 0 (step Y175; N), the large winning opening remaining ball processing is not in progress (step Y176; N), and the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step Y177; N), the winning is won. The value of the counter is added to the number of large winning opening counts (step Y178), and it is determined whether or not the number of large winning opening counts is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (the number of game balls that can be won in one round) (step Y179).

If the number of large winning opening counts is not equal to or higher than the upper limit value (9 in this case) (step Y179; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the number of large winning openings exceeds the upper limit (step Y179; Y), the number of large winning openings is kept at the upper limit (step Y180), and the target special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0. (Step Y181). Then, it is determined whether the opening in the big hit, that is, the opening in the first special gaming state which is the special gaming state based on the big hit (step Y182).

If the jackpot is not open (step Y182; N), that is, if the jackpot is open, the jackpot switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the jackpot is being opened (step Y182; Y), the value of the jackpot opening operation end is saved in the jackpot opening control pointer area (step Y183), and the jackpot switch monitoring process is terminated. As a result, the big prize opening will be closed and one round will end.

It should be noted that even when there is an input to the lower prize opening switch (step Y164; Y), the grand prize opening count command may be transmitted to the effect control device 300. Further, when there is a remaining ball processing for the lower prize opening, the large winning opening count command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 even if there is an input to the lower major winning opening switch during the remaining ball processing. You can do it.

[Special Figure 1 Normal processing]
FIG. 171 shows the special figure 1 normal process (step Y108) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 can start to fluctuate (step Y201). The state in which the special figure 1 in this determination can start the change is not between the stop of the change of the special figure 2 change display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, and the end of the special gaming state. It should be noted that although the fluctuation cannot be started even during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special game state based on the special figure 1 variable display game, in that case, the special figure 1 normal processing is not executed. , It is not necessary to judge this here.

When the special figure 1 is not variable startable (step Y201; N), the special figure 1 normal processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y217), and the special figure 1 normal processing is terminated. Further, when the special figure 1 is capable of starting fluctuation (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handed instruction notification has been completed, that is, whether the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y202). If the left-handed instruction has been notified (step Y202; Y), the process proceeds to step Y206. If the left-handed instruction notification has not been notified (step Y202; N), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step Y203), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y204). After that, the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y205), and it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y206). The left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared when the last special figure fluctuation display game played in the specific game state, which is a high-probability state, ends, and as a result, the normal game state, which is a low-probability state, is cleared. Left-handed instruction notification will be performed when shifting to.

Then, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y206; Y), the process proceeds to step Y217. Further, when the number of pending special figures 1 is not 0 (step Y206; N), the fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y207), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y208). After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process for setting the information related to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed (step Y210), and the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step Y211). , Performs the effect command setting process (step Y212). At the time of performing the process of preparing the decorative special figure hold number command (step Y210), the special figure 1 hold number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the current special figure 1 hold is not performed. A hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number obtained by subtracting -1 from the number is prepared.

Next, the special figure 1 changing state is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y212). Here, the special figure status indicates the state of the special figure variation display game, and any of 0 to 5 is set. The special figure status 0 indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, and the special figure status 1 indicates a state in which only the special figure 1 variable display game is executed. The special figure status 2 indicates a state in which only the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. Further, the special figure status 3 indicates a state in which both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are being executed, and the special figure status 4 is the first special gaming state which is a special gaming state based on a big hit. The special figure status 5 indicates that there is a second special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a small hit. Here, since the special figure 1 variable display game is started, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

Next, it is determined whether or not the state is in a high probability state (step Y213). Then, in the case of the high probability state (step Y213; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. Further, when the state is not in the high probability state (step Y213; N), it is determined whether the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step Y214). The high-probability final fluctuation is during the execution (including the stop time) of the special figure fluctuation display game for a predetermined number of times (here, the 50th time) from the end of the first special game state, and the lottery in the high-probability state. Is running the last special figure variation display game that was played.

If the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (step Y214; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. If the final fluctuation with high probability is not in progress (step Y214; N), the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (step Y215). That is, the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started in a low probability state. After that, the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process is performed (step Y216), and the special figure 1 normal process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Normal processing]
FIG. 172 shows the special figure 2 normal process (step Y139) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. In this special figure 2 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start to fluctuate (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 in this determination can start the change is not between the stop of the change of the special figure 1 change display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, and the end of the special gaming state. It should be noted that although the fluctuation cannot be started even during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game or the special game state based on the special figure 2 variable display game, in that case, the special figure 2 normal processing is not executed. , It is not necessary to judge this here.

When the special figure 2 is not variable startable (step Y221; N), the special figure 2 normal processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y237), and the special figure 2 normal processing is terminated. Further, when the special figure 2 is capable of starting fluctuation (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures 2 is 0 (step Y222). As described above, the special figure 2 hold (second start memory) is based on the prize when the second start winning opening 37 is won in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started. Special figure 2 This is temporarily generated to perform the start processing of the variable display game, and is not intended to suspend the start of the special figure variable display game as in the first start memory.

Then, when the number of reserved figures 2 is not 0 (step Y222; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y223), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y224). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process for setting the information related to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed (step Y225), and the special figure 2 changing is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y226). Here, since the special figure 2 variable display game is started, 2 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

Next, it is determined whether or not the state is in a high probability state (step Y227). Then, in the case of the high probability state (step Y227; Y), the process proceeds to step Y230. Further, when it is not in the high probability state (step Y227; N), it is determined whether the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step Y228). The high-probability final fluctuation is during the execution (including the stop time) of the special figure fluctuation display game for a predetermined number of times (here, the 50th time) from the end of the first special game state, and the lottery in the high-probability state. Is running the last special figure variation display game that was played.

If the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (step Y228; Y), the process proceeds to step Y230. If the final fluctuation with high probability is not in progress (step Y228; N), the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set (step Y229). That is, the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started in a low probability state. After that, the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process is performed (step Y230), and the special figure 2 normal process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved special figures 2 is 0 (step Y222; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y231). Then, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y231; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing (step Y232). Then, when the special figure 1 is not changing (step Y232; N), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (step Y233), and when it has not been disclosed (step Y233; N), it is in the customer waiting state. Performs the processing related to the setting. Further, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is not 0 (step Y231; N), when special figure 1 is changing (step Y232; Y), or when the customer waiting demo has been started (step Y233; Y). , Step Y237.

In the process related to the setting of the customer waiting state, first, the customer waiting demo flag area is set (step Y234), the customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y235), and the effect is produced. The command setting process is performed (step Y236), and the process proceeds to step Y237. By making the customer waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to display different customer waiting screens according to the probability state.

Further, if the effect control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the effect control device 300 that does not have the backup function loses the information on the gaming state, so that it becomes impossible to perform an appropriate effect. By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to perform an effect according to the game state from the reception of this command, and the probability information command based on the change in the game state is transmitted. You will be able to return to the production according to the game state faster than waiting.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, and it is conceivable that the probability state changes depending on the processing of the special figure 1 variable display game. Therefore, the fluctuation start probability information command is transmitted every time the special figure fluctuation display game is started (steps Y207 and Y223). This makes it possible for the effect control device 300 to perform an appropriate effect according to the gaming state.

In addition, by transmitting the fluctuation start probability information command every time the special figure fluctuation display game starts, even if the effect control device 300 is restarted, the effect according to the game state can be performed from the reception of this command. It becomes possible to return to the production according to the game state faster than waiting for the probability information command based on the change of the game state to be transmitted. It should be noted that the customer waiting demo command and the fluctuation start probability information command may include other information for allowing the effect control device 300 to return to the effect according to the game state when the effect control device 300 is restarted.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 173 shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step Y209) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 normal process. This special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game. First, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y241), and the result information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is out of alignment information. , The big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y242) for setting the big hit information or the small hit information is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y243) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. 1 Perform the information setting process (step Y244), and prepare the special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set. (Step Y245).

After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) for setting the fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation mode in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed, and the fluctuation start information setting for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed. The process (step Y247) is performed. By these processes, the result and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed are determined. Then, after this, a process for adjusting so as not to cause an inconvenience between the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that can be executed at the same time is performed.

The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, but when a special result (big hit or small hit) is derived, the other is forcibly removed regardless of the lottery result. As a result, it ends. In particular, since the special figure 2 variable display game is always a big hit or a small hit, if the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped first, such a process is performed for the special figure 1 variable display game. Therefore, for example, even though the effect is highly expected in the special figure 1 variable display game, the game is forcibly stopped due to the disengagement result, and the player feels distrust. Therefore, if there is a possibility that the special figure 2 variable display game will end before the end of the special figure 1 variable display game to be started from now on, it is possible to take measures such as preventing the production with high expectation from being selected. I am doing it.

For this purpose, first, it is determined whether or not the state is in the high probability state (step Y248), and if the state is in the high probability state (step Y248; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. In the case of a high probability state, the game is progressed mainly in the special figure 2 variable display game. In this state, since the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is short and the game is executed frequently, it is known that there is a high possibility that the special figure 1 variable display game will be forcibly stopped due to a missed result. , Special Figure 1 In the variable display game, since it is set in advance so that the effect with high expectation is not selected, no special processing is performed here.

Further, when the state is not in the high probability state (step Y248; N), it is determined whether the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step Y249). The high-probability final fluctuation is during the execution (including the stop time) of the special figure fluctuation display game for a predetermined number of times (here, the 50th time) from the end of the first special game state, and the lottery in the high-probability state. Is running the last special figure variation display game that was played.

If the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (step Y249; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. Since the special figure 2 variable display game, which has a high probability of final fluctuation, will be stopped in a short time, there is a high possibility that the special figure 1 variable display game to be started from now on will be forcibly stopped in a short time. Therefore, even if a highly expected effect is selected for the special figure 1 variable display game, it will end before the start of the effect. Therefore, here, a process for preventing the highly expected effect from being selected. Do not do.

Further, when the final fluctuation with high probability is not in progress (step Y249; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is in the fluctuation (step Y250). When the special figure 2 is not changing (step Y250; N), the process proceeds to step Y257. In this case, since it is in a low probability state, even if the special figure 2 variable display game is started from now on, the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game is a very long variable time. Therefore, since it is unlikely that the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped, no processing is performed here to prevent a highly expected effect from being selected.

When the special figure 2 is changing (step Y250; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y251). Special figure 2 When the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is 0 (step Y251; Y), the process proceeds to step Y254. Further, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y251; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more (step Y252).

Special figure 2 When the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is 4 or more (step Y252; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. In this case, the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game is sufficiently long, and the special figure 1 variable display game ends earlier. Therefore, in order to prevent the production with high expectation from being selected. No processing is performed.

If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 4 or more (step Y252; N), the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game is calculated (step Y253), and the special figure 1 variable display to be executed from now on is calculated. It is determined whether the fluctuation time of the game is less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y254). When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed is less than the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game (step Y254; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. In this case, since the special figure 1 variable display game ends first, no processing is performed to prevent the production having a high expectation from being selected.

Further, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed is not less than the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game (step Y254; N), it is notified that the variable time of the special figure 1 is longer. A command is prepared (step Y255), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y256). After that, the high-probability fluctuation number update process for managing the period of the high-probability state is performed (step Y257), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is terminated. The effect control device 300 performs processing such as restricting the selection of a highly expected effect for the special figure 1 variation display game based on receiving a command notifying that the variation time of the special figure 1 is longer. It is supposed to do.

When the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed is not less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game (step Y254; N), it is set in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (step Y246). The process of resetting the information regarding the variation pattern (first and second half variation pattern numbers, etc.) may be performed so that the effect control device 300 changes to the variation pattern that does not select the effect with high expectation. In the process of resetting the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time may not be changed or may be changed. Further, the process of preparing the command for notifying that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer (step Y255) may or may not be performed.

That is, the special figure 1 variation pattern processing (step Y246) performed by the game control device 100 determines the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game in the normal game state, the second variation display game. It is a first variation mode determining means capable of determining the variation mode information of the first variation display game without referring to the variation mode information. Further, the process of resetting the above-mentioned variation pattern performed by the game control device 100 is performed when the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game is determined by the first variation mode determining means. Refers to the fluctuation time included in the fluctuation mode information of the second fluctuation display game, and provides information on the fluctuation pattern without changing the fluctuation time of the determined first fluctuation display game. It serves as a second variation mode determining means that can be redetermined.

Further, instead of changing the fluctuation pattern once determined in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) later, it is executed from now on when the fluctuation pattern is determined in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246). The variation pattern according to the game situation is determined from the beginning by performing the process (step Y254) of determining whether the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game is less than the remaining variation time of the variation display game. You may do so.

Further, when the off-target result can be selected as the result of the special figure 2 variable display game, the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed from now on only when the special figure 2 variable display game has a special result is special. FIG. 2 A process (step Y254) for determining whether or not the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game is not reached is performed. If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order, this process is unnecessary because the special figure 1 variable display game is not forcibly stopped by the out of place result.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 174 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step Y225) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 normal process. This special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game. First, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y261), and the result information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is out of alignment information. , The big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y262) for setting the big hit information or the small hit information is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y263) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. 2 Perform the information setting process (step Y264), and prepare the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set. (Step Y265).

After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y266) for setting the fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation mode in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed, and the fluctuation start information setting for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed. The process (step Y267) is performed. By these processes, the result and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be executed are determined. After that, the high-probability fluctuation number update process for managing the period of the high-probability state is performed (step Y268), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is terminated.

In addition, in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, the process for adjusting so as not to cause an inconvenience between the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game which can be executed at the same time is not performed. This is because the probability of a small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game is low, so that the special figure 2 variable display game is less likely to be forcibly terminated with a missed result. However, as in the case of the special figure 1 variable display game, if the game is forcibly stopped due to a loss result, the selection of a highly expected effect may be restricted.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 175 shows the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step Y242) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y271), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y272). Next, the big hit random number is loaded and prepared (step Y273) from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the holding number 1) of the RWM, and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the holding number 1) is cleared to 0. It should be noted that the reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1).

After that, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 2 which is the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is a jackpot (step Y275), and if it is a jackpot (step Y275; Y), the process proceeds to step Y279. do. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are not made a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y275; N), a big hit determination process (step Y276) is performed to determine whether or not the acquired big hit random value is a big hit depending on whether or not it matches the big hit determination value.

When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y276) is a jackpot (step Y277; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step Y272 (step Y278). ), The jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit determination process (step Y276) is not a big hit (step Y277; N), whether or not the acquired big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination process (step Y279) for determining the above is performed.

When the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is a small hit (step Y280; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step Y271. (Step Y281), and the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is not a small hit (step Y280; N), the large hit flag 1 setting process ends. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 176 shows the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step Y262) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y291), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y292). Next, the big hit random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area of RWM (step Y293), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area is cleared to 0.

After that, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 1 which is the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is a jackpot (step Y295), and if it is a jackpot (step Y295; Y), the process proceeds to step Y299. do. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are not made a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y295; N), a big hit determination process (step Y296) is performed to determine whether or not the acquired big hit random value is a big hit depending on whether or not it matches the big hit determination value.

When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y296) is a jackpot (step Y297; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step Y292 (step Y298). ), The jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit determination process (step Y296) is not a big hit (step Y297; N), whether or not the acquired big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination process (step Y299) for determining the above is performed.

When the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is a small hit (step Y300; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step Y291. (Step Y301), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not a small hit (step Y300; N), the large hit flag 2 setting process ends. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit judgment process]
FIG. 177 shows the jackpot determination process (steps Y276, Y296) in the above-mentioned jackpot flag 1 setting process and jackpot flag 2 setting process. In this jackpot determination process, first, the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step Y311), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

If the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y317), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the big hit has been missed. Further, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; N), it is determined whether the state is in a high probability state (step Y313).

Then, in the case of a high probability state (step Y313; Y), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set (step Y314), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316). ). Further, in the case of not in the high probability state (step Y313; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (step Y315), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316). ..

If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y317), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. If the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316; N), that is, if it is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the determination result (step Y318), and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 178 shows the small hit determination process (steps Y279, Y299) in the above-mentioned big hit flag 1 setting process and big hit flag 2 setting process. In this small hit determination process, first, it is determined whether the value of the target large hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321). The small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit. Further, the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value do not overlap.

When the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; Y), that is, when it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y326), and the small hit determination process is terminated. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for small hits has been missed. Further, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; N), it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set, that is, whether the judgment is for the special figure 1 variation display game. (Step Y322).

Then, when the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y322; Y), the small hit upper limit determination value for the special figure 1 is set (step Y323), and the value of the target big hit random number is the small hit upper limit determination value. It is determined whether it is larger (step Y325). Further, when the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step Y322; N), that is, when the judgment is about the special figure 2 variation display game, the small hit upper limit judgment value for the special figure 2 is set (step Y324). , It is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y325).

If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y325; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y326), and the small hit determination process is terminated. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y325; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the determination result (step Y327), and the small hit determination process is completed. do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 179 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y243) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331), and if it is a big hit (step Y331; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1). Load the jackpot symbol random number from (for) (step Y332). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step Y333), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y334). The jackpot type is selected by this process. It should be noted that the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol area when the special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forcibly removed.

After that, the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y335), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the save symbol pattern is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y336). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display device (here, the special figure 1 display device 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area (step Y337), and the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired. Special figure 1 Save in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y338). This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, the decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

On the other hand, when it is not a big hit (step Y331; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y339), and when it is a small hit (step Y339; Y), the special figure 1 small hit symbol The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step Y340). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step Y341), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y342). The small hit type is selected by this process. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y343), and the decorative special symbol 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

If the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y339; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y344), and the loss stop symbol pattern is stopped in special figure 1. Save in the symbol pattern area (step Y345), and prepare the decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step Y346). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decorative special figure 1 command is saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y347), and the effect command setting process (step Y348) is performed. This decorative special figure 1 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y349), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y350), and the special figure The 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) is cleared to 0 (step Y351), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 180 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y263) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is the same as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step Y361), and if it is a big hit (step Y361; Y), the big hit symbol random number from the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area. Is loaded (step Y362). Next, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step Y363), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y364). The jackpot type is selected by this process. The stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol area when the special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forcibly removed.

After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y365), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the save symbol pattern is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y366). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special diagram 2 display 52) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area (step Y367), and the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired. Special figure 2 Save in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y368). This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

On the other hand, when it is not a big hit (step Y361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y369), and when it is a small hit (step Y369; Y), the special figure 2 small hit symbol The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the random number storage area (step Y370). Next, the special figure 2 small hit symbol table is set (step Y371), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y372). The small hit type is selected by this process. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y373), and the decorative special symbol 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y369; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y374), and the loss stop symbol pattern is stopped in special figure 2. Save in the symbol pattern area (step Y375), and prepare the decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step Y376). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decorative special figure 2 command is saved in the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y377), and the effect command setting process (step Y378) is performed. This decorative special figure 2 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y379), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area is cleared to 0 (step Y380), and the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number is stored. The area is cleared to 0 (step Y381), and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special Figure 1 Information Setting Process]
FIG. 181 shows the special figure 1 information setting process (step Y244) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this special figure 1 information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability is high (step Y401). When the probability is not high (step Y401; N), the fluctuation pattern selection information table is set (step Y402), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern are acquired (step Y403). , It is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit, that is, the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is the big hit stop symbol pattern (step Y404).

In the case of a special figure 1 big hit (step Y404; Y), the process proceeds to step Y412. If it is not a special figure 1 big hit (step Y404; N), it is determined whether the special figure 1 small hit, that is, the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is a small hit stop symbol pattern (step Y405). Then, if it is not a special figure 1 small hit (step Y405; N), that is, if it is out of order, the process proceeds to step Y407. Further, in the case of a special figure 1 small hit (step Y405; Y), the value is updated by adding the special figure 1 hold number to the latter half offset data (step Y406), and the special figure 1 hold number is added to the first half offset data. Addition is performed to convert the value (step Y407), and the process proceeds to step Y412.

On the other hand, when the probability is high (step Y401; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y408). Then, when the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y408; N), the first half offset data for the special figure 1 missed / small hit is set (step Y409), and the second half offset data for the special figure 1 length variation is set. Set (step Y411). Further, in the case of the special figure 1 big hit (step Y408; Y), the first half offset data for the special figure 1 big hit at the time of high probability is set (step Y410), and the second half offset data for the special figure 1 length variation is set. (Step Y411).

Then, the first half offset data set as described above is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y412), and the latter half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y413). End the setting process.

In other words, in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the normal gaming state, in the case of a small hit, the fluctuation pattern considering both the first half fluctuation pattern and the second half fluctuation pattern is determined in consideration of the number of reservations in the special figure 1, and in the case of a miss. In the case of a big hit, the fluctuation pattern is determined without considering the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 so that only the first half fluctuation pattern is determined in consideration of the number of reservations in Special Figure 1. Further, in the special figure 1 variation display game in the specific gaming state, the variation pattern is determined without considering the number of reservations in the special figure 1.

[Special figure 2 information setting process]
FIG. 182 shows the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y264) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this special figure 2 information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability is high (step Y421). When the probability is high (step Y421; Y), the fluctuation pattern selection information table is set (step Y422), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern are acquired (step Y423). ), The process proceeds to step Y428.

On the other hand, when the probability is not high (step Y421; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is a big hit (step Y424). Then, when the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y424; N), the first half offset data for the special figure 2 missed / small hit is set (step Y425), and the second half offset data for the special figure 2 length variation is set. Set (step Y427). Further, in the case of the special figure 2 big hit (step Y424; Y), the first half offset data for the special figure 2 big hit at low probability is set (step Y426), and the second half offset data for the special figure 2 length variation is set. (Step Y427).

Then, the first half offset data set as described above is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y428), and the latter half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y429). End the setting process.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation pattern setting process]
FIG. 183 shows the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. The fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the reach state to the end of the special map fluctuation display game. It consists of a pattern, and the latter half fluctuation pattern is set first, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

In this special figure 1 variation pattern setting process, first, the variation group selection address table is set (step Y451), and the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y452). , The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the special figure 1 (step Y453).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is off, that is, the stop symbol pattern is the off-stop symbol pattern (step Y454), and if the special figure 1 is off (step Y454; Y), a 2-byte distribution process is performed. (Step Y455), the process proceeds to step Y457. If the special figure 1 is not out of alignment (step Y454; N), the distribution process is performed (step Y456), and the process proceeds to step Y457. When the result is a big hit or a small hit, the distribution value is 1 byte, but when the result is off, the distribution value is 2 bytes in order to enable various effects.

Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of distribution is acquired and prepared (step Y457), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the special figure 1. And prepare (step Y458). Then, the distribution process (step Y459) is performed, the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and the latter half variable number area is saved (step Y460). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y461), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the second half fluctuation number determined as the fluctuation distribution information 1 (step Y462). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step Y463), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the special figure 1. Prepare (step Y464).

After that, the distribution process (step Y465) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y467), and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process is completed. By this process, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be started is set.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process]
FIG. 184 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y266) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this special figure 2 variation pattern setting process, first, the latter half variation selection address table is set (step Y471), and the address of the latter half variation selection table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y472). , The variation pattern random number 2 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area of the special figure 2 (step Y473).

Next, a distribution process is performed (step Y474), and the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variable number area (step Y475). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Then, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y476), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the second half fluctuation number determined as the fluctuation distribution information 1 (step Y477). Next, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step Y478), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area of FIG. 2 (step Y479). ).

After that, the distribution process (step Y480) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y481), and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process is completed. By this process, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be started is set. Since there are few types of latter half fluctuations in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the latter half fluctuation group is not selected by the fluctuation pattern random number 1, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using only the fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3.

[2-byte distribution processing]
FIG. 185 shows a 2-byte distribution process (step Y455) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation pattern setting process. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether the data at the head of the prepared second half variable group table (selection table) is a code without distribution (that is, "0") (step Y501). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern group, but the latter half that defines only the latter half fluctuation pattern group in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the variable group table, since there is no need for distribution, the distribution value "0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning.

Then, when the data at the head of the latter half variable group table is a code without distribution (step Y502; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step Y507), and the 2-byte distribution process is completed. do. On the other hand, when the data at the head of the latter half variable group table is not a code without distribution (step Y502; N), one distribution value first specified in the latter half variable group table is acquired (step Y503).

Next, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step Y373 from the loaded random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) (step Y504), and the calculated new random number value is calculated. Is smaller than "0" (step Y505). When the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step Y505; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step Y506), the process is shifted to step Y503, and the subsequent processes are performed. conduct. That is, in step Y503, after acquiring the distribution value specified next in the variable group selection table, the distribution value is subtracted by using the random number value determined in step Y505 as a new random number value, and further new disturbance. Calculate the numerical value (step Y504). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y505).

The above processing is executed in step Y505 until it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y505; Y). As a result, any one of the latter half variable selection tables is selected from at least one latter half variable selection table defined in the latter half variable group table. Then, if it is determined in step Y505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y505; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step Y507), and the 2-byte distribution process is performed. To finish.

[Distribution processing]
FIG. 186 shows the distribution processing (steps Y456, Y459, Y465, Y474, Y480) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process and special figure 2 variation pattern setting process. In the distribution process, the latter half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is selected from the latter half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2, or the first half variation selection table (first half variation selection table) is selected based on the variation pattern random number 3. This is a process for selecting the first half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game from the first half fluctuation pattern group).

In this distribution process, first, it is checked whether or not the first data of the prepared second half variable selection table (selection table) and first half variable selection table (selection table) is a code without distribution (that is, "0"). (Step Y511). Here, the second half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table store a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half fluctuation pattern or the first half fluctuation pattern, as in the second half fluctuation group table, but distribution is necessary. In the case of a selection table without a distribution value, the distribution value "0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning.

Then, when the data at the head of the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is a code without distribution (step Y512; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step Y517), and the distribution is performed. End the process. On the other hand, when the data at the head of the latter half variable selection table or the first half variable selection table is not a code without distribution (step Y512; N), one distribution value first specified in the latter half variable selection table or the first half variable selection table is used. (Step Y513).

Next, after subtracting the distribution value acquired in step Y513 from the loaded random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 2 or fluctuation pattern random number 3) to calculate a new random number value (step Y514), the calculation is performed. It is determined whether the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y515). Then, when the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step Y515; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step Y516), the process shifts to step Y513, and thereafter. Perform processing.

That is, in step Y513, after acquiring the distribution value specified next in the second half variation selection table and the first half variation selection table, the distribution value is subtracted by using the random number value determined in step Y515 as a new random number value. , Further, a new random number value is calculated (step Y514). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y515).

The above processing is executed in step Y515 until it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y515; Y). As a result, any one of the latter half fluctuation number and the first half fluctuation number is selected from at least one second half fluctuation pattern and the first half fluctuation pattern defined in the second half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table. Then, if it is determined in step Y515 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y515; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step Y517), and the distribution process is completed. do.

[Variation start information setting process]
FIG. 187 shows the fluctuation start information setting processing (steps Y247, Y267) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing. In this fluctuation start information setting process, first, it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y551), and when the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y551; Y), the special figure 1 is set. The random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step Y552). Further, when the information of the special figure 1 is not set (step Y551; N), that is, when the information of the special figure 2 is being set, the random number storage area of the fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 of the special figure 2 is cleared (step). Y553).

Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step Y554), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step Y555). Further, the second half fluctuation time value table is set (step Y556), and the second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is acquired (step Y557). Then, the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value are added (step Y558), and the added value is saved in the target special figure game processing timer area (step Y559).

If the result of the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal gaming state, which is a low probability state, is off or a small hit, a long variation with a very long variation time is set. In this case, as the above-mentioned added value, the remaining time (time less than 60,000 ms) excluding the time that can be timed is calculated as the added value by using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times the time is measured for the specified time (here, 60,000 ms). It is supposed to be done.

After that, it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y560), and if the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y560; Y), the process proceeds to step Y564. Further, when the information of the special figure 1 is not set (step Y560; N), that is, when the information of the special figure 2 is being set, it is determined whether the long variation of the special figure 2 has started (step Y561). The long variation is a variation pattern set when the result is off or a small hit in the normal game state in the special figure 2 variation display game, and is determined by the set variation pattern number.

Then, when it is not the start of the long variation of the special figure 2 (step Y561; N), 0 is saved in the repetition count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y562), and the process proceeds to step Y564. Further, when the long variation of the special figure 2 is started (step Y561; Y), 9 is saved in the repetition count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y563), and the process proceeds to step Y564.

After that, the variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step Y564), the variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step Y565), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y566). ). Next, it is determined whether or not the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y567), and if the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step Y567; N), the fluctuation start information setting process is terminated. Further, when the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y567; Y), the number of reserved special figures 1 is updated by -1 (step Y568), and the contents of the random number storage area of the special figure 1 are shifted (step Y569). ), Clear the free area after the shift (step Y570), and end the fluctuation start information setting process.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 displays the result of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) and the variation mode information in the first variation display game based on the first start storage stored in the first start storage means. It is the first decision-making means that can be decided before the start of. Further, the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 37, and the result of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the predetermined random number. And, it serves as a second determination means capable of determining the variation mode information before the start of the second variation display game. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of the identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

From the above, the first start winning opening 36 is arranged at a position where the game ball fired on one side of the game area 32 can win, and the second starting winning opening 37 is fired on the other side of the game area 32. The game ball is arranged at a position where a prize can be won, and the variation mode information of the variation display game includes information on the variation time in which the execution time of the variation display game can be specified, and is in a normal state (normal game state). The variable time that can be determined as the variable time of the second variable display game by the second determining means is larger than the variable time that can be determined as the variable time of the first variable display game by the first determining means. It will be a long time.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorate special figure variable display Set detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the start storage number (holding number), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game. Examples include variable commands that contain information about patterns. By transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing by the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

That is, the game control device 100 forms the first variable display game execution control means capable of controlling the execution of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the determination result of the first determination means. .. Further, it can be said that the first variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the first variable display game from the whole of the special figure 1 game processing. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a second variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the determination result of the second determination means. .. Further, it can be said that the second variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the second variable display game from the whole of the special figure 2 game processing.

Further, the game control device 100 controls the result and variation mode information of the first variation display game determined by the first determination means and the result and variation mode information of the second variation display game determined by the second determination means. As a transmission means capable of transmitting to the effect control means (effect control device 300). Further, when the game control device 100 starts measuring the fluctuation time for each of the first fluctuation display game and the second fluctuation display game according to the start of the fluctuation display game, and the measurement time has elapsed. It serves as a measurement means for ending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game.

If the result of the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal gaming state, which is a low probability state, is off or a small hit, a long variation with a very long variation time is set. In this case, the variation is set. The information about the time may not be transmitted to the effect control device 300, but a command indicating only the long fluctuation may be transmitted. In the case of long fluctuation, it is sufficient to simply display the fluctuation, and it is not necessary to determine the effect in detail. Therefore, the effect control device 300 starts the variation display based on receiving the command of long variation. The fluctuation time is managed only by the game control device 100, the stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the end of the variation time, and the effect control device 300 stops the variation display based on the reception of the stop command. To do so. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the burden of control on the effect control device 300.

[High probability fluctuation frequency update process]
FIG. 188 shows the high-probability fluctuation frequency update processing (steps Y257, Y268) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing. In this high-probability fluctuation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the high probability is in progress (step Y581), and if the high probability is not in progress (step Y581; N), the high probability fluctuation number update process is terminated. Further, when the probability is high (step Y581; Y), the number of high-probability fluctuations for managing the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game in the high-probability state is updated by -1 (step Y582), and the number of high-probability fluctuations is high. Is 0 (step Y583).

If the number of high-probability fluctuations is not 0 (step Y583; N), that is, if the high-probability state continues, the high-probability fluctuation number update process is terminated. When the number of high-probability fluctuations is 0 (step Y583; Y), that is, when the high-probability state is terminated, the signal relating to the high-probability termination is saved in the external information output data area (step Y584). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to be turned off. Further, the signal relating to the high probability state and the end of the time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y585). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal is set to OFF.

Further, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y586), and the special figure low probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y587). Then, the high-probability final fluctuation flag corresponding to the symbol whose fluctuation starts is set (step Y588), and the high-probability fluctuation number update process is completed.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the high probability state is set until the special figure fluctuation display game is executed a predetermined number of times after the end of the special gaming state. However, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display are set. Since the games can be executed at the same time, the high-probability fluctuation number update process for managing the number of high-probability states is performed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game. If the gaming machine does not execute the other special figure variation display game while the other special figure variation display game is being executed as in the past, the probability state is set by the end of the special figure variation display game for the predetermined number of times. If you change to the low probability state, no problem will occur. However, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time as in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the probability state is set to a low probability at the end of the predetermined number of special figure variable display games. If the state is changed, the determination is made in a high probability state even for the other special figure fluctuation display game started during the execution of the one special figure fluctuation display game, and the high probability occurs over a predetermined number of times. The game can be executed in the state. Therefore, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time as in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, one of the special figure variable display games, which is a predetermined number of times, can be played in a high probability state. After the determination, it is necessary to set the low probability state by the start of the other special figure variation display game. Here, immediately after the processing at the start of one special figure variation display game, which is the predetermined number of times, is completed. It is possible to change to a low probability state.

Since the high-probability fluctuation number update process is performed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, the change of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed for the last special figure fluctuation display game in which the lottery is performed in the high probability state. It is already in a low probability state during display. Therefore, if another process refers to the actual probability state during the variation display of the special figure variation display game, the process is performed as if it is a low probability state, which may cause inconvenience. be. Therefore, the high-probability final fluctuation flag is set so that the special figure fluctuation display game can be treated as a game being executed as a high-probability state. Further, the high-probability final fluctuation flag is information that can determine whether the last special figure fluctuation display game in which the lottery is performed in the high probability state is the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. Includes.

[Special Figure 1 Processing during change Transition setting processing]
FIG. 189 shows a special figure 1 changing process transition setting process (step Y216) in the special figure 1 normal process. In this special figure 1 changing process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 1 game process number (step Y601), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y602).

Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y603), and the signal relating to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y604). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to ON. After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y605), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area (step Y605). For example, 100 ms) is set (step Y606). Further, the initial value is set in the special figure 1 changing symbol number area (step Y607), and the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process is terminated.

The initial value set in the symbol number area during special figure 1 change is 0, so that the change display is started from the state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit in the state where the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from the state where all the segments are turned off.

[Special Figure 2 Transition processing during fluctuations Transition setting processing]
FIG. 190 shows the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process (step Y230) in the special figure 2 normal process. In the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 2 game process number (step Y611), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y612).

Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y613), and the signal relating to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y614). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to ON. After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y615), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area (step Y615). For example, 100 ms) is set (step Y616). Further, the initial value is set in the symbol number area during change in Special Figure 2 (step Y617), and the process shift setting process during change in Special Figure 2 is terminated.

Special figure 2 The initial value set in the symbol number area during fluctuation is 0, so that the fluctuation display is started from the state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit in the state where the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from the state where all the segments are turned off.

It should be noted that when the variable display is started on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, it is said that all the segments are turned off, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable display may be started from a lighting mode different from the lighting mode of any result mode, and if there is a segment that is not used in any result mode, the variable display is started from at least the state in which the segment is lit. You may try to do it. Further, the variable display may be started from the state where the same one segment is always lit each time. Further, the lighting mode when the fluctuation is started in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be the same or different.

[Special Figure 1 Processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 191 shows the special figure 1 changing process (step Y109) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by +1 (step Y621), a command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y622), and the effect command setting process is performed. Do (step Y623).

Next, the decorative special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y624), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y625). Since the gaming machine of the present embodiment may be forcibly stopped before the fluctuation time set at the start of the fluctuation, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the fluctuation is stopped. ..

After that, it is determined whether the final variation has a high probability (step Y626). When the special figure 1 variation display game has a high probability final variation, the high probability final variation flag of the special figure 1 is set. Then, when it is not the final fluctuation with high probability (step Y626; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y627), and the process proceeds to step Y629. Further, in the case of a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y626; Y), the display time at the time of the high-probability final fluctuation is set (step Y628), and the process proceeds to step Y629. The display time (stop time) of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game set here is 600 ms in the case of a miss, 2000 ms in the case of a big hit, and 136 ms in the case of a small hit, if it is not a high-probability final fluctuation. Display time is set. Further, in the case of a high probability final fluctuation, a display time of 7000 ms is set regardless of the result.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is out of alignment, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is out of alignment (step Y629). If it is out of the special figure 1 (step Y629; Y), the process proceeds to step Y644. Further, if the special figure 1 is not out of alignment (step Y629; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed (step Y630). Whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is running can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

Then, when the special figure 2 variation display game is not being executed (step Y630; Y), the process proceeds to step Y640. Further, when the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed (step Y630; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 display process is being performed (step Y631). That is, in this case, based on the fact that the special figure 1 variable display game has a special result, the running special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a missed result. Note that even if the variable display game in Special Figure 2 has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

If the process during display of Special Figure 2 is in progress (step Y631; Y), the process proceeds to step Y633. Further, when the special figure 2 display is not being processed (step Y631; N), the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by +1 (step Y632), and the display time of the special figure 1 set above as the display time of the special figure 2 is set. The display time of +4 ms is set (step Y633). By setting the display time of the special figure 1 + the display time of 4 ms as the display time of the special figure 2, the display time of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 ends at the same time. Even if the special figure 2 variable display game is already in the display time, the display time is reset and a new display time is started.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y634), the command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y635), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y636). ). After that, the decorative special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y637), the effect command setting process is performed (step Y638), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 is performed (step Y639).

Then, the command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y640), and is the special figure 1 small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit. Is determined (step Y641). In the case of a special figure 1 small hit (step Y641; Y), the process proceeds to step Y644. If it is not a special figure 1 small hit (step Y641; N), that is, if it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y642). ), Special figure 1 Loads information from the large winning opening opening information area and saves it in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y643).

After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y644), the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y645), and the special figure 1 is performed. Ends the process being displayed.

[Special Figure 2 Processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 192 shows the special figure 2 changing process (step Y140) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. In this special figure 2 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by +1 (step Y651), a command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y652), and the effect command setting process is performed. Do (step Y653).

Next, the decorative special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y654), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y655). After that, it is determined whether the final variation has a high probability (step Y656). When the special figure 2 variation display game has a high probability final variation, the high probability final variation flag of the special figure 2 is set.

Then, when it is not the final fluctuation with high probability (step Y656; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y657), and the process proceeds to step Y659. Further, in the case of a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y656; Y), the display time at the time of the high-probability final fluctuation is set (step Y658), and the process proceeds to step Y656. The display time (stop time) of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game set here is 600 ms regardless of the result if it is not a high-probability final fluctuation, and regardless of the result if it is a high-probability final fluctuation. The display time of 7000 ms is set.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is out of alignment, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is out of alignment (step Y659). If it is out of the special figure 2 (step Y659; Y), the process proceeds to step Y674. Further, if the special figure 2 is not out of alignment (step Y659; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed (step Y660). Whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is running can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

Then, when the special figure 1 variable display game is not being executed (step Y660; Y), the process proceeds to step Y670. Further, when the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (step Y660; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 display process is being performed (step Y661). That is, in this case, based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game has a special result, the running special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a missed result. Note that even if the variable display game in Special Figure 1 has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

If the process during display of Special Figure 1 is in progress (step Y661; Y), the process proceeds to step Y664. Further, when the process during display of the special figure 1 is not being performed (step Y661; N), the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by +1 (step Y662), and the process proceeds to step Y664.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y664), the command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y665), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y666). ). After that, the decorative special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y667), the effect command setting process is performed (step Y668), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 is performed (step Y669).

Then, the command is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y670), and is the special figure 2 small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit. Is determined (step Y671). In the case of a special figure 2 small hit (step Y671; Y), the process proceeds to step Y674. If it is not a special figure 2 small hit (step Y671; N), that is, if it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y672). ), Special figure 2 Loads information from the large winning opening opening information area and saves it in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y673).

After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y674), the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y675), and the special figure 2 is performed. Ends the process being displayed.

[Special Figure 1 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 1]
FIG. 193 shows the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y645) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 changing process. In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, first, the special figure 1 game process number “2” related to the special figure 1 display process is set (step Y681), and the process number is set in the special figure 1 game process number area. Is saved (step Y682).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y683). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to OFF. After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y684). ), Special figure 1 Ends the process transition setting process 1 during the change.

[Special Figure 2 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 1]
FIG. 194 shows the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y675) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 changing process. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, first, the special figure 2 game process number “2” related to the special figure 2 display process is set (step Y691), and the process number is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. Is saved (step Y692).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y693). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to OFF. After that, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y694). ), Special figure 2 Processing during change The transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Special figure 1 Displaying process Transition setting process 2]
FIG. 195 shows the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y669) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 changing process. In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2, first, the special figure 1 game process number “2” related to the special figure 1 display process is set (step Y701), and the process number is set in the special figure 1 game process number area. Is saved (step Y702).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y703), and then, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 1 The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the display 51 is saved in the fluctuation control flag area of FIG. 1 (step Y704).

Up to this point, it is the same as the above-mentioned special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, and hereinafter, information is set to obtain an outlier result. First, the stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y705), and the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area is cleared (step Y706).

Next, the special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area is cleared (step Y707), the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y708), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y709). ). Then, the special figure 1 stop symbol save area is cleared (step Y710), the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y711), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 is terminated. ..

[Special Figure 2 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 2]
FIG. 196 shows the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y639) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 changing process. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2, first, the special figure 2 game process number “2” related to the special figure 2 display process is set (step Y721), and the process number is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. Is saved (step Y722).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y723), and then, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure 2 The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the display 52 is saved in the fluctuation control flag area of FIG. 2 (step Y724).

Up to this point, it is the same as the above-mentioned special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, and hereinafter, information is set to obtain an outlier result. First, the stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y725), and the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area is cleared (step Y726).

Next, the special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area is cleared (step Y727), the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y728), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y729). ). Then, the special figure 2 stop symbol save area is cleared (step Y730), the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y731), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 is terminated. ..

By the above processing of FIGS. 191 to 196, when one special figure variation display game has a special result, the other special figure variation display game is forcibly stopped as a result of the loss. That is, the first end control process is performed in which the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with the disengagement result based on the special figure 1 variable display game having a special result, and the special figure 2 variable display game has a special result. Based on this, the second end control process is performed in which the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped as a result of the deviation.

From the above, the first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) executes the second variable display game when the execution control of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is performed. When the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) whose execution control is performed by the control means (game control device 100) has a special result, the first variation display game that performs the execution control is performed. Can be terminated as a result other than the special result, and the second variable display game execution control means is executed by the first variable display game execution control means when the execution control of the second variable display game is being performed. When the first variable display game under control has a special result, the second variable display game under the execution control can be terminated as a result other than the special result. As a result, when a special result is derived in one variable display game, the other variable display game can be forcibly stopped at the off result, so that no problem occurs even when simultaneous fluctuations are performed. Can be.

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
FIGS. 197 and 198 show the process during display of the special figure 1 (step Y110) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 display process, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the small hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y751), and the small hit flag is flagged. Clear one area (step Y752).

Next, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 area in the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y753), and the jackpot flag 1 area is cleared (step Y754). Then, the special figure 1 determines whether it is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is big hit information (step Y755), and if it is not a big hit (step Y755; N), the process proceeds to step Y777. Further, in the case of a big hit (step Y755; Y), a test signal relating to the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the special figure 1 variation display game (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, the accessory continuous operation device is operated). The middle signal is turned on and the signal per special symbol is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y756).

Then, the special figure 2 abnormality change release command is prepared (step Y757), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y758). That is, the abnormal change notification is terminated with the occurrence of the first special gaming state. After that, the round number upper limit value table is set (step Y759), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information (16, 8, 4 or 2 in the case of this embodiment) is acquired, and the round number upper limit value is acquired. Save to the area (step Y760). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y761).

Next, the decorative special symbol command corresponding to the special diagram 1 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step Y762), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y763). After that, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y764), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y765).

Next, the signal corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of becoming a big hit in the special figure fluctuation display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y766). In the case of the present embodiment, in step Y766, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned ON when the jackpot type is a jackpot other than the 2R probability variation D1, and is ON when the jackpot type is the 2R probability variation D1 in the high probability state, and the 2R probability variation in the low probability state. When it is D1, it is turned off. Further, the jackpot 3 signal is turned ON when the jackpot type is a jackpot other than the 2R probability variation D1, and is turned OFF when the jackpot type is the 2R probability variation D1 in the high probability state, and the 2R probability variation in the low probability state. When it is D1, it is turned ON.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 3000 ms or 4 ms) corresponding to the jackpot opening information is set (step Y767), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y768). .. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit that opens the upper big winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) (step Y769).

If it is a big hit to open the upper prize opening (step Y769; Y), the upper prize winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step Y770), and the upper big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area is flagged outside the fraud monitoring period. Is saved (step Y771), and the process proceeds to step Y774. Further, if it is not a big hit that opens the upper big winning opening (step Y769; N), that is, if it is a big hit that opens the lower big winning opening (second special variable winning device 39), the lower big winning opening illegal winning number area. (Step Y772), the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the lower prize-winning opening (step Y773), and the process proceeds to step Y774.

Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y774), and the game is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y775). Further, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step Y776) is performed, and the special figure 1 display processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Y755, when the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y755; N), that is, when the big hit flag 1 is the missed information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is the small hit (small hit information). (Step Y777). Then, when the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y777; Y), it is determined whether the final fluctuation is a high probability, that is, the last special figure fluctuation display game in which the lottery is performed in the high probability state. Determination (step Y778).

If it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y778; N), the process proceeds to step Y783. Further, in the case of a high probability final variation (step Y778; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y779), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y780). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y781), and the left-handed instruction notification flag and the high probability final fluctuation flag are cleared (step Y782). By clearing the left-handed instruction notification flag, the left-handed instruction notification command is set in the next special figure 1 normal processing, and the left-handed instruction notification is performed.

After that, a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area to prepare (step Y783), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y784). Further, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y785), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y786), and it is determined whether or not the probability is high (step Y787).

When the probability is not high (step Y787; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y788). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y789). As a result, the first game status display unit 77 is turned off, and a display instructing left-handed strike is displayed.

On the other hand, when the probability is high (step Y787; Y), the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y790). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y791). As a result, the first game status display unit 77 is turned on, and a display instructing right-handed strike is made.

After that, it is determined whether it is a small hit that opens the upper large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) (step Y792), and if it is a small hit that opens the upper large winning opening (step Y792; Y), Clear the area of the number of illegal winnings of the upper prize opening (step Y793), save the flag outside the illegal monitoring period in the illegal monitoring period flag area of the upper winning opening (step Y794), and proceed to step Y797. Further, if it is not a small hit that opens the upper large winning opening (step Y792; N), that is, if it is a small hit that opens the lower large winning opening (second special variable winning device 39), the lower large winning opening is illegally won. Clear several areas (step Y795), save the flag outside the fraudulent monitoring period in the lower prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y796), and move to step Y797. Then, the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (step Y797) is performed, and the special figure 1 display process is terminated.

Further, when it is determined in step Y777 that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y777; N), it is a high-probability final fluctuation, that is, the final special figure in which the lottery is performed in the high-probability state. It is determined whether the game is a variable display game (step Y798).

If it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y798; N), the process proceeds to step Y806. Further, in the case of a high probability final variation (step Y798; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y799), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y800). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y801), and the left-handed instruction notification flag and the high probability final fluctuation flag are cleared (step Y802).

Next, it is determined whether or not the small hit of the special figure 2 is in progress, that is, the second special game state based on the small hit generated in the special figure 2 variation display game is in progress (step Y803). If the small hit in FIG. 2 is in progress (step Y803; Y), the process proceeds to step Y806. As a result, the state of instructing right-handed strike is maintained. Further, when the small hit in FIG. 2 is not performed (step Y803; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y804), and the game state display number 2 area is in the left-handed state. Save the number (step Y805). After that, the special figure 1 changing state in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y806), the special figure 1 normal process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y807), and the special figure 1 display process is terminated. ..

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
FIGS. 199 and 200 show the process during display of the special figure 2 (step Y141) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. It should be noted that this special figure 2 display process is the same process as the special figure 1 display process described above for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 display process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the small hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y811), and the small hit flag is flagged. Clear two areas (step Y812).

Next, the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 area in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y813), and the jackpot flag 2 area is cleared (step Y814). Then, the special figure 2 determines whether it is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is big hit information (step Y815), and if it is not a big hit (step Y815; N), the process proceeds to step Y837. Further, in the case of a big hit (step Y815; Y), a test signal relating to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the special figure 2 variation display game (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, the accessory continuous operation device is operated). The middle signal is turned on and the signal per special symbol 2 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

Then, the special figure 2 abnormality change release command is prepared (step Y817), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y818). That is, the abnormal change notification is terminated with the occurrence of the first special gaming state. After that, the round number upper limit value table is set (step Y819), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information (16, 8, 4 or 2 in the case of this embodiment) is acquired, and the round number upper limit value is acquired. Save to the area (step Y820). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y821).

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step Y822), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y823). After that, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y824), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y825).

Next, the signal corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of becoming a big hit in the special figure fluctuation display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y826). In the case of the present embodiment, in step Y826, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned ON when the jackpot type is a jackpot other than the 2R probability variation D1, and is ON when the jackpot type is the 2R probability variation D1 in the high probability state, and the 2R probability variation in the low probability state. When it is D1, it is turned off. Further, the jackpot 3 signal is turned ON when the jackpot type is a jackpot other than the 2R probability variation D1, and is turned OFF when the jackpot type is the 2R probability variation D1 in the high probability state, and the 2R probability variation in the low probability state. When it is D1, it is turned ON.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 3000 ms or 4 ms) corresponding to the jackpot opening information is set (step Y827), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y828). .. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit that opens the upper big winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) (step Y829).

If it is a big hit to open the upper prize opening (step Y829; Y), the upper prize winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step Y830), and the upper big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area is flagged outside the fraud monitoring period. Is saved (step Y831), and the process proceeds to step Y834. Further, if it is not a big hit that opens the upper big winning opening (step Y829; N), that is, if it is a big hit that opens the lower big winning opening (second special variable winning device 39), the lower big winning opening illegal winning number area. (Step Y832), the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the lower prize-winning opening (step Y833), and the process proceeds to step Y834.

Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y834), and the game is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y835). Further, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step Y836) is performed, and the special figure 2 display processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Y815, if the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y815; N), that is, if the big hit flag 2 is the missed information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is the small hit (small hit information). (Step Y837). Then, when the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y837; Y), it is determined whether it is a high-probability final variation, that is, whether it is the final special figure variation display game in which the lottery is performed in the high-probability state. Determination (step Y838).

If it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y838; N), the process proceeds to step Y843. Further, in the case of a high probability final variation (step Y838; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y839), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y840). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y841), and the left-handed instruction notification flag and the high probability final fluctuation flag are cleared (step Y842). By clearing the left-handed instruction notification flag, the left-handed instruction notification command is set in the next special figure 1 normal processing, and the left-handed instruction notification is performed.

After that, a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area to prepare (step Y843), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y844). Further, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y845), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y846), and it is determined whether or not the probability is high (step Y847).

If the probability is not high (step Y847; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y848). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y849). As a result, the first game status display unit 77 is turned off, and a display instructing left-handed strike is displayed.

On the other hand, when the probability is high (step Y847; Y), the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y850). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y851). As a result, the first game status display unit 77 is turned on, and a display instructing right-handed strike is made.

After that, it is determined whether it is a small hit that opens the upper large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) (step Y852), and if it is a small hit that opens the upper large winning opening (step Y852; Y), The area of the number of illegal winnings of the upper prize opening is cleared (step Y853), the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the illegal monitoring period flag area of the upper winning opening (step Y854), and the process proceeds to step Y857. Further, if it is not a small hit that opens the upper large winning opening (step Y852; N), that is, if it is a small hit that opens the lower large winning opening (second special variable winning device 39), the lower large winning opening is illegally won. Clear several areas (step Y855), save the flag outside the fraudulent monitoring period in the lower prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y856), and proceed to step Y857. Then, the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (step Y857) is performed, and the special figure 2 display process is terminated.

Further, when it is determined in step Y837 that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y837; N), it is a high-probability final fluctuation, that is, the final special figure in which the lottery is performed in the high-probability state. It is determined whether the game is a variable display game (step Y858). If it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y858; N), the process proceeds to step Y866. Further, in the case of a high probability final variation (step Y858; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y859), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y860). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y861), and the left-handed instruction notification flag and the high probability final fluctuation flag are cleared (step Y862).

Next, it is determined whether or not the small hit of the special figure 1 is in progress, that is, the second special game state based on the small hit generated in the special figure 1 variation display game is in progress (step Y863). When the small hit of the special figure 1 is in progress (step Y863; Y), the process proceeds to step Y866. As a result, the state of instructing right-handed strike is maintained. Further, when the small hit in FIG. 1 is not performed (step Y863; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y864), and the left-handed state is in the game state display number 2 area. Save the number (step Y865). After that, the special figure 2 change in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y866), the special figure 2 normal process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y867), and the special figure 2 display process is terminated. ..

That is, the first special game in which the game control device 100 generates the first special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened with the operation of the conditional device based on the fact that the variable display game has the first special result. A second special game generating means for generating a second special gaming state in which the special variable winning device is opened without operating the condition device based on the fact that the variable display game has the second special result while forming the generating means. Make an eggplant.

[Fanfare / Interval processing Transition setting processing 1]
FIG. 201 describes the details of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (steps Y776, Y836) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 display processing and special drawing 2 display processing. In this fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing, first, the signal relating to the start of the big hit (first special gaming state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y871). Here, the big hit 1 signal output by the big hit or the small hit is set to ON. Next, the signal relating to the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (the state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y872). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal is set to OFF.

After that, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step Y873), the number in the low probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y874), and the special figure game mode is used. The special figure low probability flag is saved in the flag area (step Y875).

Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step Y876), and the special figure fluctuation display that can be executed in the high probability state is displayed. Clear the high-probability fluctuation frequency area for managing the number of games (step Y877). As a result, the high probability state and the time saving state are terminated, and the normal probability state and the normal state are set.

Next, the jackpot information is saved in the special figure status area (step Y878), and the high probability final fluctuation flag area is cleared (step Y879). Further, the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y880), and the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y881).

After that, the release flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal change flag area (step Y882), and the special figure 2 abnormal number area for storing the special figure 2 abnormal change number is cleared (step Y883). Further, the special figure 1 fluctuation frequency area is cleared to 0 (step Y884), the special figure 2 abnormality change notification timer area is cleared to 0 (step Y885), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting process is terminated. That is, with the occurrence of a big hit, all the information related to the abnormal change in Special Figure 2 is cleared.

[Special figure 1 Small hit fanfare medium processing Transition setting processing]
FIG. 202 shows the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (step Y797) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 display process. In this special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting process, first, "7" related to the small hit fanfare middle processing is set as the processing number (step Y891), and the processing number is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Save (step Y892).

Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y893), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y894). Here, the big hit 1 signal output by the big hit or the small hit is set to ON. Further, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y895). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to ON.

After that, the small hit medium information is saved in the special figure status information (step Y896), the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y897), and the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting process is completed. do.

[Special Figure 2 Small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 203 shows the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (step Y857) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 display process. In this special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting process, first, "7" related to the small hit fanfare middle processing is set as the processing number (step Y901), and the processing number is set in the special figure 2 game processing number area. Save (step Y902).

Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y903), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y904). Here, the big hit 1 signal output by the big hit or the small hit is set to ON. Further, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y905). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to ON.

After that, the small hit medium information is saved in the special figure status information (step Y906), the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y907), and the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting process is completed. do.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
FIG. 204 shows the fanfare / interval processing (steps Y111 and Y142) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In this fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by +1 (step Y951), the large winning opening opening information and the round command corresponding to the number of rounds are prepared (step Y952), and the production command setting process is performed. (Step Y953).

Next, the initial value of the jackpot processing control pointer corresponding to the jackpot opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y954), and the pointer initial value is saved in the jackpot processing control pointer area (step Y955). As the initial value of the processing control pointer during the big hit, 0 is set when opening and closing are repeated in one round. Here, the 5th R of the 16R probability variation F3 (special figure 2 upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 5) corresponds. Further, in the case of performing one continuous opening in one round, the jackpot operation end value 21 is set. The initial value may be set to a value other than 0 according to the number of times of opening and closing in one round.

Then, the large winning opening opening information and the large winning opening opening time corresponding to the number of rounds are set (step Y956), and 4 is set as the processing number (step Y957). The opening time set here is, for example, 200 ms, 600 ms, 1600 ms, or 29000 ms.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y958), and if it is a special figure 1 big hit (step Y958; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y959). ), The opening time of the big winning opening is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y960). On the other hand, when it is not the big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y958; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y961), and the big winning opening opening time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. (Step Y962).

Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit for opening the upper big winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) (step Y963). It is possible to determine whether or not it is a big hit for opening the upper prize opening from the set information for opening the big prize opening. In the case of a big hit of opening the big winning opening (step Y963; Y), the processing transition setting process 1 during the opening of the big winning opening is performed (step Y964), and the fanfare / interval processing is terminated. If it is not a big hit for opening the upper prize opening (step Y963; N), the process transition setting process 2 for opening the big prize opening is performed (step Y965), and the fanfare / interval processing is terminated.

[Processing during opening of large winning opening Transition setting processing 1]
FIG. 205 shows the process transition setting process 1 (step Y964) during the process during opening of the large winning opening in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval process. In the process transition setting process 1 during the opening of the large winning opening, first, the signal relating to the opening start of the upper winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y971). Here, the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1 is set to ON. Then, in order to open the opening / closing door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38, the upper winning opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y972), and the number of winnings to the large winning opening is counted. The number of large winning openings is cleared (step Y973), and the processing transition setting process 1 during the opening of the large winning openings is terminated.

[Processing during opening of large winning opening Transition setting processing 2]
FIG. 206 shows the process transition setting process 2 (step Y965) during the opening of the large winning opening in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval process. In the process transition setting process 2 during the opening of the large winning opening, first, the signal relating to the opening start of the lower winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y981). Here, the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 2 is set to ON. Then, in order to open the opening / closing door 39c of the second special variable winning device 39, the lower special winning opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y982), and the number of winnings to the large winning opening is counted. The number of large winning openings is cleared (step Y983), and the processing transition setting process 2 during the opening of the large winning openings is terminated.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening]
FIG. 207 shows the processing during opening of the large winning opening (steps Y112 and Y143) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In this big winning opening opening processing, first, the big hit middle processing control pointer is loaded (step Y1001), and it is determined whether the loaded value is equal to or higher than the big hit operation end value (21 in this case) (step Y1002).

If the loaded value is not greater than or equal to the jackpot operation end value (21 in this case) (step Y1002; N), the jackpot operation transition setting process is performed (step Y1003), and the jackpot operation control pointer is updated by +1 (step Y1004). , The processing is finished while the big winning opening is open. In this case, opening and closing is performed during one round, and the opening / closing mode of the special variable winning device is set according to the updated jackpot processing control pointer.

On the other hand, when the loaded value is equal to or higher than the jackpot operation end value (21 in this case) (step Y1002; Y), the current number of rounds in the running special gaming state and the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit value area are used. Is compared to determine whether the current round is the final round (step Y1005). If it is not the final round (step Y1005; N), an interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared (step Y1006), and an effect command setting process (step Y1008) is performed. Further, in the case of the final round (step Y1005; Y), an ending command related to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special gaming state is prepared (step Y1007), and an effect command setting process (step Y1008) is prepared. I do.

Next, the remaining ball processing time corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is set (step Y1009), and 5 related to the large winning opening remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step Y1010). The remaining sphere processing time is set to 600 ms, 800 ms, or 1400 ms. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1011).

In the case of a big hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1011; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1012), and the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1012). Step Y1013). On the other hand, when it is not a big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1011; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1014), and the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. (Step Y1015).

After that, the off-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1016), and the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is completed. In step Y1016, off-data is set for both the upper winning opening solenoid and the lower winning opening solenoid, and the closing process is performed for any of the winning openings.

[Big hit operation transition setting process]
FIG. 208 shows the big hit operation transition setting process (step Y1004) in the above-mentioned large winning opening opening process. In this jackpot operation transition setting process, first, branch processing is performed depending on whether the value of the jackpot operation control pointer is an even number or an odd number (step Y1021). Here, it is assumed that 0 is an even number and the branch processing is performed.

If the value of the jackpot processing control pointer is even in step Y1021, the wait time corresponding to the control pointer is set (step Y1022). Here, 1500 ms is set as the wait time. It should be noted that different wait times may be set depending on the value of the pointer. Next, the off-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1023), and the process proceeds to step Y1026. In step Y1023, off-data is set for both the upper winning opening solenoid and the lower winning opening solenoid, and the closing process is performed for any of the winning openings.

On the other hand, when the value of the big hit middle processing control pointer is an odd number in step Y1021, the big winning opening opening time corresponding to the control pointer is set (step Y1024). Here, as the big winning opening opening time, 200 ms is set when the value of the big hit middle processing control pointer is 1 to 19, and 25000 ms is set when the value is 21. Next, the upper prize opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1025), and the process proceeds to step Y1026. Since only the upper prize opening (first special variable winning device 38) repeats opening and closing during one round in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, on-data is saved for the upper prize winning opening solenoid in step Y1024. is doing. Of course, depending on the setting of the gaming machine, the lower large winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) may be able to be repeatedly opened and closed in one round.

After that, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y1026), and if it is a special figure 1 big hit (step Y1026; Y), the set time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1026). Step Y1027), the jackpot operation transition setting process is terminated. If it is not the big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1026; N), the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1028), and the big hit operation transition setting process is terminated. By the above processing, it is possible to repeatedly open and close the big winning opening in one round.

[Treatment of remaining balls in the large winning opening]
FIG. 209 shows the large winning opening residual ball processing (steps Y113, Y144) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In this large winning opening remaining ball processing, first, the current number of rounds in the running special game state and the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit value area are compared to determine whether the current round is the final round. (Step Y1041).

Then, when the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step Y1041; N), the signal relating to the end of opening the large winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1042). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to OFF and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to OFF. Next, the interval time corresponding to the large winning opening opening information and the number of rounds this time is set (step Y1043), and the fanfare / processing during the interval 3 is set as the processing number (step Y1044).

The interval period between rounds is the period from the end of the round to the elapse of the remaining ball processing time and the elapse of the remaining ball processing time to the elapse of the interval time. For example, in the case of the special drawing 1 upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 1, the remaining ball processing time of 1400 ms and the interval time of 600 ms are set, so that the interval period is 2000 ms. Is executed.

On the other hand, when the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step Y1041; Y), the jackpot end processing transition setting process is performed (step Y1045), and the ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step). Y1046), 6 related to the special figure 1 big hit end process or the special figure 2 big hit end process is set as the processing number (step Y1047).

Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1048). In the case of a big hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1048; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1049), and the set time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step). Y1050), the processing of the remaining balls in the big winning opening is completed. On the other hand, when it is not a big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1048; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1051), and the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1051). Step Y1052), the processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening is completed.

The ending period from the end of the final round to the end of the special gaming state is the period from the end of the final round to the lapse of the remaining ball processing time and the lapse of the remaining ball processing time to the lapse of the ending time. For example, in the case of the special drawing 1 upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 1, since the remaining ball processing time of 1400 ms and the ending time of 9600 ms are set, the ending period is 11000 ms, and in this ending period, the ending effect is produced by the display device 41 or the like. Is executed.

[Big hit end processing Transition setting processing]
FIG. 210 shows the jackpot end processing transition setting processing (step Y1045) in the above-mentioned large winning opening remaining ball processing. In this jackpot end process transition setting process, first, a signal relating to the end of opening of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1071). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to OFF and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to OFF.

Next, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening is cleared (step Y1072), and the information in the round number area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step Y1073). ), Clear the information in the round number upper limit area for storing the upper limit of the number of rounds in the special gaming state (step Y1074).

Then, the information in the round number upper limit value information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the number of rounds is cleared (step Y1075), and the opening information determination flag for the large winning opening is stored in the large winning opening opening information area. The information is cleared (step Y1076), the information in the jackpot middle control pointer area for setting the opening / closing mode of the jackpot is cleared (step Y1077), and the jackpot end processing transition setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing]
FIG. 211 shows the special figure 1 big hit end process (step Y114) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 big hit end process, first, "0" is set as the process number related to the special figure 1 normal process (step Y1101), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1102).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1103). Here, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, the signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state (the state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1104). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The big hit 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

After that, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1105). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 hit signal, and the special symbol 2 hit signal are set to OFF. Next, the signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1106). Here, the special symbol 1 high-probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high-probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal are set to ON.

Then, the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1107). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, the number in the high probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1108). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the time is always shortened during the high probability, so here, these are not distinguished and are used as the numbers in the high probability. After that, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1109), and the number turned off is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1110).

Next, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1111), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1112). Clear the special figure status area (step Y1113). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed is set.

After that, the high probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1114), and the initial value (here, 50) is set in the high probability fluctuation number area for managing the number of executions of the special figure change display game in the high probability state. ) Is saved (step Y1115). Further, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1116), and the special figure 2 game wait time value (here, 8 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step). Y1117), the special figure 1 big hit end process is completed.

By performing this special figure 1 jackpot end processing, it is possible to start the special figure variation display game for both special figure 1 and special figure 2, but in the timer interrupt processing, the special figure 2 game is performed after the special figure 1 game processing. In order to perform the processing, the processing to start the special figure variation display game is performed in the special figure 2 game processing by the timer interrupt that has performed the special figure 1 big hit end processing, and the special figure 2 variation display game is performed rather than the special figure 1 variation display game. Can be started earlier. Therefore, by saving the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in step Y1117, the start processing of the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt processing, and the special figure 1 The variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt.

That is, the second variable display game execution control means is the first until the game control device 100 can execute the process related to the start of the first variable display game after the end of the special game state. 2 Variable display A game processing standby means for preventing the processing related to the start of the game from being executed.

[Special figure 2 big hit end processing]
FIG. 212 shows the special figure 2 big hit end process (step Y145) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. This special figure 2 big hit end process is the same process except that step Y1117 in the above-mentioned special figure 1 big hit process is not performed.

First, "0" is set as the processing number related to the special figure 2 normal processing (step Y1121), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1122). Next, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1123). Here, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, the signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state (the state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1124). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The big hit 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

After that, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1125). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 hit signal, and the special symbol 2 hit signal are set to OFF. Next, the signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1126). Here, the special symbol 1 high-probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high-probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal are set to ON.

Then, the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1127). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, the number in the high probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1128). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the time is always shortened during the high probability, so here, these are not distinguished and are used as the numbers in the high probability. After that, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1129), and the number turned off is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1130).

Next, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1131), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1132). Clear the special figure status area (step Y1133). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed is set.

After that, the high probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1134), and the initial value (here, 50) is set in the high probability fluctuation number area for managing the number of executions of the special figure change display game in the high probability state. ) Is saved (step Y1135). Further, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1136), and the special figure 2 big hit end process is terminated.

By these special figure 1 big hit processing and special figure 2 big hit processing, a specific gaming state which is a high probability state is set until the special figure fluctuation display game is executed 50 times after the end of the first special gaming state. .. That is, the game control device 100 can generate a specific game state in which the probability that the result of the variable display game becomes a special result is higher than the normal state for a predetermined period after the end of the special game state. Make. Further, the specific game state generating means, as the specific game state, increases the probability that the result of the variable display game becomes the first special result for a predetermined period, as compared with the normal state.

[Small hit fanfare processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare middle process (steps Y115, Y146) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 213, in this small hit fanfare middle process, first, branching is performed by an open pattern (step Y1201).

If the opening pattern is small hit 1 (special figure 1 lower large winning opening opening / closing pattern 1) in step Y1201, prepare a small hit opening command for opening the lower large winning opening (second special variable winning device 39). (Step Y1202), the effect command setting process is performed (step Y1203). Next, 8 related to the small hit medium processing is set as the processing number (step Y1204), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1205).

After that, the small hit opening time 1 (here, 48 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1206), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1207). Here, the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 2 is set to ON. Then, the lower prize opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1208), and the process proceeds to step Y1230.

Further, when the opening pattern is the small hit 2 (special figure 2 lower large winning opening opening / closing pattern 2) in step Y1201, the command during opening the small hit opening of the lower large winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) is issued. Prepare (step Y1209) and perform the effect command setting process (step Y1210). Next, 8 related to the small hit medium processing is set as the processing number (step Y1211), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1212).

After that, the small hit opening time 2 (here, 1600 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1213), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1214). Here, the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 2 is set to ON. Then, the lower prize opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1215), and the process proceeds to step Y1230.

If the opening pattern is the small hit 3 (special figure 2 upper large winning opening opening / closing pattern 6) in step Y1201, the small hit opening command for opening the upper large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is issued. Prepare (step Y1216) and perform the effect command setting process (step Y1217). Next, 8 related to the small hit medium processing is set as the processing number (step Y1218), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1219).

After that, the small hit opening time 3 (here, 1200 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1220), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1221). Here, the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1 is set to ON. Then, the upper prize opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1222), and the process proceeds to step Y1230.

If the opening pattern is the small hit 4 (special figure 2 upper large winning opening opening / closing pattern 7) in step Y1201, the small hit opening command for opening the upper large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is issued. Prepare (step Y1223) and perform the effect command setting process (step Y1224). Next, 8 related to the small hit medium processing is set as the processing number (step Y1225), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1226).

After that, the small hit opening time 4 (here, 1600 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1227), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1228). Here, the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1 is set to ON. Then, the upper prize opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1229), and the process proceeds to step Y1230. After performing the processing according to these small hit types, the large winning opening count number area for counting the number of winnings to the large winning opening is cleared (step Y1230), and the processing during the small hit fanfare is completed.

[Small hit processing]
FIG. 214 shows the small hit medium processing (steps Y116, Y147) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In this small hit middle process, first, a small hit end screen command is prepared (step Y1241), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y1242). Next, branching is performed according to the open pattern (step Y1243).

When the opening pattern is the small hit 1 (special figure 1 lower large winning opening opening / closing pattern 1) in step Y1243, 9 related to the small hit remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step Y1244), and the special figure 1 The processing number is saved in the game processing number area (step Y1245). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time 1 (here, 600 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1246), and the off data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1247). End the hit processing.

When the opening pattern is the small hit 2 (special figure 2 lower large winning opening opening / closing pattern 2) in step Y1243, 9 related to the small hit remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step Y1248), and the special figure 2 The processing number is saved in the game processing number area (step Y1249). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time 2 (here, 600 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1250), and the off data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1251). End the hit processing.

If the opening pattern is a small hit 3 or 4 (special figure 2 upper winning opening opening / closing pattern 6 or 7) in step Y1243, 9 related to the small hit remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step Y1252). , Special figure 2 The processing number is saved in the game processing number area (step Y1253). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time 3 (here, 800 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1254), and the off data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1255). End the hit processing.

In steps Y1247, Y1251 and Y1255, off-data is set for both the upper prize opening solenoid and the lower prize opening solenoid, and the closing process is performed for each of the major winning openings.

[Small hit residual ball treatment]
FIG. 215 shows the small hit remaining ball processing (steps Y117, Y148) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In this small hit remaining ball processing, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit is a small hit in FIG. 1 (step Y1271). In the case of a small hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1271; Y), 10 related to the special figure 1 small hit end process is set as the processing number (step Y1272), and the processing number is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Save (step Y1273). Next, the small hit ending time (here, 100 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1274), and the process proceeds to step Y1278.

If it is not the small hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1271; N), 10 related to the special figure 2 small hit process is set as the processing number (step Y1275), and the processing number is set in the special figure 2 game processing number area. Save (step Y1276). Next, the small hit ending time (here, 100 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1277), and the process proceeds to step Y1278.

Then, the signal relating to the end of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1278). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal are set to OFF. Further, the large winning opening count area is cleared (step Y1279), and the small hit remaining ball processing is completed.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing]
FIG. 216 shows the special figure 1 small hit end process (step Y118) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 small hit end process, first, 0 related to the special figure 1 normal process is set as the process number (step Y1301), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1302).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1303). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1304), the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1305), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1305). Y1306). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed is set.

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability is high (step Y1307), and if the probability is high (step Y1307; Y), the process proceeds to step Y1310. Further, when the probability is not high (step Y1307; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1308). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1309), and the special figure 2 game wait time value (here, 8 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1310). ), End the special figure 1 small hit end process. Here, too, by saving the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area, the start processing of the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt processing, and the special figure 1 variable display game. And special figure 2 The variable display game is processed by the same timer interrupt.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
FIG. 217 shows the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y149) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. In this special figure 2 small hit end process, first, 0 related to the special figure 2 normal process is set as the process number (step Y1331), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1332).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1334), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1335). After that, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1336), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1337). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed is set.

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability is high (step Y1338), and if the probability is high (step Y1338; Y), the special figure 2 small hit end process is terminated. Further, when the probability is not high (step Y1338; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1339). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1340), and the special figure 2 small hit end process is terminated.

[Design fluctuation control process]
FIG. 218 shows the symbol variation control processing (steps Y120, Y153) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 and setting the display data of the special symbol. In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether the variation control flag of the symbol to be controlled (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is changing (step Y1401).

Then, when the fluctuation control flag is changing (step Y1402; Y), the symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step Y1403), and the blinking control timer related to the symbol to be controlled is acquired. Is updated by -1 (step Y1404), and it is determined whether the value of the timer is 0, that is, whether the time is up (step Y1405).

If the value of the blinking control timer is not 0 (step Y1405; N), the process proceeds to step Y1408. When the value of the blinking control timer is 0 (step Y1405; Y), the initial value of the blinking control timer (here, 100 ms) is saved in the blinking control timer area to be controlled (step Y1406), and the symbol to be controlled is controlled. The variable symbol number according to the above is updated by +1 (step Y1407), and display data corresponding to the value in the target variable symbol number region is acquired (step Y1408). After that, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step Y1411), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation control flag is not changing (step Y1402; N), the symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step Y1409). Then, the display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area of the control target is acquired (step Y1410), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step Y1411), and the symbol variation control process is terminated. As a result, among the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure corresponding to the symbol number is displayed on the special figure display to be controlled.

[Segment LED editing process]
FIG. 219 shows the segment LED editing process (step X112) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process. In this segment LED editing process, the storage display unit 54 provided in the batch display device 50, a round display displaying the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing of the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39). Part 60, the first game state display unit 77 that informs the player of the method of hitting that is advantageous to the player among left-handed (normal) and right-handed, and the probability state (high probability state or low probability state) of the special figure variation display game. Settings related to the drive of the segment LEDs constituting the probability display unit 78 to be notified are set.

In this segment LED editing process, first, a special figure 1 hold number table in which the display mode on the storage display unit 54 is defined is set (step X601), and display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired and a segment is obtained. Save to the area (step X602). Next, a round display table in which the display mode on the round display unit 60 is defined is set (step X603), display data corresponding to the round LED pointer is acquired, and the display data is saved in the segment area (step X604).

Then, the game state display table 1 in which the display mode on the probability display unit 78 is defined is set (step X605), and the display data corresponding to the game state display number is acquired and saved in the segment area (step X606). After that, the game state display table 2 in which the display mode on the first game state display unit 77 is defined is set (step X607), the display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired, and the display data is saved in the segment area (step X607). Step X608), the segment LED editing process is terminated.

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
FIG. 220 shows a magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process. In this magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and the start and end of fraud notification are set.

In this magnet fraud monitoring process, first, the magnet sensor 61 (magnetic sensor switch) is turned on from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3), that is, abnormal magnetism. (Step X611). When the magnet sensor is on (step X611; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer that measures the detection period of abnormal magnetism is updated by +1 to check whether the timer has timed up. Determination (step X613).

When the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (step X613; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period of time, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step X614), and the initial value of the magnet fraud notification timer (step X614). Here, 60,000 ms) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step X615). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step X616), a magnet fraud generation flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step X617), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value in the magnet fraud flag region. (Step X613). That is, when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period (for example, eight interrupts), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, when the magnet sensor 61 (magnetic sensor switch) is not on (step X611; N), that is, when abnormal magnetism is not detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step X618), and the magnet fraud notification time is reached. If the magnet fraud notification timer that specifies is not 0, -1 is updated (step X619). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step X620). Even when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed up (step X613; N), the process proceeds to step X619.

Then, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (step X620; N), that is, when the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step X620; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up, the fraud notification period has expired, or the fraud notification has been sent from the beginning. If not, prepare a command to end the magnet fraud notification (step X621). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step X622), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value in the magnet fraud flag region (step X623).

Then, when the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step X623; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the values do not match (step X623; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step X624), the effect command setting process is performed (step X625), and the magnet fraud monitoring process is completed. do.

[Radio wave fraud monitoring process]
FIG. 221 shows the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step X114) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process. In the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62, and the start and end of the fraudulent notification are set.

In this panel radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, the panel radio wave sensor 62 starts from the state of the detection signal output from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121a. It is determined whether it is on, that is, it is in a state where an abnormal radio wave is detected (step X631). When the panel radio wave sensor is on (step X631; Y), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the initial value of the radio wave fraud notification timer (here, 60000 ms) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step X632).

Then, a command for radio wave fraud notification is prepared (step X633), a board radio wave fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a board radio wave fraud flag (step X634), and the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is the value in the board radio wave fraud flag area. It is determined whether they match (step X639). That is, in the case of radio wave fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

On the other hand, when the panel radio wave sensor is not on (step X631; N), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer that regulates the radio wave fraud notification time is not 0, and the radio wave fraud notification timer is updated by -1 (step X631; N). Step X635). The minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (step X636).

If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not 0 (step X636; N), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (step X636; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up, the fraudulent notification period has expired, or the fraudulent notification has been sent from the beginning. If this is not done, prepare a command to end the board radio wave fraud notification (step X637), prepare a board radio wave fraud release flag as a board radio wave fraud flag (step X638), and prepare the board radio wave fraud flag as the board radio wave. It is determined whether or not the value matches the value of the invalid flag area (step X639).

Then, when the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step X639; Y), the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the values do not match (step X639; N), the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area (step X640), the effect command setting process is performed (step X641), and the board radio wave fraud monitoring is performed. End the process.

[External information editing process]
FIG. 222 shows the external information editing process (step X115) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process. In the external information editing process, monitoring results in payout command transmission process (step X105), winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X108), magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113), panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step X114), etc. Based on the above, information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device is created and set in an output buffer.

In this external information editing process, first, it is determined whether a glass frame opening error is occurring (step X701), and if a glass frame opening error is not occurring (step X701; N), the main body frame (front frame 12) is being generated. ) It is determined whether an open error is occurring (step X702). When the main body frame opening error is not occurring (step X702; N), the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X703), and the off data of the security signal is used as external information. It is saved in the output data area (step X704), and the process proceeds to step X707.

On the other hand, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (step X701; Y) or when a main body frame (front frame 12) opening error is occurring (step X702; Y), the door / frame opening signal is transmitted. The on-data is saved in the external information output data area (step X705), the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X706), and the process proceeds to step X707. That is, the information that the glass frame 14 and the front frame 12 are open is output as external information.

Next, if the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not 0, the security signal control timer is updated by -1 (step X707). ). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to 0.

Then, when the value of the security signal control timer is not 0 (step X708; N), that is, when the time is not up, the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X710), and in step X711. Transition. As a result, it is output as external information that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized. When the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step X708; Y), is there a frame radio wave fraud that detects an abnormal radio wave by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12? Is determined (step X709).

When the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step X709; Y), the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X710), and the process proceeds to step X711. Further, when the frame radio wave error is not occurring (step X709; N), it is determined whether a switch abnormality error such as a switch connector disconnection is occurring (step X711). Then, when the switch abnormality error is not occurring (step X711; N), the process proceeds to step X713. When a switch abnormality error is occurring (step X711; Y), the on-data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X712), and the process proceeds to step X713.

Then, the magnet fraud is occurring (step X713; Y), the panel radio wave fraud is occurring (step X714; Y), the big winning opening fraud is occurring (step X715; Y), and the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation is occurring (step X716; Y). ), The on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X718), and the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step). X719), the process proceeds to step X720. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information. If any of the errors in steps X713 to X716 has not occurred, the off-data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X717), and the process proceeds to step X720.

Then, the start port 1 signal editing process (step X720) for editing the winning signal to the first starting winning opening 36 and the starting port 2 signal editing process (step X721) for editing the winning signal to the second starting winning opening 37 are performed. conduct. Next, the main prize ball signal editing process (step X722) for setting the information regarding the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and the symbol fixed number signal editing process for setting the information related to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game is performed. (Step X723), the external information editing process is terminated.

[Starting port 1 signal editing process]
FIG. 223 shows the start port 1 signal editing process (step X720) in the above-mentioned external information editing process. In this start port 1 signal editing process, first, if the start port 1 signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X731). The minimum value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is 0 (step X732). When the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is 0 (step X732; Y), it is determined whether the number of start port 1 signal outputs is 0 (step X733).

When the number of start port 1 signal outputs is not 0 (step X733; N), the number of start port 1 signal outputs is updated by -1 (step X734), and the start port 1 signal is output to the start port 1 signal output control timer area. The initial value of the control timer is saved (step X735). The initial value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is the sum of the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the start port signal. (For example, 192 ms). After that, the on-data for turning on the start port 1 signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X737), and the start port 1 signal editing process is terminated. When the number of start port 1 signal outputs is 0 (step X733; Y), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X738). ), Start port 1 Ends the signal editing process.

On the other hand, when the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is not 0 (step X732; N), it is determined whether the start port 1 signal output control timer is in the output on section (step X736). The fact that the start port 1 signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms) or more. When the start port 1 signal output control timer is in the output on section (step X736; Y), the process shifts to step X737. When the start port 1 signal output control timer is not in the output on section (step X736; N), the off data for turning off the start port 1 signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step X838), the start port 1 signal editing process is terminated. The start port 2 signal editing process (step X721) in the above-mentioned external information editing process performs the same processing as the start port 1 signal editing process for the start port 2 signal.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
FIG. 224 shows the main prize ball signal editing process (step X722) in the above-mentioned external information editing process. The main prize ball signal editing process outputs the main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number) generated by winning a prize in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case) to an external device. It is a process.

In this main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X741). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step X742). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step X742; Y), it is determined whether the number of times of main prize ball signal output is 0 (step X743).

When the number of times of output of the main prize ball signal is not 0 (step X743; N), the number of times of output of the main prize ball signal is updated by -1 (step X744), and the main prize ball signal is output to the main prize ball signal output control timer area. The initial value of the control timer is saved (step X745). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is the sum of the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the main prize ball signal. It is time (for example, 192 ms). After that, the on-data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X747), and the main prize ball signal editing process is completed. When the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is 0 (step X743; Y), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step). X748), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step X742; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section (step X746). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms) or more. When the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section (step X746; Y), the process shifts to step X747. When the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on section (step X746; N), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step X748), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

[Symbol confirmation count signal editing process]
FIG. 225 shows the symbol determination number signal editing process (step X723) in the above-mentioned external information editing process. The symbol fixed number signal editing process is a process for controlling the output time of information related to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game.

In this symbol confirmation count signal editing process, first, if the symbol confirmation count signal output control timer is not 0, the symbol is updated by -1 (step X751). The minimum value of the symbol fixed number signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the symbol fixed number signal output control timer is 0 (step X752). When the value of the symbol confirmation count signal output control timer is 0 (step X752; Y), it is determined whether the symbol confirmation count signal output count, which is updated by +1 each time the special symbol variation display game ends, is 0. (Step X753).

When the number of symbol confirmation number signal output is not 0 (step X753; N), the number of symbol confirmation number signal output is updated by -1 (step X754), and the main prize ball signal is output to the symbol confirmation number signal output control timer area. The initial value of the control timer is saved (step X755). The initial value of the symbol confirmation count signal output control timer is the sum of the on state (for example, high level) time (here, 256 ms) and the off state (for example, low level) time (here, 300 ms) of the symbol confirmation count signal. It is the time (here, 556 ms). Since the gaming machine of the present embodiment can simultaneously execute the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the on-state time is set to 256 ms and the off-state time is set to 300 ms.

After that, the on-data for turning on the symbol confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X7547), and the symbol confirmation count signal editing process is terminated. When the number of symbol confirmation count signals is 0 (step X753; Y), off-data for turning off the symbol confirmation count signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step). X758), the symbol determination number signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the symbol confirmation number signal output control timer is not 0 (step X752; N), it is determined whether the symbol confirmation number signal output control timer is in the output on section (step X756). The fact that the symbol confirmation number signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the symbol confirmation number signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 300 ms) or more. When the symbol fixed number signal output control timer is in the output on section (step X756; Y), the process shifts to step X757. When the symbol confirmation count signal output control timer is not in the output on section (step X756; N), the off data for turning off the symbol confirmation count signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step X748), the symbol determination number signal editing process is terminated.

Next, the production of the game will be described. FIG. 226 shows a display example on the display device 41. These display controls are controlled by the effect control device 300 based on the control information received from the game control device 100.

FIG. 226 (a) shows an example of display on the display device 41 during a game in a normal gaming state. A game mode display unit 80 for displaying a game state is provided in the upper right portion of the display area. Here, a "normal stage" is displayed, which means that the player is in a normal game state. Further, in the center of the display area, a decorative special figure 1 variable display game display unit 81 for displaying the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is provided. Here, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is displayed by displaying the identification information in a variable manner in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas and then stopping and displaying the identification information.

At the lower right of the display area, a decorative special figure 2 variable display game display unit 82 for displaying the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is provided. Here, ○ and-are used as identification information, and these are displayed alternately in the variable display, and then ○ is displayed in the case of a special result, and-is stopped in the case of an outlier, so that the decorative special figure 2 variable display is displayed. Display the game.

A storage display unit 83 for displaying a decorative start storage display corresponding to the first start storage is provided in the lower center of the display area. The decorative start memory display displayed here has a one-to-one correspondence with the first start memory and is displayed side by side in the order of storage, and here, it is shown that there are four first start memories. The decorative start memory display at the left end is the decorative start memory display corresponding to the first start memory stored first, and shifts to the left each time it is digested. Further, it is possible to suggest the result of the special figure 1 variation display game corresponding to each start memory and the look-ahead result such as the variation pattern by the display mode.

At the lower center of the display area and to the left of the storage display unit 83, an execution storage display unit 84 for displaying information related to the start storage corresponding to the currently executing special figure 1 variable display game is provided. At the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, the decorative start storage display at the left end of the special figure 1 variable display unit 83 is transferred to the running storage display unit 84, and the result, the variable pattern, etc. of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed are transferred to the running memory display unit 84. Is suggested by the display mode.

FIG. 226 (b) shows a display example on the display device 41 during the game in the specific game state. In the upper left portion of the display area, a game number information display unit 85 for showing information on the number of games in a specific game state is provided. "LAST" displays the number of remaining games that can be executed in the specific game state, and "TOTAL" displays the number of games executed in a series of specific game states.

The numerical value on the display on the game number information display unit 85 does not necessarily have to match the actual number of games, but the actual number of games is managed inside the effect control device 300, and the actual number of games is managed. Based on this, the display content on the game number information display unit 85 is set. The effect control device 300 manages information on the number of remaining games by subtracting the number of remaining games in the specific game state each time the decorative special figure variation display game is executed, and the display content on the game number information display unit 85 is this information. Is set based on.

A game mode display unit 80 for displaying a game state is provided on the right side of the game number information display unit 85. Here, "Pounding RUSH", which means that the game is in a normal gaming state, is displayed. On the right side of the game mode display unit 80, a right-handed instruction display 86 for notifying that right-handedness is advantageous for the player is made. On the right side of the right-handed instruction display 86, a storage display unit 83 and a decorative special figure 1 variable display game display unit 81 are provided. Here, the number of first start storages is displayed numerically. Further, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game display unit 81 and the storage display unit 83 may not be displayed when the special figure 1 variable display game is not being executed.

Decoration Special Figure 1 Below the variable display game display unit 81, an acquisition number display unit 87 indicating the number of prize balls acquired in a series of specific game states is provided. In the acquisition number display unit 87, one prize ball is displayed as 1 pt, and here, it is shown that 1234 prize balls have been acquired. Further, in the center of the display area, the number of prize balls is displayed based on the winning of the special variable winning device, and is added to the winning number display unit 87.

In the acquired number display unit 87, from the start of the special gaming state that triggered the start of the specific gaming state to the end of the series of specific gaming states, that is, the special gaming state based on the first special result generated in the low probability state. The number of prize balls acquired during the period from the start of the game until the first special result is not derived and the special figure fluctuation display game is executed a predetermined number of times to fall into the low probability state is displayed. During this period, the prize balls will be added at any time. The number of prize balls acquired in the special gaming state based on the first special result and the number of prize balls acquired in the special gaming state based on the second special result may be displayed separately, or only one of them is displayed. You may do so. Further, only the number of prize balls based on the winning of the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39 may be displayed, or the first starting winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 37, The number of prize balls based on the winning of the general winning opening 35 may also be displayed.

At the lower right of the display area, a decorative special figure 2 variable display game display unit 82 for displaying the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is provided. Decorative special figure 2 The display position of the variable display game display unit 82 is the same as that of the normal game state. Further, in the lower center of the display area, an effect symbol display unit 88 for displaying an effect symbol corresponding to the special figure variation display game is provided. The effect symbol is displayed in a variable manner in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas, and then stopped and displayed to perform an effect corresponding to the special symbol variable display game. It should be noted that the fluctuation and stop of the production symbol do not necessarily correspond to the fluctuation and stop of the special figure fluctuation display game. This effect symbol can be executed at the same time, and the execution state of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, in which one becomes a special result and the other is forcibly stopped due to a disengagement result, is played. It is intended to be easily understood by the person.

That is, the effect control device 300 serves as a receiving means capable of receiving the control information from the transmitting means (game control device 100), and based on the control information received by the receiving means, the decoration variation display game (decoration special drawing). (1) Variable display game and decorative special figure (2) The decorative variable display game execution control means capable of controlling the execution of the variable display game). Further, in the specific gaming state, the effect control device 300 executes a decorative variation display game corresponding to the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) or the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game). It is a subtraction means that subtracts the number of times the variable display game is executed from the predetermined number of times each time. Further, in the specific game state, the effect control device 300 variablely displays and stops displaying a plurality of effect identification information without corresponding to the execution of the decoration variation display game, corresponding to the subtraction number of the subtraction means. It serves as a feasible production identification information variable display means. Further, the effect control device 300 serves as a game number information notifying means capable of notifying the game number information which is information according to the subtraction result by the subtracting means.

FIG. 227 shows the execution of the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game, and changes in the display of the effect symbol and the game number information display unit 85, and FIG. 228 shows the display on the display device 41. rice field. In the ending period (t31) of the first special game state shown in FIG. 227, the notification that the specific game state is started is performed as shown in FIG. 228, and the game number information display unit 85 is notified of the specific game. The number of remaining games (50 times) that can be executed in the state is displayed.

Here, there are three first start memories at the end of the first special game state, and as shown in FIG. 227, the special figure 1 variable display game is started with the end of the first special game state, and the decorative special figure is shown. 1 The variable display game is also started (t32). Further, a game ball has won a prize in the second start winning opening 37 with the end of the first special gaming state, the special figure 2 variable display game is started, and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is also started (t32). .. That is, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are being executed at the same time. Although it is shown here that the games are started at the same time, the special figure 1 variable display game is actually performed after the processing of the special figure 1 variable display game is performed after the end of the special game state. The special figure 2 variable display game is started after the game is started.

The special figure 2 variable display game ends before the scheduled end timing (t37) of the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game (t35), and the result becomes a small hit. Therefore, with the end of the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped as a result of disconnection (t35).

Here, if the progress of the game is displayed only by the decorative special figure 1 variable display game, the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, and the game number information display unit 85, the conventional gaming machine that does not execute the special figure variable display game at the same time. For a player who is accustomed to playing a game, it may be difficult to grasp the progress of the game. Therefore, the game number information display unit 85 is changed according to the progress of the effect symbol by using an effect symbol that displays the progress of the game by a display like a conventional gaming machine that does not execute the special figure variation display game at the same time. It makes it easy to grasp the progress of the game.

First, with the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, the effect symbol display unit 88 starts variable display of the effect symbol. Along with this, in the game number information display unit 85, the number of remaining games (LAST) is set to 49, and the number of executed games (TOTAL) is set to 1 (t32). In this example, the first special result is derived in the normal gaming state, the first special gaming state is executed, and the specific gaming state is started after the end of the first special gaming state. The number of executed games is 1. When the special gaming state occurs in the specific gaming state, the specific gaming state is continuous, so that the value is obtained by adding 1 to the number of executed games before the start of the special gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 228 (b), even if the special figure 2 variable display game is started thereafter, the variable display of the effect symbol is maintained as it is, and the display content of the game number information display unit 85 does not change. In the figure, ○ and-are displayed at the same time to show the variable display, but in reality, ○ and-are displayed alternately to perform the variable display. Since the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped by this special figure 2 variable display game, the setting of the display content of the effect symbol is changed based on the start of the special figure 2 variable display game. It becomes.

As shown in FIG. 227, due to this change, the effect symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped before the end of the variable time in the special figure 2 variable display game (t33). As shown in FIG. 228 (c), the stop symbol at this time is a stop symbol indicating that it is out of alignment. At this time, only the design for directing is stopped, and the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game are still displayed in a variable manner.

In addition to the stop symbol indicating that the effect symbol at this time is out of alignment, it is suggested or notified that a special result will be derived at the next stop as "NEXT" or "attention". Is also good. In addition, as a variation pattern of the decoration special figure variation display game, a re-variation display that starts the variation display again after temporarily stopping in a result aspect other than the special result aspect in the decoration special figure variation display game in the middle of the special figure variation display game. When the so-called pseudo-continuous variation display mode to be performed once or more can be executed, the effect at the time of stopping or resuming the effect symbol may be the same effect as the temporary stop or re-variation display in the pseudo-continuous variation display mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 227, the variable display of the effect symbol is started again (t34). At this time, the display of the game number information display unit 85 is updated, the number of remaining games (LAST) becomes 48, and the number of executed games (TOTAL) becomes 2 (FIG. 228 (d)). Then, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are stopped, the variable display of the effect symbol is stopped (t35). As shown in FIG. 228 (e), the stop symbol at this time is a stop symbol indicating that it is a small hit. Further, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game also stop the variable display and display the result mode.

By changing the setting of the display mode of the effect symbol in this way, the progress of the special figure variation display game is displayed in the same display mode as the conventional gaming machine that does not execute the special figure variation display game at the same time. That is, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game (t32), the effect symbols are continuously changed and displayed until the special figure 1 variable display game is scheduled to be stopped (t37), and then stopped to display one special figure variable display. Although it was planned to indicate that the game was played, the setting of the display content of the effect symbol is changed based on the start (t32) of the special figure 2 variable display game after that. In this change, it is changed to stop once (t33) before the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, start the fluctuation again (t34), and stop at the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (t35). There is. That is, the effect symbol is stopped according to the number of subtractions (here, 2) by the subtraction means from the start to the stop of the special figure variation display game that triggered the start of the change of the effect symbol. ing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 227, the second special gaming state is started and the first special variable winning device 38 is opened. As shown in 99 (f), in the special gaming state, the number of prize balls is displayed along with winning the special variable winning device, and is added to the winning number display unit 87. After that, when the second special gaming state ends, the special figure variation display game can be executed (t38). The game progresses in t38 to t39 and t39 to t40 in the same manner as in the above-mentioned t32 to t38.

Further, when there is no first start memory and only the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, the change and stop of the effect symbol are simultaneous with the change and stop of the special figure 2 variable display game (t40 to t41). .. Further, even when only the special figure 1 variable display game is executed, the change and stop of the effect symbol are simultaneous with the change and stop of the special figure 1 variable display game.

If the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are executed at the same time and the special figure 1 variable display game ends first, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is If it is out of alignment, the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped and the effect symbol is stopped, and the variable display is performed again. Further, if the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a special result, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped due to the missing result, so that the effect symbol is stopped by the time the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped. And the variable display is performed again, and the game is stopped when the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped.

From the above, in the effect control means (effect control device 300), the decoration variation display game (decoration special figure variation display game) corresponding to the first variation display game or the second variation display game is executed in the specific gaming state. A subtraction means (effect control device 300) that subtracts the number of times the variable display game is executed from a predetermined number of times each time, and a plurality of effect identification information (effect) that does not correspond to the execution of the decorative variable display game in the specific game state. It is provided with an effect identification information variation display means (effect control device 300) that can perform variable display and stop display of the game (design) according to the number of subtractions of the subtraction means, and is provided with an effect identification information variable display. The means is a case where the decorative variation display game ends in response to the execution of the first end control process in the first variation display game based on the special result of the second variation display game in the specific gaming state. By the end of the game, the number of variable display games and stop display corresponding to the first variable display game and the second variable display game were displayed, and the player was informed that the subtraction was performed for each variable display game. It will be possible to notify.

Further, the effect identification information variation display means is such that the decoration variation display game corresponds to the execution of the first end control process in the first variation display game based on the special result of the second variation display game. When the game ends, the variable display corresponding to the first variable display game and the stop display are performed before the end, and then the variable display corresponding to the second variable display game is performed, and the second variable display is performed at the end. It means that the stop display corresponding to the game is performed.

Next, the control of the special figure 1 variable display game in the normal gaming state will be described. As shown in FIG. 229, with the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game being executed at the same time, as shown in FIG. 229 (b), the special figure 1 variable display game is highly expected. If this is done, as shown in FIG. 229 (c), the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped with a special result first, so that the production in the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted and the result is forced to come off. Will be stopped at. In order to avoid such a state, when the effect control device 300 receives a command from the game control device 100 to notify that the special figure 1 variation display game is longer, the effect control device 300 produces a highly expected effect. I try not to do it.

[Direction lottery process]
FIG. 230 shows an effect lottery process performed by the effect control device 300 as a process for determining the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game. In this effect lottery process, first, the variation pattern received from the game control device 100 is checked (step Z11), and it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is such that the premier effect, which is a highly expected effect, can be executed (step Z12). .. If the variation pattern is not such that the premier effect can be executed (step Z12; N), the effect lottery process is performed (step Z15), and the effect lottery process ends. In the effect lottery process, a variation pattern other than the premier effect is selected according to the variation pattern received from the game control device 100.

Further, when the variation pattern is such that the premier effect can be executed (step Z12; Y), it is determined whether or not a command for notifying that the variation time of the special figure 1 is received is received (step Z13). When a command for notifying that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer is received (step Z13; Y), a specific pattern is set (step Z16), and the effect lottery process is terminated. In this case, since the situation shown in FIG. 229 may occur, a specific pattern is selected in the premier production. The specific pattern will be described later.

Further, when the command notifying that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer has not been received (step Z13; N), the premier effect lottery process is performed (step Z14), and the normal effect lottery process (step Z15) is performed. To end the production lottery process. In the premier production lottery process, the presence or absence and type of execution of the premier production (special production) are drawn. When it is decided to execute the premier effect, the type is determined, and the determined premier effect becomes the variation pattern of the decorative special figure 1 variation display game. In this case, the lottery in the normal production lottery process is not performed. If it is decided not to execute the premier effect, a variation pattern other than the premier effect is selected in the normal effect lottery process. In the premier production lottery process, whether or not the premier production lottery is performed and the probability of winning the premier production when the lottery is performed may be different depending on whether or not the result is a special result.

FIG. 231 shows an example in which a specific pattern is not set because the special figure 1 variable display game ends before the special figure 2 variable display game. As shown in FIG. 231 (a), when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed in the normal gaming state, the special figure 1 variable display game is started as shown in FIG. 231 (b). In this case, the premier effect can be set, and in this example, the premier effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 231 (c) and 231 (d).

Here, since the special figure 1 variable display game has a special result (here, a big hit), the special figure 2 variable display game is removed with the end of the special figure 1 variable display game as shown in FIG. 231 (e). As a result, it is forcibly stopped. If the special figure 1 variable display game is out of order, the special figure 2 variable display game is not forcibly stopped.

FIG. 232 shows an example in which a specific pattern is set. As shown in FIG. 232 (a), when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed in the normal gaming state, the special figure 1 variable display game is started as shown in FIG. 232 (b). The running special figure 2 variable display game ends earlier than the special figure 1 variable display game, and is a special result (here, a small hit). Therefore, since the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped as a result of the deviation, a specific pattern is set.

This specific pattern is a fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation time (for example, 12 seconds) of a predetermined time that does not generate a reach state. If the special figure 2 fluctuation display game does not end even after this fluctuation time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. Become. If the special figure 2 variable display game ends before this variable time elapses, the identification symbol of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is stopped at that point.

When the special figure 1 variable display game ends with the end of the special figure 2 variable display game, the identification symbol of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game stops as shown in FIG. 232 (d). After that, the second special game state is set, and after the end of the second special game state, the special figure 1 variable display game is started based on the first start memory as shown in FIG. 232 (e).

As shown in FIG. 232 (b), the period during which the identification symbol is variablely displayed at high speed in the special figure 1 variable display game is set to the time from the stop of the special figure 2 variable display game to a predetermined time before, and is always The state shown in FIG. 232 (c) may be passed.

In addition, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are executed at the same time, a specific pattern is set even when the special figure 1 variable display game ends first and the first special result is obtained. You can do it. FIG. 233 shows a display example in this case. FIGS. 233 (a) to 233 (c) are the same as those in FIG. 231. After that, with the end of the special figure 1 variable display game, as shown in FIG. 233 (d), the decorative special figure 1 variable display game stops in the result mode of the first special result, and the special figure 2 variable display game ends. , It becomes the first special game state. By enabling such an effect, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to a specific pattern.

It should be noted that a specific pattern as shown in FIG. 233 is set even when the deviation result can be selected as the result of the special figure 2 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game is stopped first due to the deviation result. It is possible. Further, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order, the premier lottery process (step Z14) may be executed even if the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped first.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect lottery process for determining the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game, if the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed, the premier effect lottery is performed. The process (step Z14) may not be performed. In this case, when the special figure 2 variable display game has a special result in the normal gaming state rather than the longest variable time set when the special figure 1 variable display game has the first special result in the normal gaming state. It is preferable that the shortest fluctuation time to be set is a longer time. By doing so, even if the special figure 2 variable display game is started after the special figure 1 variable display game in which the premier effect is set is started, the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped first, so that there is a problem. Does not occur.

It should be noted that other than the above can be considered as a countermeasure for the case where the other special figure variation display game is forcibly stopped due to the deviation result based on the derivation of the special result in one special figure variation display game. For example, as described in the special figure 1 change start process shown in FIG. 173, when the change time of the special figure 1 change display game to be executed is not less than the remaining change time of the special figure 2 change display game (step Y254; N). ), In addition to or in place of the process of preparing a command for notifying that the variation time of the special figure 1 is longer (step Y255), a process of resetting the variation pattern may be performed. ..

In the process of resetting the variation pattern, if the effect control device 300 changes to the variation pattern in which the premier effect cannot be selected, it is not a variation pattern in which the premier effect can be executed in the process of FIG. 230 (step Z12; N). It will be judged and the premier production will not be selected. Further, in the process of resetting the fluctuation pattern, it is possible to change the fluctuation pattern so as to select a specific pattern so that the specific pattern is always selected. In the process of resetting the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time may not be changed or may be changed.

Further, instead of changing the fluctuation pattern once determined in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) later, it is executed from now on when the fluctuation pattern is determined in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246). The variation pattern according to the game situation is determined from the beginning by performing the process (step Y254) of determining whether the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game is less than the remaining variation time of the variation display game. You may do so.

Further, when the off-target result can be selected as the result of the special figure 2 variable display game, the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed from now on only when the special figure 2 variable display game has a special result is special. FIG. 2 A process (step Y254) for determining whether or not the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game is not reached is performed. If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order, this process is unnecessary because the special figure 1 variable display game is not forcibly stopped by the out of place result.

Further, as another example of coping with the case where the other special figure variation display game is forcibly stopped due to the deviation result based on the derivation of the special result in one special figure variation display game, for example, special figure 1 In the normal gaming state in which the variable display game is mainly performed, the special figure 1 variable display game may be treated as superior, and the processing may be advanced so that the special figure 1 variable display game progresses advantageously.

When such processing is performed, in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing shown in FIG. 173, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed is not less than the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ( In step Y254; N), instead of the processing of steps Y225 and Y226, it is determined whether the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a special result, and if it is a special result, the change of the special figure 1 variable display game. The process of changing the time so that it is less than the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game is performed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the special result that was supposed to be derived in the special figure 1 variable display game from being changed to an out-of-order result.

Further, even if the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of order and the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game is less than the remaining variable time, if the first start storage number is large, the special figure based on these is used. FIG. 1 A short fluctuation time may be set so that the variable display game is settled before the end of the special figure 2 variable display game.

Regarding the special figure 2 variable display game, even if a special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game, it is not so disadvantageous, but in the specific game state in which the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly performed, the special figure 2 variable display is displayed. You may treat the game as an advantage. For example, in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. 174, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game determined in a high probability state is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 It is determined whether the variable display game has a special result and the special figure 2 variable display game has the first special result. If the special figure 2 variable display game has the first special result, the special figure 2 variable The variable time of the display game may be changed so as to be less than the remaining variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game.

By doing so, it is possible to prevent the first special result, which should have been derived in the special figure 2 variable display game, from being changed to an out-of-order result. When the special figure 1 variable display game has the first special result, the fluctuation time is adjusted so that whichever is more advantageous than the first special result of the special figure 2 variable display game is derived. You may do so.

From the above, the first determination means (game control device 100) determines the variation mode information of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) in the normal state (normal game state). Whether or not the variable display game (Special Figure 2 variable display game) is being executed, and / or the variable mode information of the second variable display game can be referred to to determine the variable mode of the first variable display game. It will be possible.

Further, the variation mode information of the first variation display game or the second variation display game includes information regarding the variation time in which the execution time of the variation display game can be specified, and the first determination means is a normal state (normal game). When determining the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game in the state), if the second variation display game is running, the variation included in the variation mode information of the second variation display game. It is possible to determine the variation mode information of the first variation display game with reference to the time.

Further, in the variation mode information of the first variation display game or the second variation display game, information on the variation time in which the execution time of the variation display game can be specified and information on the variation pattern corresponding to the variation time are included. Included, the first determining means does not refer to the variation mode information of the second variation display game when determining the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game in the normal state (normal gaming state). The first variation mode determining means (game control device 100) capable of determining the variation mode information of the first variation display game and the variation time of the first variation display game by the first variation display game are included. If the second variation display game is running when the variation mode information is determined, the first variation display determined by referring to the variation time included in the variation mode information of the second variation display game. It is provided with a second variation mode determining means (game control device 100) capable of redetermining information about the variation pattern without changing the variation time of the game.

Further, the second variation mode determining means does not redetermine the information regarding the variation pattern when the result of the second variation display game being executed is not a special result.

Further, the decorative variation display game execution control means (effect control device 300) corresponds to the first variation display game when the state of the second variation display game at the start of the first variation display game satisfies a predetermined condition. It is possible to execute a special effect lottery for determining whether or not to perform a special effect in the decoration variation display game to be executed.

Further, the decorative variation display game execution control means is the first when the second variation display game is being executed at the start of the first variation display game and the result of the second variation display game is out of order. It is possible to execute a special effect lottery for determining whether or not to perform a special effect in the decorative variable display game to be executed corresponding to the variable display game.

In the above embodiment, the second start memory for suspending the start of the special figure 2 variable display game is not generated for the special figure 2 variable display game, but the same as the special figure 1 variable display game. The second start memory may be generated up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). In addition, a normal variable winning device that can change the state of the second starting winning opening 37 into a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to win or cannot win, and an open state in which the game ball is easier to win or can win than the closed state. May be provided. Then, in the specific game state in which the game is progressed mainly in the special figure 2 variable display game, the opening time of the normal variable winning device per unit time may be controlled to be substantially longer than in the normal game state. ..

[First modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the third embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that basically, the machine has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the third embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and the description is mainly different. The part will be explained. The gaming machine of this modification is different in the display mode of the game number information display unit 85 and the effect symbol.

As described above, if the progress of the game is displayed only by the decorative special figure 1 variable display game, the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, and the game number information display unit 85, the conventional special figure variable display game is not executed at the same time. For a player who is accustomed to a game machine, it may be difficult to grasp the progress state of the game. Therefore, in this modification, the game number information display unit 85 does not display clear information at least during the period from the end of the special gaming state to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game based on the first start memory. I have to.

FIG. 234 shows the execution of the special figure variation display game and the change in the display of the game number information display unit 85, and FIGS. 235 and 236 show the display on the display device 41. In the ending period (t61) of the first special gaming state shown in FIG. 234, the notification that the specific gaming state is started is performed as shown in FIG. 235 (a). In this example, there are three first start memories at the end of the first special game state, and as shown in FIG. 234, a special figure based on the first first start memory with the end of the first special game state. 1 The variable display game is started (t62). In addition, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the variable display of the design for production are also started.

Further, the game ball has won a prize in the second start winning opening 37 during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the special figure 2 variable display game is started (t63). In addition, the variable display of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is also started. That is, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are being executed at the same time. It should be noted that the effect design that started the variable display with the start of the special figure 1 variable display game changes while the variable display continues as shown in FIG. 235 (b) even if the special figure 2 variable display game starts. I don't.

As shown in FIG. 234, this special figure 2 variable display game ends before the special figure 1 variable display game, and the second special result (small hit) is obtained. Therefore, with the end of the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a disengagement result (t64). At this time, as shown in FIG. 235 (c), the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game are stopped in the result mode corresponding to the result of each game, and the effect symbol is the second special result. It stops in the result mode corresponding to.

In the games so far, the special figure variation display game has been executed twice, but the effect symbol starts at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game and stops at the stop of the special figure 2 variation display game. Therefore, to the player, it seems that one special figure variation display game, which is the second special result, has been played. By doing so, it is possible to convey the progress and contents of the game in an easy-to-understand manner to the player who is accustomed to the conventional gaming machine that does not execute the special figure variation display game at the same time.

In addition, the display on the game number information display unit 58 starts with the end of the first special game state (t62), but here, "preparing" is displayed to clearly display the number of remaining games and the number of executions. The preparation mode is displayed. During the period when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are likely to be executed at the same time, the change becomes complicated when the information of the actual number of games is displayed, and the player cannot understand or distrust. Since there is a risk of feeling it, the information on the number of games is not clearly displayed here. This preparation mode display is continued until at least the end of the special figure 1 variable display game based on the first start memory stored at the end of the first special gaming state, and here, the first start memory. It is until the end of the special game state (t67) in the state where is not present.

Then, as shown in FIG. 234, after the end of the second special gaming state, the special figure 1 variable display game based on the second first start memory is started (t65). Similar to the special figure 1 variable display game based on the first first start memory, this special figure 1 variable display game is also forcibly stopped with a missed result due to the second special result of the special figure 2 variable display game. , The second special game state is reached (t65 to t66). The same applies to the third first start memory (t66 to t67).

The contents of the display on the display device 41 during the period of t65 to t66 and t66 to t67 are the same as the display on t62 to 65 as shown in FIGS. 235 (d) and 235 (e), and the number of games is the same. The information display unit 85 displays "Preparing", and the production symbol starts at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and stops in the result mode corresponding to the second special result based on the stop of the special figure 2 variable display game. do.

Then, as shown in FIG. 234, when the special game state ends in the state where the first start memory does not exist (t67), after that, only the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, and the timing of digesting the number of games is Since it is the same as the conventional gaming machine that does not execute the special figure variation display game at the same time, the RUSH display mode in which the information on the number of games is displayed by the game number information display unit 85 is set from here.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 236 (a), "RUSH start" indicating that the RUSH display mode has been set is displayed, and the number of remaining games is displayed on the game number information display unit 85. However, the number of remaining games is displayed, which is smaller than the actual number of remaining games. Here, the actual number of remaining games is 43, but it is displayed as 40.

Then, as shown in FIG. 234, the number of remaining games in the game number information display unit 85 is subtracted each time the special figure variation display game is executed (FIG. 236 (c)). After that, as shown in FIG. 236 (d), a display instructing the operation of the effect button 25 at a predetermined timing is made. When the player operates the effect button 25 according to the instruction, the dragon spits flames on the game number information display unit 85 as an effect display as shown in FIG. 236 (e), and as shown in FIG. 236 (f). An additional effect is provided in which the value of the game number information display unit 85 is added so as to be the actual number of remaining games.

The actual number of remaining games may be displayed at the start of the RUSH display mode (t67). Further, although the actual number of remaining games is displayed based on the operation of the effect button 25, the value of the game number information display unit 85 is determined to be less than the actual number of remaining games based on the operation of the effect button 25. You may add a value.

Further, it is preferable that the number of games to be reduced from the actual number of remaining games in the display on the game number information display unit 85 at the start of the RUSH mode is the upper limit number of the first start memory (here, 4) or more. .. Special Figure 2 When the second start memory can be stored up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4) for the variable display game, the total value of the upper limit of the first start memory and the upper limit of the second start memory (for example). 8) It is preferable that the value is equal to or higher than 8).

Further, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are executed at the same time in the RUSH display mode, the effect design is set to one variable display as in the case of t62 to t65, and the game number information display unit. The subtraction of the number of remaining games at 85 may also be set to 1 to make it easier for the player to understand. By making the number of remaining games displayed at the start of the RUSH display mode smaller than the actual number of remaining games, it is possible to set the subtraction of the number of remaining games to 1 in such a case. However, if the number of remaining games currently displayed and the actual number of remaining games match, the subtraction of the number of remaining games is set to 2, or the RUSH display mode is displayed again after a predetermined period as the preparation mode display. It is preferable to make the transition so that there is no contradiction.

From the above, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is a game number information notification means (effect control device 300) capable of transmitting game number information which is information according to the subtraction result by the subtraction means (effect control device 300). ), And the game number information notification means notifies the game number information at least until the end of the first variable display game based on the first start memory stored at the end of the first special gaming state. It will not be.

[Second modification]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the third embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that basically, the machine has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the third embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and the description is mainly different. The part will be explained. In the gaming machine of this modification, the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process are performed at different interrupt timings.

In the gaming machine of this modification, the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 237 is performed instead of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 145. In this timer interrupt process, the large winning opening switch monitoring process performed in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process is performed in the main routine of the timer interrupt process (step X801).

Further, in the branch processing (step X802) by the special figure processing counter, if the value of the special figure processing counter is an even number, the special figure 1 game process is performed (step X110), and if the value is odd, the special figure 2 game process (step X111) is performed. )I do. Note that 0 is treated as an even number. After that, the special figure processing counter is updated by +1 (step X803).

The special figure processing counter may be updated sequentially in the range of 0 to 255, may be updated alternately with 0 and 1, and may be updated in the range of an even number of values. Further, since the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process are alternately performed for each timer interrupt, these processes are performed every twice the time (here, 8 ms) of the timer interrupt process time (here, 4 ms). It will be done. Therefore, this should be taken into consideration when setting the timer value updated by these processes.

238 and 239 show the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process in this modification. In these processes, the processes of steps Y101, Y102, Y131, and Y132, which were performed in the processes of FIGS. 166 and 167, are not performed.

FIG. 240 shows the large winning opening switch monitoring process in this modified example. This large winning opening switch monitoring process is the same as the process shown in FIG. 168, except that the process of determining the hit status of the special figure (step Y1501) is performed. In the process of determining the hit status of the special figure (step Y1501), it is determined whether the process is for the special result derived in the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, and the process is determined according to the determination result. Set the target special map. If it is not necessary to distinguish which special figure is to be processed, it is not necessary to perform the process (step Y1501) for determining the hit status of the special figure.

From the above, it is possible to execute the interrupt routine started in a predetermined cycle, and the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is executed by the first variable display game control means (game control device 100). Even if the game is present, the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) can be executed by the second variable display game control means (game control device 100), and the second variable display game control means can be used to execute the second variable display game. Even when the variable display game is executed, the first variable display game can be executed by the first variable display game control means, and a series of execution control related to the first variable display game by the first variable display game control means can be executed. And a series of execution control related to the second variable display game by the second variable display game control means are not executed at the same time in one interrupt routine. As a result, the processing time can be shortened even when simultaneous fluctuations are performed.

[Third modification example]
Next, a third modification of the gaming machine of the third embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that basically, the machine has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the third embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and the description is mainly different. The part will be explained. In the gaming machine of this modification, the processing contents in the special figure 2 abnormality change monitoring process shown in FIGS. 156 to 158 are different, and the second start winning opening 37 is replaced with the special figure 2 abnormality change number in the normal gaming state. The same judgment as in the special figure 2 abnormal change is made based on the number of special figure 2 abnormal prizes counted based on the winning prize.

FIG. 241 shows an example of counting the number of abnormal prizes in Special Figure 2. Special figure 2 The number of abnormal winnings is updated by +1 based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 37 in the normal gaming state (t101, t102). Then, when the special figure 2 abnormal winning number reaches the specified value of 5, the special figure 2 abnormal change occurrence flag is saved, and the external information indicating that the special figure 2 abnormal change has occurred and the gaming machine error based on this flag. The output of the status signal to a device outside the gaming machine is started, and it becomes possible to grasp the occurrence of the abnormal change in Special Figure 2 by the management device of the gaming store or the like. Further, a command for generating an abnormal change in FIG. 2 is transmitted to the effect control device 300. Based on the reception of this command, the effect control device 300 notifies that an abnormal change has occurred in Special Figure 2 by display, voice, or the like.

Further, when the number of abnormal prizes in Special Figure 2 reaches the specified value of 5, the time counting by the special figure 2 abnormality change notification timer is started (t102), and the predetermined time (60 seconds in this case) elapses (60 seconds in this case). t103), the number of abnormal prizes in Special Figure 2 is cleared to 0, and the output of external information and the game machine error status signal is stopped. Further, a special figure 2 abnormality change release command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 ends the notification that the special figure 2 abnormality change has occurred based on the reception of this command. If a new prize is awarded to the second start winning opening 37 before the elapse of the predetermined time, the time counting of the predetermined time is newly started from that point.

FIGS. 242 and 243 show an example of counting the number of abnormal prizes in FIG. 2. As shown in FIG. 242, the monitoring state is set to be valid or invalid, and when the monitoring state is valid and there is a prize in the second start winning opening 37, the special figure 2 abnormal prize is won. The number is updated by +1 (t113, t116).

This monitoring state is basically effective when it is a low probability state. However, if there is a prize in the second start winning opening 37 (t113, t116) while the monitoring state is valid, the predetermined invalid setting period (here, 10 seconds) from the winning is invalidated (t113). ~ T115, t116 ~ t117), the winning (t144) to the second starting winning opening 37 that occurred during this invalid setting period (t113 to t115) is not counted as the number of abnormal winnings. In addition, it is invalid during the first special game state. Further, the second special gaming state in the low probability state is valid because it is a short period.

Then, if the special figure 2 abnormal winning number is not newly added during the predetermined clearing period (t117 to t118, here 1800 seconds) from the end of the above invalidation setting period, the special figure 2 abnormal winning number is not added. It is supposed to be cleared. It is also cleared when the first special gaming state is started.

FIG. 243 shows the counting of the number of abnormal prizes in Special Figure 2 at the end of the specific gaming state. In the high probability state, the monitoring state is invalid, so even if there is a prize in the second start winning opening 37, the number of abnormal prizes in Special Figure 2 is not added. Then, for the last special figure fluctuation display game in the high probability state, the probability state is changed to the low probability state at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game (t123), but the special figure fluctuation display game It remains in an invalid state until the end (t124).

Here, since it becomes effective from the end of the last special figure variation display game started in the high probability state, if the result of the special figure variation display game is the second special result, the second special game It becomes a valid state from the start of the state (t124). In this second special gaming state, right-handed hitting is performed continuously in the specific gaming state, so that a prize is generated in the second starting winning opening 37 and the number of abnormal winnings in Special Figure 2 is added (t125). However, the second special game state ends in a short time, and since the invalid setting period is set from the addition of the special figure 2 abnormal winning number (t125 to t127), the second special game state is set. In the subsequent winning of the second starting winning opening 37, the number of abnormal winnings in Special Figure 2 is not added (t126). Therefore, the number of special figure 2 abnormal prizes added by the second special game state is limited to 1, and is cleared after the clearing period (t127 to t128) elapses, so that there is no problem.

In order to enable such processing, in the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation monitoring processing of FIG. 156, instead of the processing of steps X381 to X389, a prize is awarded to the second start winning opening 37 in a state where the monitoring state is valid. Based on the above, the process of updating the number of abnormal prizes in Special Figure 2 by +1 is performed. Then, in the processing of steps X390 to X403, the special figure 2 abnormal winning number is used instead of the special figure 2 abnormal variation number.

It should be noted that the specified value of the special figure 2 abnormal winning number for which the special figure 2 abnormal change notification is to be performed and the length of the clearing period can be arbitrarily set. The specified value and the length of the period set here may be any value as long as they can prevent the player from aiming at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state. If a power failure occurs and the system recovers, monitoring should be resumed from the state before the power failure. In addition, even if the special figure 2 abnormality change notification is performed, the prize balls will be paid out as usual for the prize.

[Fourth modification]
Next, a fourth modification of the gaming machine of the third embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that basically, the machine has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the third embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and the description is mainly different. The part will be explained. In the gaming machine of this modification, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are executed at the same time, the other special result is derived from one special figure variable display game. The figure variation display game is interrupted, and the interrupted special figure variation display game is restarted after the end of the special gaming state.

FIG. 244 shows the batch display device 50 in the gaming machine of this modified example. D1 to D18 are the same as those in FIG. 132. D19 and D20 are interruption display units 79 indicating whether or not the special figure variation display game is interrupted. As shown in FIG. 244 (b), the interruption display unit 79 is in a state where neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted, and the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted. State, Special Figure 2 Indicates one of the states in which the variable display game is interrupted.

FIG. 245 shows an example in which the special figure variation display game is interrupted, and FIGS. 246 and 247 show the display in the display device 41 and the batch display device 50. In this example, first, as shown in FIG. 245, the variable display game b, which is the special figure 2 variable display game, is started in a state where neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed. After that (t151), the variable display game a, which is a special figure 1 variable display game, is started (t152).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 246 (a), the variable display is performed on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. Further, the interruption display unit 79 is in a state of being turned off. Further, the display device 41 performs variable display of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game.

Then, as shown in FIG. 245, the variable display game a ends with the first special result being derived as a result before the variable display game b (t153), and the first special gaming state is reached after the lapse of a predetermined stop time. (T154). Based on the derivation of this first special result, the variable display game b is interrupted (t153). During the interruption, the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted and the fluctuation display is continued. Further, during the interruption, the interruption display unit 79 displays that the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted.

As shown in FIG. 246 (b), in the state where the variable display game a derives the first special result and is stopped, the special result mode corresponding to the first special result is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51. It becomes. Further, the special figure 2 display 52 remains performing the variable display. Further, D20 is lit on the interruption display unit 79 to indicate that the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted. Further, in the display device 41, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is stopped in the special result mode corresponding to the first special result, and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is still performing the variable display. Further, as shown in FIGS. 246 (c) and 247 (a), the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the interruption display unit 79 are shown in FIG. 246 (b) even in the special gaming state. The display mode is the same as when the result is derived.

After that, as shown in FIG. 245, when the first special game state ends, the suspended fluctuation display game b is restarted, and the measurement of the fluctuation time is restarted (t155). Then, the fluctuation display game b ends based on the lapse of the remaining fluctuation time (t157). After the end of the first special gaming state, the variable display game c is newly started in the special figure 1 variable display game. The variable display game c stops before the variable display game b (t156), but the variable display game b continues without interruption because the result is out of order.

As shown in FIGS. 246 (b) and 246 (c), variable display is performed on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 with the end of the special gaming state. Further, the interruption display unit 79 is in a state in which all the lights are turned off to indicate that the interruption is not interrupted due to the restart of the special figure 2 variation display game.

In this way, by interrupting the other special figure variation display game based on the derivation of the special result in one special figure variation display game, and restarting the interrupted special figure variation display game after the end of the special gaming state. , It is possible to derive the result as determined by the lottery performed at the start of each special figure variation display game. It should be noted that the interruption signal may be output as external information during the interruption of the special figure variation display game, and the information for determining which of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is interrupted is also output. May be.

In order to perform the process related to the interruption of the special figure variation display game, the special figure 1 variable process shown in FIG. 248 is performed instead of the special figure 1 variable process shown in FIG. 191. In this special figure 1 changing process, when special figure 2 is also being executed (step Y630; Y), the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of steps Y631 to Y639 is not stopped, and the special figure 2 interruption flag is not performed. Is performed (step Y1511).

Further, instead of the special figure 2 changing process shown in FIG. 192, the special drawing 2 changing process shown in FIG. 249 is performed. In this special figure 2 changing process, when special figure 1 is also being executed (step Y660; Y), the special figure 1 change display game of steps Y661 to Y669 is not stopped, and the special figure 1 interruption flag is not performed. Is performed (step Y1512).

Further, instead of the special figure 1 game process shown in FIG. 168, the special figure 1 game process shown in FIG. 250 is performed. In this special figure 1 game process, it is determined whether or not there is a special figure 1 suspended flag (step Y1513), and when there is no special figure 1 suspended flag (step Y1513; N), that is, in the special figure 1 variable display game. If the interruption is not performed, the processing related to the special figure 1 variable display game after step Y103 is performed. On the other hand, when there is a special figure 1 interruption flag (step Y1513; Y), that is, when the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted, the processing related to the special figure 1 variation display game of steps Y103 to Y118 is not performed. , Step Y119. As a result, while the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the special figure 1 variable display game does not proceed (the special figure 1 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variable display continues.

Further, instead of the special figure 2 game process shown in FIG. 169, the special figure 2 game process shown in FIG. 251 is performed. In this special figure 2 game processing, it is determined whether or not there is a special figure 2 interruption flag (step Y1514), and when there is no special figure 2 interruption flag (step Y1514; N), that is, in the special figure 2 variation display game. If the interruption is not performed, the processing related to the special figure 2 variable display game after step Y133 is performed. On the other hand, when there is a special figure 2 interruption flag (step Y1514; Y), that is, when the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted, the processing related to the special figure 2 variation display game of steps Y133 to Y149 is not performed. , Step Y152. As a result, while the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted, the special figure 2 variable display game does not proceed (the special figure 2 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variable display continues.

Further, instead of the special figure 1 big hit end process shown in FIG. 211, the special figure 1 big hit end process shown in FIG. 252 is performed. In this special figure 1 big hit end process, a process (step Y1515) for clearing the special figure 2 interruption flag is performed. As a result, the special figure 2 variable display game that was interrupted after the end of the first special gaming state is restarted.

Further, instead of the special figure 2 big hit end process shown in FIG. 212, the special figure 2 big hit end process shown in FIG. 253 is performed. In this special figure 2 big hit end process, a process (step Y1517) for clearing the special figure 1 interruption flag is performed. As a result, the special figure 1 variable display game that was interrupted after the end of the first special gaming state is restarted.

Further, instead of the special figure 1 small hit end process shown in FIG. 216, the special figure 1 small hit end process shown in FIG. 254 is performed. In this special figure 1 small hit end process, a process (step Y1518) for clearing the special figure 2 interruption flag is performed. As a result, the special figure 2 variable display game that was interrupted after the end of the second special gaming state is restarted.

Further, instead of the special figure 2 small hit end process shown in FIG. 217, the special figure 2 small hit end process shown in FIG. 255 is performed. In this special figure 2 small hit end process, a process (step Y1519) for clearing the special figure 1 interruption flag is performed. As a result, the special figure 1 variable display game that was interrupted after the end of the second special gaming state is restarted.

In addition, in the special gaming state performed during the interruption of the special figure 1 variable display game, the result of the interrupted special figure 1 variable display game and the variation pattern may be announced. Further, if there is a first start memory, the look-ahead effect for the first start memory may be performed during the special gaming state.

FIG. 256 shows an example of a pattern in which different control methods are used depending on the situation regarding how to control the other special figure variation display game based on the derivation of the special result in one special figure variation display game. showed that. Here, the control method 1 is a control method for forcibly stopping the other special figure variation display game with a loss result based on the derivation of the special result in one special figure variation display game. Further, the control method 2 is a control method in which the other special figure variation display game is interrupted based on the derivation of the special result in one special figure variation display game, and restarted after the end of the special gaming state.

Pattern 1 shown in FIG. 256A is a pattern for setting a control method according to the type of special drawing. In this pattern, when a special result (big hit or small hit) is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a missed result (control method 1). On the other hand, when a special result (big hit or small hit) is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted and restarted after the end of the special gaming state (control method 2). ).

In particular, when a big hit is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a missed result (control method 1), so that the game is played when the high probability state is started. It is possible to make the game proceed in an advantageous manner for the person. That is, in this case, if the control method 2 is used, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game with a long fluctuation time started in the low probability state at the start of the high probability state is restarted, so that a new special figure 2 fluctuation display is performed. It will be difficult to start the game. In the high probability state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is shortened so that the special result occurs frequently so that the player can acquire a large number of prize balls. Therefore, the control method 1 is used. As a result, the start of the new special figure 2 variable display game is accelerated, and the game progresses in an advantageous manner for the player.

Pattern 2 shown in FIG. 256B is a pattern for setting a control method based on a special result. In this pattern, for example, when the first special result (big hit) is derived in one special figure variation display game, the other special figure variation display game is forcibly stopped with a missed result (control method 1). .. On the other hand, when the second special result (small hit) is derived in one special figure variation display game, the other special figure variation display game is interrupted and restarted after the end of the special gaming state (control). Method 2). The control method may be selected in consideration of the type of special figure.

Pattern 3 shown in FIG. 256 (c) is a pattern for setting a control method according to the type of hit. For example, when the big hit symbol 1A or the small hit symbol 1a is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a loss result (control method 1). On the other hand, when the big hit symbol 1B or the small hit symbol 1b is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted and restarted after the end of the special gaming state (control method 2). ). The control method may be set simply depending on whether it is the first special result or the second special result.

Pattern 4 shown in FIG. 256 (d) is a pattern for setting a control method according to a game state and a special figure type. When a special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game in the normal gaming state, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with the disengaged result (control method 1). On the other hand, when a special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal game state, the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted and restarted after the end of the special game state (control method 2). Further, in the specific gaming state (during ST), the control method 2 is used regardless of the type of special figure or the type of special result.

In this example, in the normal gaming state, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped as a result of the deviation so as to be disadvantageous to the player, and the player does not choose to execute the special figure 2 variable display game. I am doing it. In addition, for the special figure 1 variable display game, which is mainly played in the normal game state, the special result is not changed to the wrong result due to the forced stop. In addition, since the specific game state is an advantageous state for the player, the special result is not changed to the wrong state due to the forced stop in any of the special figure fluctuation display games, and the player has the maximum profit. I am trying to get it. In consideration of the profit balance with the game store, the special figure 1 variable display game, which is not the main player in the specific game state, is forcibly stopped to prevent the player from making excessive profits. May be good. Further, the control method may be set only by the gaming state. For example, the control method 1 may be used only in the normal gaming state, and the control method 2 may be set only in the specific gaming state.

Pattern 5 shown in FIG. 256 (e) is a pattern for setting a control method according to a game state, a special figure type, and a special result type. In the normal game state, the special result of the other special figure variation display game is not changed to the out-of-order result by deriving the second special result in one special figure variation display game. Further, in the specific game state, the special result of the other special figure variation display game is not changed to the out-of-order result by deriving the first special result in one special figure variation display game. I try to increase the value of special results.

The pattern of the control method is not limited to the ones listed here, and other patterns may be used. Further, as the parameters for selecting the control method, the type of special figure, the type of special result, the game state, and the like are mentioned, but the present invention is not limited to these, and other parameters may be taken into consideration. Other parameters include the number of games since the end of the special game state, calendar information such as the date, day of the week, and current time, and achievement of some condition in the game such as generating an out-of-reach a predetermined number of times.

When the control method is selected as shown in FIG. 256, when the special figure 2 is also being executed in the special figure 1 changing process shown in FIG. 248 (step Y630; Y), depending on the conditions. Perform the process of selecting whether to suspend or terminate. Then, when interruption is selected, the process of saving the interruption flag in FIG. 2 is performed (step Y1511), and the processes after step Y640 are performed. When the end is selected, the process of stopping the special figure 2 variable display game of steps Y631 to Y639 shown in FIG. 191 is performed, and the processes of steps Y640 and subsequent steps are performed.

Further, in the special figure 2 changing process shown in FIG. 249, when special figure 1 is also being executed (step Y660; Y), a process of selecting whether to suspend or end is performed according to the condition. To. Then, when the interruption is selected, the process of saving the interruption flag in FIG. 1 is performed (step Y1512), and the processes after step Y670 are performed. When the end is selected, the process of stopping the special figure 1 variable display game of steps Y661 to Y669 shown in FIG. 192 is performed, and the processes of steps Y670 and subsequent steps are performed.

That is, after the game control device 100 ends the end control of ending one of the variable display games as a result other than the special result, and after interrupting one of the variable display games and ending the special game state based on the other variable display game. It serves as a selection means for selecting and executing one of the resumption control for resuming one of the interrupted variable display games and the resumption control based on a predetermined condition.

From the above, the fluctuation of one of the first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) and the second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) is changed by the variable display game execution control means. When the execution control of the display game (special figure variable display game) is performed, and the other variable display game whose execution control is performed by the other variable display game execution control means has a special result, one of them. The end control that ends the variable display game as a result other than the special result, and the variable display game that was interrupted after the special gaming state based on the other variable display game was terminated by interrupting one variable display game. The game control device 100 is provided with a selection means (game control device 100) for selecting and executing one of the restart control for restarting the game based on a predetermined condition.

Further, the selection means is controlled by the second variable display game execution control means when the execution control of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is performed by the first variable display game execution control means. When the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) in which is performed has a special result, the first variable display game is interrupted and the special gaming state based on the second variable display game is completed. When the restart control for resuming the first variable display game that was interrupted is selected and executed, and the second variable display game execution control means is performing the execution control of the second variable display game, the first variable display is displayed. When the first variable display game whose execution is controlled by the game execution control means has a special result, the end control for terminating the second variable display game as a result other than the special result is selected and executed. It will be done.

Further, the selection means selects and executes an end control for terminating one variable display game as a result other than the special result when the other variable display game has the first special result, and the other variable display game. Is the second special result, the restart control that interrupts one variable display game and resumes the interrupted variable display game after the special gaming state based on the other variable display game ends. Will be selected and executed.

Further, the selection means is controlled by the first variable display game execution control means when the second variable display game execution control means controls the execution of the second variable display game in the specific gaming state. The second variation that was interrupted after the special gaming state based on the first variation display game was terminated by interrupting the second variation display game when the first variation display game in which the game was performed had a special result. This means that the restart control for restarting the display game is selected and executed.

Further, the variation mode information of the first variation display game and the second variation display game includes information on the variation time in which the execution time of the variation display game can be specified, and the first variation display game and the second variation display game. For each of the above, a measuring means (game control device 100) that starts measuring the variable time according to the start of the variable display game and ends the measurement of the variable time of the variable display game when the measured time elapses. ), And the first variable display game execution control means and the second variable display game execution control means end the variable display of the variable display game being executed in response to the measurement means ending the measurement of the variable time. The measuring means interrupts the measurement of the variable time of one variable display game based on the special result of the other variable display game when the restart control is selected by the selection means. It means that the measurement of the fluctuation time of one of the fluctuation display games, which was interrupted after the special game state based on the fluctuation display game of the above, is resumed.

[Fifth variant]
Next, a fifth modification of the gaming machine of the third embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that basically, the machine has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the third embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and the description is mainly different. The part will be explained. In the gaming machine of this modification, the display method and the configuration of the batch display device 50 are different.

FIG. 257 shows a display method of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 at the start of fluctuation. As shown in FIG. 257 (a), when the variation display of the next special figure variation display game is started from the state in which the deviation of the previous special figure variation display game or the result mode of the special result is displayed, all the lights are turned off. Try to start from the state of. By doing this, it becomes possible to immediately know that the fluctuation has started. It should be noted that, during the fluctuation, all the lights are turned off and the symbols that are not used are repeated. However, as shown in FIG. In any case, it will be immediately known that the fluctuation has started regardless of where it started. Further, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may have different symbols, such as a symbol that is off, a symbol that lights up first at the start of fluctuation, and a symbol that is displayed during the fluctuation display.

FIG. 258 shows another example of the configuration of the batch display device 50. As shown in FIG. 258 (a), in the batch display device 50, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs arranged in a straight line. In addition to this, LEDu having functions of LEDs q to t functioning as a storage display unit 54 for notifying the start memory number of the special figure 1 variable display game, a round display unit 60, a first game state display unit 77, and a probability display unit 78. ~ X is provided. In addition, other functions may be assigned.

As shown in FIG. 258 (b), in the special figure 1 display 51, a misaligned symbol is configured by turning on the LEDs a and b, and the misaligned symbol and all the lights are turned off repeatedly during the variable display. Further, as shown in FIG. 258 (c), in the special figure 2 display 52, a misaligned symbol is configured by turning on only the LEDi, and this misaligned symbol and all extinguishing are repeated during the variable display. As described above, the out-of-order symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game and the out-of-order symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game are different.

Further, the display mode during the variable display of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 configured in this way may be a display mode other than the above, and for example, one or a plurality of LEDs may blink or alternate. It is also possible to turn on and off the adjacent LEDs in sequence so that light flows in the direction from the LED at one end to the LED at the other end by repeating turning on, off the symbol, and turning on all. Further, as shown in FIG. 259, the number of LEDs may be different between the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. In this case, any special figure display may be controlled so that the time for light to flow from the LED at one end to the LED at the other end is the same. That is, the special figure 2 display 52, which has a larger number of LEDs than the special figure 1 display 51, may have a faster light flow speed. Of course, the speed at which light flows may be the same. In addition, the out-of-order symbols and the fluctuating symbols may be different.

When the number of LEDs is different between the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, more result modes can be set for the special figure having a larger number. That is, when there are a plurality of small hits due to different opening modes as in the present embodiment, a game ball is won in the special figure 2 start winning opening 37 by right-handing to the extent that it is not determined to be fraudulent in the normal state. It is highly conceivable that a fraudulent act of aiming at the first special variable winning device 38 will be performed when the LED of the special figure 2 display 52 is viewed after the lapse of a predetermined variable time and the result mode corresponds to the long opening. On the other hand, for example, if the number of LEDs of the special figure 2 display 52 is increased, more small hit result modes can be set, and the player can easily recognize the long opening result mode. It disappears and the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be prevented.

FIG. 260 shows another example of the configuration of the batch display device 50. The batch display device 50 includes LEDs of a to y and z1 to z4. Then, a covering member 95 made of a seal or a plate material is attached to the front surface so as to cover the front surface of the batch display device 50. In the covering member 95, the portions of LEDs a to y, which are the portions used during the game, are transparent, and at first glance, it can be seen that the LEDs are present. It suffices if the LED can be seen at a glance, and it may be translucent, translucent, or hollowed out.

Further, the covering member 95 has a display indicating the function of the LED adjacent to a necessary portion of the portion where the presence of the LED can be seen at first glance. For example, the LEDu forming the round display unit 60 is formed. At the positions adjacent to ~ x, the number of rounds notified when each is lit is displayed.

The LEDs z1 to z4 that are not used during the game are hidden by the covering member 95 so that the presence of the LED cannot be recognized at first glance. The LEDs z1 to z4 may not be used at all as a function of the gaming machine. However, if it is inconvenient to have an unused LED, for example, it is used as an LED for notifying RAM initialization, and the portion of the covering member 95 that covers LEDs z1 to z4 is seemingly LED when the LED is off. Make it translucent so that you can not know that it exists and you can check the lighting state.

By using such a batch display device 50 and a covering member 95, the function of each LED and the configuration of the covering member 95 can be set according to the model, so that the batch display device 50 can be used in common even for different models. Can be used.

FIG. 261 shows another example of the configuration of the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 in the batch display device 50. As shown in FIG. 261 (a), the arrangement of the LEDs of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is different.

In such a configuration, even if the LED number to be turned on for the result mode and the changing symbol is common to the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the symbol has a different shape on the display. can do. For example, FIG. 261 (a) shows a state in which a misaligned symbol is displayed on both the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. In this out-of-order symbol, LEDs 2 and 5 are turned on in any of the special symbol indicators, but because the arrangement of the LEDs is different, the symbol has a different shape on the display. As a result, even if the symbol data common to the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is used, the symbols can be displayed in different shapes, and various symbols can be expressed by using the common data. be able to.

FIG. 261 (b) shows the display during fluctuation in the special figure 1 display 51. In the variable display, all the lights are turned off and the predetermined LED is turned on repeatedly. Here, before the reach occurs (during the first half fluctuation), all the lights are turned off and the LEDs 6 and 7 are turned on repeatedly, and during the N reach, all the lights are turned off and the LEDs 2 and 5 are turned on repeatedly. Further, during SP1 reach, all extinguishing and lighting of LEDs 1 and 3 are repeated, and during SP2 reach, all extinguishing and lighting of LEDs 4 and 8 are repeated. By making the lighting points different depending on the fluctuation pattern in this way, it is possible to perform various effects.

For example, in the case of SP1 reach, the display mode may be such that all lights are turned off and LEDs 1 and 3 are turned on repeatedly before the reach occurs, and the special figure display may notify the occurrence of the reach. Further, as the lighting mode during fluctuation, a lighting mode that suggests or deterministically notifies the occurrence of a big hit may be provided, and the occurrence of a big hit may be suggested or notified on the special figure display.

FIG. 262 shows another example of the configuration of the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 in the batch display device 50. As shown in FIG. 262 (a), the special figure 1 display 51 is composed of LEDs arranged in an annular shape, and displays such that light circulates during variable display. Then, the display of the result mode is performed by turning on one or a plurality of LEDs. Of course, the special figure 2 display 52 has the same configuration. Further, the special figure display may form some kind of design, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 262 (b), the shape of a mushroom is formed.

[Sixth variant]
Next, a sixth modification of the gaming machine of the third embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that basically, the machine has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the third embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and the description is mainly different. The part will be explained. The content of the game is different in the gaming machine of this modified example.

As shown in FIG. 263, in this modification, there are four gaming states of low probability disadvantage mode M1, high probability disadvantage mode M2, high probability advantage mode M3, and low probability advantage mode M4, based on the derivation of special results and the like. These gaming states are transitioned. Here, in the name of each gaming state, low probability means a low probability state, and high probability means a high probability state. In addition, the disadvantage is the special figure 1 variable display game, which has a low probability of small hits and is disadvantageous to the player because the long fluctuation (about 10 minutes) with a very long fluctuation time is set in the special figure 2 variable display game. It means that the game is being promoted mainly by. Further, "advantage" means that the long variation is not set in the special figure 2 variation display game, the probability of occurrence of a small hit is high, and the game is advanced mainly in the special figure 2 variation display game which is advantageous for the player. ..

The low probability disadvantage mode M1 is a gaming state corresponding to a normal gaming state, and the high probability advantage mode M3 is a gaming state corresponding to a specific gaming state. Further, the high probability disadvantage mode M2 is a so-called latent state, and the player cannot clearly determine whether the player is in the low probability disadvantage mode M1 or the high probability disadvantage mode M2. This effect state is also set when the 2R normal or small hit is won in the low probability disadvantage mode M1. The low probability advantage mode M4 is similar to the time saving state in the conventional gaming machine. In this game state, since the game progresses mainly in the special figure 2 variable display game, it is possible to wait for the next big hit without reducing the number of balls held due to the high frequency of small hits.

The hit types in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 are as shown in FIG. 263, respectively. Of these, the probabilistic jackpot is a jackpot that becomes a high-probability state until the special figure fluctuation display game is executed 50 times after the end of the special gaming state, and the normal jackpot is a jackpot that becomes a low-probability state after the end of the special gaming state. Is.

In addition, the number of prize balls obtained by a small hit and the fluctuation time may be adjusted so that the number of balls held tends to increase in the low probability advantage mode M4. Since this low probability advantage mode M4 continues until the next big hit, it can be continued for a long period of time, and the number of balls held can be gradually increased during this period, and a large amount of prize balls can be obtained in a short time in a special gaming state. The game can be different from that of. Furthermore, in the right-handed game, both the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37 can be won, and the special figure 1 variable display game, which is usually a big hit in the low probability advantage mode M4, has started. In this case, a special result may be generated in the special figure 2 variable display game to prevent the normal jackpot of the special figure 1 variable display game, and a notification prompting the user to maintain the low probability advantage mode M4 may be performed.

In the gaming machine having a plurality of gaming states as described above, the effect setting according to the gaming state is made by the effect control device 300. However, if the effect control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the effect control device 300 that does not have the backup function loses the information on the gaming state, so that an appropriate effect cannot be performed. In order to minimize the inconvenience caused by such a situation, the game control device 100 transmits information regarding the game state to the effect control device 300 at a predetermined timing.

The game control device 100 sends the probability information command shown in FIG. 264 (a) including the game state information to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state and at the start of the special figure variation display game when the game state is switched. Send. As shown in FIG. 264 (b), at the start of the special figure variation display game (t171) when the gaming state is low probability disadvantage, the command of A801h which is a probability information command indicating low probability disadvantage. Is transmitted to the effect control device 300. Further, at the start of the special gaming state (t172) that occurs when the low probability is disadvantageous, the command of A801h, which is a probability information command indicating that the low probability is disadvantageous, is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Here, since the result was a probable change jackpot, the gaming state shifts to a high probable advantage by the end of the special gaming state. Along with this, a command of A802h, which is a probability information command indicating a high probability advantage, is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (t173). Based on the reception of this command, the effect control device 300 performs a highly accurate and advantageous effect.

Then, at the start of the special figure variation display game (t174, t175) when the gaming state is highly accurate, a command of A802h, which is a probability information command indicating that the game is highly accurate, is sent to the effect control device 300. Send. After that, the power supply of the effect control device 300 is cut off for some reason (t176), and the display on the display device 41 is not displayed (black display). During this time, the game is progressing in the game control device 100, but the decorative special figure variation display game or the like is not performed in the display device 41.

After that, when the power supply of the effect control device 300 is restored, the effect control device 300 is activated (t177). The effect control device 300 displays the restored image on the display device 41 until some command is received from the game control device 100 (t177 to t178). Then, when the command of A802h, which is a probability information command indicating that the special figure variation display game is started, is received from the game control device 100, the decorative special figure variation display game is started with the effect of high accuracy advantage. (T178). By doing so, it becomes possible to return to the production according to the game state without waiting for the probability information command based on the change of the game state to be transmitted.

Further, the game control device 100 is in a state where neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game executes the customer waiting command shown in FIG. 265 (a) including the game state information. It is transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the time of setting a certain customer waiting. As shown in FIG. 265 (b), the power supply of the effect control device 300 is cut off (t181) for some reason, and then the power supply of the effect control device 300 is restored and the effect control device 300 is started (t). t182).

If the special figure variation display game is started after the effect control device 300 is restored, the probability information command including the game state information is transmitted as described above, so that the effect can be restored according to the game state. Neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, and the customer waiting setting is made (t184).

The game control device 100 transmits a command of 8002h, which is a customer waiting command indicating that the customer waiting command is highly advantageous when setting the customer waiting, and the effect control device 300 is highly accurate based on the information of the customer waiting command. Set the production and wait for customers. By doing so, it becomes possible to return to the production according to the game state without waiting for the probability information command based on the change of the game state to be transmitted.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment as the gaming machine, and is, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the gaming ball of. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses a game ball. In addition, the configurations of the above-described embodiments and modifications can be appropriately combined and applied.

It should also be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

10 Game machine 300 effect control device (content information setting means, effect mode storage means, effect mode setting means, content information changing means, password data storage means, match determination means, effect operation control means)
900 rotation display device (directing operation device)

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can perform production,
A production storage means that can store multiple effects,
Prescribed information collecting means for collecting predetermined information including information related to the game, and
Based on the collection predetermined information which is the predetermined information collected by the predetermined information collecting means, an executable effect is specified from the plurality of effects, and an effect that can be executed according to an increase in the collected predetermined information is specified. Executable production identification means to increase the production to be specified as,
An execution effect setting means for selecting and setting an effect to be executed from the effects specified by the enableable effect specifying means, and an execution effect setting means.
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
Based on the operation of the operation means, the effect changing means for setting the effect selectable by the execution effect setting means to be changeable, and the effect changing means.
It is equipped with a game store setting means that enables predetermined settings related to the production based on the operation of the game store .
The effects specified by the current collection schedule information include the effects specified by the collection schedule information before the change to the current collection schedule information.
The effect changing means is
The effect that the execution effect setting means does not include the effect newly specified based on the change to the current collection predetermined information, and is the effect specified by the collection predetermined information before the change to the current collection predetermined information. Set to be changeable so that the effect to be executed is selected from the effect of the predetermined range that includes only the effect.
The settings related to the effect can be set by the operation of the operation means of the player, the first setting that can be set by the game store setting means, and the operation of the operation means of the player. A gaming machine characterized in that there is a second setting that cannot be set, and the setting by the effect changing means is the second setting .

Images